TAC100XTenglish V1.0

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
COPY RIGHTS
This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of
the system in detail as much as possible. However, it is impractical
to give particular descriptions of all unnecessary and/or unavailable
operations of the system due to the manual content limit, product
specific operations and other causes. Therefore, the operations not
specified herein shall be considered impossible or unallowable.
This user manual is the property of TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CO.,LTD
All rights are reserved. It is against the law for any organization or
individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express
written permission of TOMATECH and the latter reserves the right
to ascertain their legal liability.
TOMATECH(SHENZHEN)AUTOMATION CO.,LIMITED
Add.: 303,No.6 Minhuan Rd. Longhua New Distr. Shenzhen, China
Tel:+86 755 85276656
Web.: www.tomatech-cnc.com
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
FOREWORD
Dear user,
We are really grateful for your patronage and purchase of thisTAC-100XT
Turning CNC system made by TOMATECH AUTOMATION CO.,LTD
The user manual describes the programming, operation, installation and
connection
of thisTAC-100XT Turning CNC system. Please read it carefully before
operation in order to get the safe and effective working.
Warning
This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as
improper operations may cause accidents.
Please carefully read this user manual before use!
Note: The power supply installed on (in) the cabinet is exclusive to
TOMATECHS CNC systems.
The power supply form is forbidden to be used for other purposes.
Otherwise, there may be extreme danger!
This user manual shall be kept by final user.

Notes
III
Notes
Delivery and storage
Packing box over 6 layers in pile is unallowed.
Never climb the packing box, neither stand on it, nor place heavy objects on it.
Do not move or drag the product by the cables connected with it.
Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and displayer.
Packing box should be protected from damping, insolation and raining.
Open packing box to check
Ensure things in packing box are the required ones.
Ensure the product is not damaged in delivery.
Ensure the parts in packing box are in accordance to the order.
Contact us in time if the product type is inconsistent with the order, there is short of
accessories, or product damage in delivery.
Connection
Only qualified persons can connect the system or check the connection.
The system must be earthed, its resistance must be less than 4 and the ground wire
cannot be replaced by zero wire.
Connection must be correct and firm to avoid the product to be damaged or other
unexpected result.
Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid the damage to the system.
Switch off power supply before pulling out plug or opening electric cabinet.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Troubleshooting
Switch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components.
Troubleshoot and then startup the system when there is short circuit or overload.
Do not switch on or off it frequently and an interval is 1 minute at least after the system
is powered on again.
All specification and designs are subject to change without further notice.
Warning
Please read this user manual and a manual from machine builder
completely before installation, programming and operation; do operate the
system and machine according to user manuals, otherwise it may damage the
system, machine, workpiece and even injure the operator.
Cautions
Functions, technical indexes described in this user manual are only for the
system. Actual functions and technical performance of machine tool with this
CNC system are determined by machine builders design, so refer to its user
manual.
The system is employed with integrated machine control panel and the keys
on machine control panel are defined by PLC program. Functions of keys in
this user manual are for standard PLC program. Please notice it!
Refer to user manual from machine manufacturer about functions and

meanings of keys on machine control panel.
Announcement
This manual describes various items as much as possible. However,
operations allowable or unallowable can not be explained one by one due to
so many possibilities that may involve with, so the contents that are not
specially stated in this manual shall be considered to be unavailable.
Summary
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming
TAC-100XT CNC Technical Specification, Product
Type, Command and Program Format
Operation
TAC-100XT CNC Operation Use
Installation and Connection

TAC-100XT CNC Installation, Connection and Setting
Appendix
CNC Ladder Function Allocation, Alarm Message
Table
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Safety Responsibility
Manufacturers safety responsibility
The manufacturer should be responsible for the cleared or the controlled safety in
the design and the structure of the CNC system and the accessories.
The manufacturer should be responsible for the CNC system and the accessories.
The manufacturer should be responsible for the message and the suggestion for the
user.
Users safety responsibility

The user should study and train the system safety operation, master the safety
operation content.
The user should be responsible for the danger caused by increasing, changing or
modifying the CNC system, the accessories by itself.
The user should be responsible for the danger because of the mistaken operation,
regulation, maintenance, installation and storage.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CONTENTS
Programming
CHAPTER 1
PROGRAMMING.........................................................................................................1
1.1TAC-1002T
Introduction .................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Product introduction........................................................................................ ...1
1.1.2 Technical specification ...................................................................................... 2
1.1.3 Environment and conditions............................................................................... 4
1.1.4 Power supply ......................................................................................................5
1.1.5 Guard.................................................................................................................. 5
1.2 CNC System of Machine Tools and CNC
Machine.Tools........................................................................................................ 5
1.3.Programming.Fundamentals ................................................................................. 7
1.3.1 Coordinates definition ........................................................................................ 7
1.3.2 Machine coordinate system, Machine Zero and machine reference point ......... 7
1.3.3 Workpiece coordinate system and Program Zero............................................... 8
1.3.4 Interpolation function ...........................................................................................9
1.3.5 Absolute programming and incremental programming ..................................... 10
1.3.6 Diameter programming and radius programming ............................................. 10
1.4 Structure of an NC program................................................................ 11
1.4.1 General structure of a program.......................................................................... 11
1.4.2 Main program and subprogram.......................................................................... 15
1.5 Program run....15
1.5.1 Sequence of program run .................................................................................. 15
1.5.2 Execution sequence of word............................................................................... 16
1.6 Basic Axis Incremental system.17
1.6.1 Incremental system speed of basic axis ............................................................ 17
1.6.2 Incremental system unit of basic axis ................................................................ 17
1.6.3 Incremental system data range of basic axis ..................................................... 18
1.6.4 Incremental system data range and unit of basic axis ....................................... 18
1.6.5 Program address value unit and range of incremental system of basic axis....... 20
1.7 Additional Axis Incremental
system ..21
1.7.1 Additional axis being the current incremental system......................................... 21
1.7.2 Additional axis being IS-A incremental system................................................... 21
CHAPTER 2 MSTF
COMMAND .................................................................................................................22
2.1 M (Miscellaneous function)..22
End of program M02................................................................................................... 22
End of program run M30............................................................................................. 22
Subprogram call M98.................................................................................................. 23
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Return from subprogram M99..................................................................................... 23

Macro program call M9000M9999........................................................................... 24
M commands defined by standard PLC ladder diagram............................................. 24
Program stop M00 ......................................................................................................25
Program optional stop M01 ........................................................................................ 25
Spindle CW, CCW and stop control M03, M04, M05.................................................. 26
Cooling control M08, M09............................................................................................26
Tailstock control M10, M11...26
Chuck control M12, M13............................................................................................. 26
Spindle position/speed control switch M14, M15........................................................ 26
Spindle clamped/released M20, M21 ......................................................................... 27
The 2nd spindle position/speed switch M24, M25...................................................... 27
Lubricating control M32, M33...................................................................................... 27
Spindle automatic gear change M41, M42, M43, M44................................................ 27
Spindle 8-point orientation M50M58 ....................................................................... 27
The 2nd spindle rotation CCW, rotation CW , stop M63, M64, M65............................ 27
2.2 Spindle function..28
2.2.1 Spindle speed switching value control ............................................................... 28
2.2.2 Spindle speed analog voltage control ................................................................ 28
2.2.3 Constant surface speed control G96, constant rotational speed control G97...... 29
2.2.4 Spindle override.................................................................................................. 31
2.2.5 Multiple spindle control function......................................................................... 32
2.2.6 Cs contour control function................................................................................. 33
2.3 Tool Function ........................................................................................................ 33
2.3.1 Tool control ........................................................................................................ 33
2.3.2 Tool life management ........................................................................................ 37
CHAPTER 3 G
COMMANDS................................................................................................................46
3.1 Commands ........................................................................................................... 46
3.1.1 Modal, non-modal and initial mode.................................................................... 47
3.1.2 Omitting words................................................................................................... 48
3.1.3 Related definitions ............................................................................................. 49
3.2 Rapid Traverse Movement G00 ........................................................................... 49
3.3 Linear Interpolation G01........................................................................................ 50
3.4 Circular Interpolation G02, G03............................................................................. 51
3.5 Three-point Circular Interpolation G05...................................................................54
3.6 Ellipse Interpolation G6.2, G6.3 ............................................................................56
3.7 Parabola Interpolation G7.2, G7.3........................................................................ 59
3.8 Plane Selection G17~G19.................................................................................... 61
3.9 Polar Coordinate Interpolation G12.1,G13.1........................................................ 62
3.10 Cylindrical Interpolation G7.1............................................................................. 65
3.11 Chamfering Function.......................................................................................... 68
3.11.1 Linear chamfering............................................................................................ 68
3.11.2 Circular chamfering......................................................................................... 70
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.11.3 Special cases.................................................................................................. 72

3.12 Dwell G04........................................................................................................... 74
3.13 Machine Zero Function ...................................................................................... 74
3.13.1 Machine 1st reference point G28 ................................................................... 74
3.13.2 Machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point G30..................................................... 75
3.14 Skip Interpolation G31........................................................................................ 77
3.15 Automatic Tool Offset G36, G37........................................................................ 79
3.16 Workpiece Coordinate System G50 .................................................................. 81
3.17 Local Coordinate System................................................................................... 82
3.18 Workpiece Coordinate System G54G59 ....................................................... 84
3.19 Fixed Cycle Command ..................................................................................... 87
3.19.1 Axial cutting cycle G90................................................................................... 87
3.19.2 Radial cutting cycle G94................................................................................. 90
Contents
III
3.19.3 Caution of fixed cycle commands................................................................... 92
3.20 Multiple Cycle Commands................................................................................. 93
3.20.1 Axial roughing cycle G71 ............................................................................... 93
3.20.2 Radial roughing cycle G72.............................................................................. 99
3.20.3 Closed cutting cycle G73................................................................................ 103
3.20.4 Finishing cycle G70 ....................................................................................... 107
3.20.5 Axial grooving multiple cycle G74 .................................................................. 108
3.20.6 Radial grooving multiple cycle G75................................................................. 111
3.21 Thread Cutting Commands................................................................................ 114
3.21.1 Thread cutting with constant lead G32............................................................ 115
3.21.2 Rigid thread cutting G32.1............................................................................... 117
3.21.3 Thread cutting with variable lead G34............................................................. 119
3.21.4 Z thread cutting G33........................................................................................ 121
3.21.5 Rigid tapping G84, G88................................................................................... 122
3.21.6 Thread cutting cycle G92................................................................................. 125
3.21.7 Multiple thread cutting cycle G76..................................................................... 128
3.22 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational Speed Control
G97.......................................................................................................................132
3.23 Feedrate per Minute G98, Feedrate per Rev G99 ............................................. 133
3.24. Additional Axis Function......................................................................................135
3.24.1 Additional axis start.......................................................................................... 135
3.24.2 Motion of additional axis................................................................................... 135
3.24.3 Additional axis coordinates display.................................................................. 135
3.25 Macro Commands...............................................................................................135
3.25.1 MACRO variables ........................................................................................... 136
3.25.2 Operation and jump command G65 ................................................................140
3.25.3 Program example with macro command......................................................... 143
3.26 Statement Macro Command............................................................................... 146
3.26.1 Arithmetic and logic operation.......................................................................... 146
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.26.2 Transfer and cycle............................................................................................ 147

3.27 Metric/Inch Switch............................................................................................... 150
CHAPTER 4 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41, G42) ..........................152
4.1 Application ........................................................................................................... 152
4.1.1 Overview............................................................................................................152
4.1.2 Imaginary tool nose direction ........................................................................... 152
4.1.3 Compensation value setting.............................................................................. 156
4.1.4 Command format ............................................................................................. 157
4.1.5 Compensation direction ................................................................................... 157
4.1.6 Notes ................................................................................................................ 159
4.1.7 Application ........................................................................................................160
4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path..................................................... 161
4.2.1 Inner and outer side.......................................................................................... 161
4.2.2 Tool traversing when starting tool..................................................................... 162
4.2.3 Tool traversing in Offset mode.......................................................................... 163
4.2.4 Tool traversing in Offset canceling mode ..........................................................167
4.2.5 Tool interference check..................................................................................... 168
4.2.6 Commands for canceling compensation vector temporarily.............................. 170
Operation
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY
INTERFACE...................................................................................................................173
1.1 Panel
Division...........................................................................................................................173
1.1.1 State indication ......................................................................................................174
1.1.2 Edit keypad............................................................................................................174
1.1.3 Menu display .........................................................................................................175
1.1.4 Machine panel .......................................................................................................176
1.2 Summary of Operation..............................................................................................179
1.3 Display Interface ......................................................................................................179
1.3.1 POS interface ........................................................................................................179
1.3.2 PRG interface........................................................................................................184
1.3.3 TOOL OFFSET Interface ......................................................................................189
1.3.4 ALARM interface ...................................................................................................193
1.3.5 Setting interface.....................................................................................................194
1.3.6 PARAMETER Interfaces........................................................................................196
1.3.7 Diagnosis Interface................................................................................................198
1.3.8 Graph Interface......................................................................................................199
1.3.9 Ladder Interface ....................................................................................................200
CHAPTER 2 POWER ON/OFF AND PROTECTION.....................................................205
2.1 System Power-on ....................................................................................................205
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.2 System Power-off ....................................................................................................205

2.3 Overtravel Protection ...............................................................................................206
2.3.1 Hardware overtravel protection..............................................................................206
2.3.2 Software Overtravel Protection..............................................................................206
2.4 Emergency Operation...............................................................................................207
2.4.1 Reset .....................................................................................................................207
2.4.2 Emergency stop.....................................................................................................207
2.4.3 Feed hold...............................................................................................................207
2.4.4 Power-off ...............................................................................................................207
CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION .............................................................................209
3.1 Coordinate Axis Move...............................................................................................209
3.1.1 Manual feed...........................................................................................................209
3.1.2 Manual rapid traverse............................................................................................209
3.1.3 Speed tune ............................................................................................................210
3.2 Other Manual Operations ........................................................................................ 211
3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control ............................................................................211
3.2.2 Spindle jog.............................................................................................................211
3.2.3 Cooling control.......................................................................................................212
3.2.4 Lubricating control .................................................................................................212
3.2.5 Chuck control.........................................................................................................212
3.2.6 Tailstock control ....................................................................................................213
3.2.7 Hydraulic control....................................................................................................213
3.2.8 Manual tool change ...............................................................................................213
3.2.9 Spindle override.....................................................................................................214
CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION .........................................................................215
4.1 Step Feed .................................................................................................................215
Contents
4.1.1 Increment selection................................................................................................215
4.1.2 Moving direction selection .....................................................................................216
4.2 MPG(handwheel) Feed.............................................................................................216
4.2.1 Increment selection................................................................................................217
4.2.2 Moving axis and direction selection .......................................................................217
4.2.3 Other operations ...................................................................................................218
4.2.4 Explanation items ..................................................................................................219
CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION .....................................................................................220
5.1 Block Input ...............................................................................................................220
5.2 Block Execution .......................................................................................................221
5.3 Parameter Setting ....................................................................................................221
5.4 Data Alteration .........................................................................................................222
5.5 Other Operations ......................................................................................................222
CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT ...................................................223
6.1 Program Creation......................................................................................................223
6.1.1 Creating a block number........................................................................................223
6.1.2 Inputting a program................................................................................................223
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
6.1.3 Searching a character............................................................................................226

6.1.4 Inserting a character .............................................................................................229
6.1.5 Deleting a character...............................................................................................230
6.1.6 Altering a character................................................................................................230
6.1.7 Deleting a single block...........................................................................................231
6.1.8 Copying and pasting a block..................................................................................232
6.1.9 Canceling and recovering a program.....................................................................233
6.1.10 Program save ......................................................................................................233
6.1.11 Macro program edit..............................................................................................234
6.1.12 Creating and modifying a program annotation.....................................................234
6.2 Deleting Programs ...................................................................................................235
6.2.1 Deleting a program................................................................................................235
6.2.2 Deleting all programs.............................................................................................237
6.3 Selecting a Program .................................................................................................238
6.3.1 Searching...............................................................................................................238
6.3.2 Scanning................................................................................................................239
6.3.3 Direct confirmation.................................................................................................239
6.4 Executing a Program ...............................................................................................240
6.5 Renaming a Program................................................................................................241
6.6 Copying a Program...................................................................................................242
6.7 Program Management .............................................................................................244
6.7.1 Program list .........................................................................................................244
6.8 Other Operations Available in Edit Mode ...............................................................244
CHAPTER 7 TOOL OFFSET AND SETTING ..............................................................246
7.1 Tool Positioning Setting...........................................................................................246
7.2 Trial Toolsetting.......................................................................................................247
7.3 Toolsetting by Machine Zero Return .......................................................................248
7.4 Coordinates Record ................................................................................................251
7.5 Setting and Altering the Offset Value ......................................................................252
7.5.1 Offset setting.........................................................................................................252
VI
7.5.2 Offset alteration .....................................................................................................252
7.5.3 Offset alteration in communication mode...............................................................253
7.5.4 Clearing the offset values ......................................................................................253
7.5.5 Setting and altering the tool wear ..........................................................................253
7.5.6 Locking and unlocking the offset value ..................................................................254
7.5.7 No.0 tool offset moving workpiece coordinate system...........................................254
CHAPTER 8 AUTO OPERATION...................................................................................256
8.1 Automatic Run ..........................................................................................................256
8.1.1 Selection of a program running.............................................................................256
8.1.2 Start of automatic run ............................................................................................256
8.1.3 Stop of automatic run.............................................................................................256
8.1.4 Automatic run from an arbitrary block....................................................................257
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
8.1.5 Adjustment of the feedrate, rapid rate ...................................................................258

8.1.6 Spindle speed adjustment......................................................................................258
8.2 Running State ..........................................................................................................259
8.2.1 Single block execution...........................................................................................259
8.2.2 Dry run...................................................................................................................259
8.2.3 Machine lock..........................................................................................................259
8.2.4 MST lock................................................................................................................260
8.2.5 Block skip ..............................................................................................................260
8.3 MPG Trial-cut............................................................................................................260
8.3.1 Switching MPG trial-cut mode ...............................................................................260
8.3.2 Command speed in MPG trial-cut mode................................................................261
8.3.3 Notes in MPG trial-cut mode..................................................................................262
8.3.4 Temporarily invalid in MPG trial-cut mode .............................................................262
8.4 Other Operations .....................................................................................................263
CHAPTER 9 ZERO RETURN OPERATION .................................................................264
9.1 Program Zero Return...............................................................................................264
9.1.1 Program Zero .......................................................................................................264
9.1.2 Program zero return steps .....................................................................................264
9.2 Machine Zero Return ...............................................................................................265
9.2.1 Machine Zero.........................................................................................................265
9.2.2 Machine Zero return steps.....................................................................................265
9.3 Other Operations in Zero Return ............................................................................266
CHAPTER 10 DATA SETTING ....................................................................................267
10.1 Data Setting ..........................................................................................................267
10.1.1 Switch setting .....................................................................................................267
10.1.2 Level setting .......................................................................................................267
10.1.3 Parameter operation...........................................................................................270
10.2 Clock Setting..........................................................................................................271
10.3 Graphic Display ....................................................................................................272
10.4 Parameter Setting.................................................................................................275
10.4.1 State parameter ................................................................................................275
10.4.2 Data parameter, pitch compensation ................................................................278
10.4.3 Often used parameters .....................................................................................280
CHAPTER 11 U OPERATION FUNCTION .................................................................283
11.1 File Management Function Introduction...............................................................283
Contents
VII
11.2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction ..................................................283
11.2.1 File extension and return......................................................................................283
11.2.2 File selection and cancellation of file selection.....................................................284
11.2.3 File copy...............................................................................................................286
11.3 Data Copy and Resume.........................................................................................286
11.3.1 Entering backup/resume page ...........................................................................286
11.3.2 Backup/resume operation ..................................................................................287
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
11.3.3 Operation path selection ....................................................................................287

11.3.4 Format of data backup/resume file.......................................................................288
11.3.5 Level explanation of data backup/resume operation............................................289
11.4 Notes......................................................................................................................289
CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATION.................................................................................290
12.1TAC-100XT Communication Software
TOMATECHComm.........................................................................................................290
12.1.1 TOMATECHComms system (PC)
requirements..................................................................................................................290
12.1.2 Software interface...............................................................................................290
12.1.3 Receiving files (CNCPC).................................................................................291
12.1.4 Sending files (CNCPC)....................................................................................293
12.1.5 Part program management ................................................................................295
12.2 Preparatory before Communication ......................................................................296
12.2.1 Communication cable connection ......................................................................296
12.2.2 Communication setting baud rate ......................................................................296
CHAPTER 13 MACHINING EXAMPLES ......................................................................298
13.1 Programming .........................................................................................................299
13.2 Program Input .......................................................................................................301
13.2.1 View a saved program .......................................................................................301
13.2.2 Creating a new program ....................................................................................301
13.3 Checkout a Program..............................................................................................302
13.3.1 Graphic setting ...................................................................................................302
13.3.2 Program check...................................................................................................302
13.4 Toolsetting and Running ......................................................................................303
III Connection
CHAPTER 1 NSTALLATION LAYOUT.........................................................................307
1.1 GK980TDc System Connection .............................................................................307
1.1.1 GK980TDc,TAC-1002T-V rear cover interface layout ......................................... 308
1.1.2 Interface explanation .......................................................................................... 308
1.2TAC-1002T Installation..............................................................................................308
1.2.1TAC-1002T external dimensions........................................................................... 308
1.2.2 Preconditions of the cabinet installation.............................................................. 308
1.2.3 Measures against interference............................................................................ 308
CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION & CONNECTION OF INTERFACE
SIGNALS.......................................................................................................................310
2.1 Connection to Drive
Unit ...............................................................................................................................310
2.1.1 Drive interface definition ..................................................................................... 310
2.1.2 Code pulse and direction signals......................................................................... 310
2.1.3 Drive unit alarm signal nALM............................................................................... 310
VIII
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.1.4 Axis enable signal nEN........................................................................................ 311

2.1.5 Pulse disable signal nSET................................................................................... 311
2.1.6 Zero signal nPC................................................................................................... 311
2.1.7 Connection to a drive unit ................................................................................... 313
2.2 Being Connected with Spindle Encoder..................................................................314
2.2.1 Spindle encoder interface definition.................................................................... 314
2.2.2 Signal explanation .............................................................................................. 314
2.2.3 Being connected with spindle encoder interface................................................. 314
2.3 Being Connected with MPG (Manual Pulse Generator).........................................315
2.3.1 MPG interface definition .................................................................................... 315
2.3.2 Signal explanation ............................................................................................. 315
2.4 Spindle Interface....................................................................................................316
2.4.1 Spindle interface definition................................................................................. 316
2.4.2 Connection to inverter ....................................................................................... 317
2.5TAC-1002TTAC-100XT-V being Connected with
PC .............................................317
2.5.1 Communication interface definition .................................................................. 317
2.5.2 Communication interface connection................................................................ 317
2.6 Power Interface Connection .................................................................................318
2.7 I/O Interface Definition .........................................................................................318
2.7.1 Input signal ....................................................................................................... 320
2.7.2 Output signal .................................................................................................... 321
2.8 I/O Function and Connection ...............................................................................323
2.8.1 Stroke limit and emergency stop....................................................................... 323
2.8.2 Tool change control ........................................................................................ 325
2.8.3 Machine zero return........................................................................................ 332
2.8.4 Spindle control ............................................................................................... 338
2.8.5 Spindle switching volume control................................................................... 341
2.8.6 Spindle automatic gearing control................................................................. 342
2.8.7 Spindle eight-point orientation function......................................................... 343
2.8.8 Spindle Cs axis control function.................................................................... 347
2.8.9 Multiple spindle function .............................................................................. 350
2.8.10 Rigid tapping function ............................................................................... 354
2.8.11 External cycle start and feed hold............................................................. 355
2.8.12 Cooling control.......................................................................................... 356
2.8.13 Lubricating control .................................................................................... 356
2.8.14 Chuck control............................................................................................. 358
2.8.15 Tailstock control ........................................................................................ 360
2.8.16 Low pressure detection.............................................................................. 361
2.8.17 Hydraulic control (only applied to 980TDc-V) ........................................... 362
2.8.18 Safety door detection................................................................................. 363
2.8.19 CNC macro variables................................................................................ 363
2.8.20 External override ...................................................................................... 364
2.8.21 External MPG............................................................................................ 364
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.8.22 Tri-color Lamp........................................................................................... 365

2.8.23 Extended M Function...365
2.8.24 HOLD Control....367
2.8.25 Gear/tool number display 367
2.9 Commonly Use Symbol of Electricity Drawing................................................367
CHAPTER 3 PARAMETERS................................................................................369
Contents
IX
3.1 Parameter Description (by sequence)............................................................369
3.1.1 Bit parameter ..............................................................................................369
3.1.2 Data parameter............................................................................................378
3.1.3 PLC parametersstandard PLC definition ........................................... 393
3.2 Parameter Description (by function sequence) .............................................397
3.2.1 X, Z, Y, 4th,5th axis control logic.................................................................. 397
3.2.2 Acceleration & deceleration control .......................................................... 398
3.2.3 Precision compensation............................................................................ 400
3.2.4 Machine protection ................................................................................... 402
3.2.5 Machine zero return.................................................................................. 403
3.2.6 Threading function ................................................................................... 406
3.2.7 Spindle control ..........................................................................................406
3.2.8 Tool compensation.................................................................................... 409
3.2.9 Tool life management function ................................................................. 409
3.2.10 Tool wear parameter .............................................................................. 409
3.2.11 Edit and display.......................................................................................410
3.2.12 Communication setting ..........................................................................410
3.2.13 MPG Parameters .................................................................................. 410
3.2.14 PLC axis control function ...................................................................... 411
3.2.15 Skip function ......................................................................................... 411
3.2.16 Automatic tool setting function ............................................................. 411
3.2.17 Input and output function in metric and inch system ............................ 412
3.2.18 Parameters related to arc turning ........................................................ 412
3.2.19 Parameters related to the additional ....................................................413
CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND MODES ..................415
4.1 Emergency Stop and Limit .......................................................................415
4.2 Drive Unit Configuration............................................................................415
4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment..............................................................................415
4.4 ACC&DEC Characteristic Adjustment.......................................................416
4.5 Mechanical (Machine) Zero Adjustment....................................................417
4.6 Spindle Adjustment ..................................................................................419
4.6.1 Spindle encoder ....................................................................................419
4.6.2 Spindle brake.........................................................................................419
4.6.3 Switch volume control of spindle speed.................................................420
4.6.4 Analog voltage control of spindle speed ...............................................420
4.7 Backlash Offset.........................................................................................420
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4.8 Tool Post Debugging.................................................................................421

4.9 Step/MPG Adjustment...............................................................................422
CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE ...........................................................423
5.1 CNC Diagnosis ........................................................................................423
5.1.1 I/O status and data diagnosis message............................................... 423
5.1.2 CNC motion state and data diagnosis message ................................. 423
5.1.3 Diagnosis keys......................................................................................424
5.1.4 Others................................................................................................... 425
5.2 PLC State.................................................................................................425
5.2.1 X address (machinePLC , defined by standard PLC ladders............ 425
5.2.2 Y address (PLCmachine, defined by standard PLC ladders) ........... 427
5.2.3 Machine panel ......................................................................................429
X
5.2.4 F address(CNCPLC)......................................................................... 431
5.2.5 G address (PLCCNC) ...................................................................... 435
5.2.6 Address A (message display requiery signal, defined by standard PLC
ladders) .. 440
5.2.7 K addressK parameter, standard PLC definition............................ 441
5.3 PLC Data ..................................................................................................443
5.3.1 Timer address T(defined by standard PLC ladders) ............................. 443
5.3.2 Counter address C(Defined by standard PLC Ladders) ....................... 444
5.3.3 Timer presetting address DT(Defined by standard PLC ladders).......... 444
5.3.4 Counter presetting address DC ............................................................ 445
CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ....................446
6.1 Function Description .................................................................................446
6.2 Specification .............................................................................................446
6.3 Parameter Setting......................................................................................446
6.3.1 Pitch compensation .............................................................................. 446
6.3.2 Pitch error compensation number......................................................... 446
6.3.3 Pitch error compensation interval ......................................................... 447
6.3.4 Offset value ........................................................................................... 447
6.4 Notes of Offset Setting...............................................................................447
6.5 Setting Examples of Offset Parameters.....................................................447
Appendix
Appendix TAC-1002T,TAC-1002T-V contour
dimension........................................................................................................451
Appendix TAC-1002T-B outline
dimension .......................................................................................................452
Appendix Outline Dimension of Accessional Panel
AP01................................................................................................................452
AP02................................................................................................................453
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

AP03................................................................................................................453
Appendix Outline Dimension of I/O deconcentrator
MCT01A...........................................................................................................454
MCT02 ............................................................................................................454
Appendix Delivery standard
parameter .......................................................................................................455
Appendix Alarm
list....................................................................................................................462
Appendix Operation
list ...................................................................................................................470
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
I Programming
Chapter 1 Programming
1
Programming
CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING
1.1 TAC-100XT Introduction
1.1.1 Product introduction

TAC-100XT is a new upgraded software, its software, hardware based on TOMATECH,
its
structure horizontal and vertical, matched with 8.4 inch color LCD, with 5 feed axes
(including C axis),
2 analog spindles, least input increment 0.1m. It uses the graphic interface, friendly
human-machine operation window. It can realize the PLC on-line display, real-time
monitoring and MPG trial-cut function.
Being upgraded product of TOMATECH MST71X0 series,TAC-1002T CNC turning is the
better choice.
.
TAC-100XTT
X, Z, Y, 4th, 5th ; axis name and axis type of Y, 4th, 5th can be defined
2ms interpolation period, control precision 1m, 0.1m
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Max. speed 60m/minup to 24m/min in 0.1m

Adapting to the servo spindle to realize the spindle continuously positioning, rigid
tapping, and the rigid thread machining
Built-in multi PLC programs, and the PLC program currently running can be selected
G71 supporting flute contour cycle cutting
Statement macro command programming, macro program call with parameter
Metric/inch programming, automatic toolsetting, automatic chamfer, tool life
management function
Chinese, English, Spanish, Russian display can be selected by parameters.
USB interface, U disc file operation, system configuration and software
2-channel 0V10V analog voltage output, two-spindle control
1-channel MPG input, MPG function
41 input signals and 36 output signals
Appearance installation dimension and command system are compatible with those of
TOMATECH
1.1.2 Technical specification
Controllable axes
Controllable axes: 5X, Z, Y , 4th,5th
Link axes3
PLC controllable axes3X, Z, Y, 4th,5th
Feed axis function
Least input increment: 0.001mm0.0001inchand 0.0001mm0.00001inch
Least command increment0.001mm0.0001inchand 0.0001mm0.00001inch
Position command range: 99999999 least command unit
Rapid traverse speedmax. speed 60m/min in 0.001mm command unit, max. speed
24m/min in 0.0001mm command unit
Rapid override: F0, 25%, 50%, 100%
Feedrate override: 0150% 16 grades to tune
Interpolation mode: linear interpolation, arc interpolation(three-point arc interpolation),
thread interpolation, ellipse interpolation, parabola interpolation and rigid tapping
Automatic chamfer function
Thread function
General thread(following spindle)/rigid thread
Single/multi metric, inch straight thread, taper thread, end face thread, constant pitch
thread and variable pitch thread
Thread run-out length, angle, speed characteristics can be set
Thread pitch: 0.01mm500mm or 0.06 tooth/inch2540 tooth/inch
Acceleration/deceleration function
Cutting feed: linear
Rapid traverse: linear, S
Thread cutting: linear, exponential
Initial speed, termination speed, time of acceleration/deceleration can be set by
parameters
Spindle function
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2-channel 0V10V analog voltage output, two-spindle control

1-channel spindle encoder feedback, spindle encoder line can be set100p/r5000p/r
Transmission ratio between encoder and spindle:1255:1255
Spindle speed: it is set by S or PLC, and speed range: 0r/min9999r/min
Spindle override: 50%120% 8 grades tune
Spindle constant surface speed control
Rigid tapping
Tool function
Tool length compensation
Tool nose radius compensationC
Tool wear compensation
Tool life management
Toolsetting mode: fixed-point toolsetting, trial-cut toolsetting, reference point return
toolsetting, automatic toolsetting
Tool offset execution mode: modifying coordinate mode, tool traverse mode
Precision compensation
Backlash compensation
Memory pitch error compensation
PLC function
Two-level PLC programup to 5000 stepsthe 1st program refresh period 8ms
PLC program communication download
PLC warning and PLC alarm
Many PLC programsup to 16PCS, the PLC program currently running can be
selected
Basic I/O41 input signals /36 output signals
Man-machine interface
8.4 wide screen LCDresolution: 640480
Chinese, English, Spanish, Russian display
Planar tool path display
Real-time clock
Operation management
Operation mode: edit, auto, MDI, machine zero return, MPG/single, manual, program
zero return
Multi-level operation privilege management
Alarm record
Program edit
Program capacity: 40MB384 programsincluding subprograms and macro programs
Edit function: program/block word search, modification, deletion
Program format: ISO command, statement macro command programming, relative
coordinate, absolute coordinate and compound coordinate programming
Program call: macro program call with parameter, 4-level program built-in
Communication function
RS232two-way transmitting part programs and parameters, PLC program, system
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
software serial upgrade

USBU file operation, U file directly machining, PLC program, system software U
upgrade
Safety function
Emergency stop
Hardware travel limit
Software travel check
Data backup and recovery
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G command table
code Function code function

G00 Rapid traverse(positioning) G50 Float coordinate setting
G01 Linear Interpolation G54- Set workpiece coordinate
G59
G02 Clockwise circular interpolation G65 Macro calling(no modal)
G03 Anti-clockwise circular interpolation G71 Axial roughing cycle
G04 Pause/ Orientation G72 Radial roughing cycle
G17 Plane selection G73 Closed cutting cycle
G18 Plane selection G70 Finishing cutting cycle
G19 Plane selection G74 Axial grooving cycle
G10 Data input available G75 Radial roughing cycle
G11 Data input cacel G76 Multiple threading cutting
G20 Inch unit G80 Rigid tapping status cancel
G21 Metric input G84 Axial rigid tapping
G28 Return to home position G88 Radial rigid tapping
G30 Return to machine 2,3,4 ref.point G90 Axial cutting cycle
G31 Skip function G92 Threading cycle
G32 Constant pitch threading G94 Radial cutting cycle
G33 Z axes tapping cycle G96 Constant speed cutting
G34 Variable pitch threading G97 Constant speed cutting cancel
G40 Cancel tool nose radius G98 Feed per minute
compensation
G41 Left tool nose radius compensation G99 Feed per revolution
G42 Right tool nose radius compensation
1.1.3 Environment and conditions

TAC-100XT storage delivery, working environment as follows:
Item Working conditions Storage delivery conditions
Ambient temperature 045 -40+70
Ambient humidity 90%(no freezing) 95%(40)
Atmosphere pressure 86 kPa106 kPa 86 kPa106 kPa
Altitude 1000m 1000m
Programming
1.1.4 Power supply
TAC-100XT can normally run in the following AC input power supply.
Voltage: within(0.851.1)200V (rated AC input voltage);
Frequency: 49Hz51Hz continuously changing
1.1.5 Guard
TAC-100XT guard level is not less than IP20.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1.2 CNC System and CNC Machine

CNC machine tool is an electro-mechanical integrated product, composed of Numerical
Control Systems of Machine Tools, machines, electric control components, hydraulic
components, pneumatic components, lubricant, cooling and other subsystems
(components), and CNC systems of machine tools are control cores of CNC machine
tools. CNC systems of machine tools are made up of computerized numerical
control(CNC), servo (stepper) motor drive devices, servo (or stepper) motor etc.
Operational principles of CNC machine tools: according to requirements of machining
technology, edit user programs and input them to CNC, then CNC outputs motion control
commands to the servo (stepper) motor drive devices, and last the servo (or stepper)
motor completes the cutting feed of machine tool by mechanical driving device; logic
control commands in user programs to control spindle start/stop, tool selections, cooling
ON/OFF, lubricant ON/OFF are output to electric control systems of machine tools from
CNC, and then the electric control systems control output components including buttons,
switches, indicators, relays, contactors and so on. Presently, the electric control systems
are employed with Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) with characteristics of compact,
convenience and high reliance. Thereof, the motion control systems and logic control
systems are the main of CNC machine tools.
TAC-100XT Turning Machine CNC system has simultaneously motion control and logic
control function to control two axes of CNC machine tool to move, and has nested PLC
function. Edit PLC programs (ladder diagram) according to requirements of input and
output control of machine tool and then download them toTAC-1002T Turning Machine
CNC system, which realizes the required electric control requirements of machine tool, is
convenient to electric design of machine tool and reduces cost of CNC machine tool.
Software used to controlTAC-1002T Turning Machine CNC system is divided into system
software (NC for short) and PLC software (PLC for short). NC system is used to control
the display, communication, edit, decoding, interpolation and acceleration/deceleration,
and PLC system for controlling explanations, executions, inputs and outputs of ladder
diagrams. Standard PLC programs are loaded (except for the special order)
whenTAC-1002T Turning Machine CNC System is delivered, concerned PLC control
functions in following functions and operations are described according to control logics of
standard PLC programs, marking with Standard PLC functions in . Refer to Operation
Manual of machine manufacturer about functions and operations of PLC control because
the machine manufacturer may modify or edit PLC programs again.
Programming
Fig. 1-1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming is a course of workpiece contours, machining technologies, technology

parameters and tool parameters being edit into part programs according to special CNC
programming G codes. CNC machining is a course of CNC controlling a machine tool to
complete machining of workpiece according requirements of part programs.
Technical flow of CNC machining is as following Fig. 1-2.
Fig. 1-2
O0001
G00 X3.76 Z0
G01 Z-1.28 F50
M30
Analyse workpiece drawings and confirm

machining processing
Edit part programs and record into CNC
Test part programs and execute trial run
Check part dimension and modify part
programs and compensations
Execute toolsetting and set tool offsets and
coordinates
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Run part programs and machine workpiece

The machining ends and the workpiece is
formed
7
Programming
1.3 Programming Fundamentals

1.3.1 Coordinates definition
Sketch map of CNC turning machine is as follows:
Fig. 1-3
TAC-100XT uses a rectangular coordinate system composed of X, Z axis. X axis is
perpendicular with axes of spindle and Z axis is parallel with axes of spindle; negative
directions of them approach to the workpiece and positive ones are away from it.
There is a front tool post and a rear tool post of NC turning machine according to their
relative position between the tool post and the spindle, Fig. 1-4 is a coordinate system of
the front tool post and Fig. 1-5 is a rear tool post one. It shows exactly the opposite of X
axes, but the same of Z axes from figures. In the manual, it will introduce programming
application with the front tool post coordinate system in the following figures and
examples.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1.3.2 Machine coordinate system, Machine Zero and machine reference point
Machine tool coordinate system is a benchmark one used for CNC counting
coordinates and a fixed one on the machine tool. Machine tool zero is a fixed point which
position is specified by zero switch or zero return switch on the machine tool. Usually, the
zero return switch is installed on max. stroke in X, Z positive direction. Machine reference
point is located at the position at which the machine zero value adding the data parameter
No.114/No.115 value. When No.114/No.115 value is 0,the machine reference point
coincides with the machine zero. The coordinates of machine reference point is the
No.120/No.121 value. Machine zero return/G28 zero return is to execute the machine
reference point return. After the machine zero return/machine reference point return is
completed,TAC-1002T machine coordinate system which takes No.120 value as the
reference point, which is referred to I Programming, Section 3.13.
Note: Do not execute the machine reference point return without the reference point switch
installed on the machine, otherwise, the motion exceeds the travel limit and the machine to be
damaged.
1.3.3 Workpiece coordinate system and Program Zero
The workpiece coordinate system is a rectangular coordinate system based on the part
drawing,also called floating coordinate system. After the workpiece is installed on the
machine, the absolute coordinates of tools current position is set by G50 according to the
workpieces measure, and so the workpiece coordinate system is established in CNC.
Generally, Z axis of the workpiece coordinate system coincides with the spindle axis. The
established workpiece is valid till it is replaced by a new one. The system can set 6
workpiece coordinate systems G54~G59 in advance. Refer to I Programming, Section
3.18 about the details of workpiece coordinate system.
A sub workpiece coordinate system is created in a workpiece coordinate system, which is
called as a local coordinate system. Refer to I Programming, Section 3.17 about the
details of the local coordinate system.
The current position of workpiece coordinate system set by G50 is the program zero.
Note: Do not execute the machine reference point return without using G50 to set the workpiece
coordinate system after power on, otherwise, the alarm occurs.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 1-6
In the above figure, XOZ is the coordinate system of machine tool, X1O1Z1 is the
workpiece coordinate system of X axis located at the heading of workpiece, X2O2Z2 is the
one of X axis located at the ending of workpiece, O point is the machine reference point, A
point is the tool nose and Fig. 1-6
Programming
coordinates of A point in the above-mentioned coordinate systems is as follows:
A point in the machine tool coordinate system: (x,z);
A point in X1O1Z1 coordinate system: (x1,z1);
A point in X2O2Z2 coordinate system: (x2,z2).
1.3.4 Interpolation function
Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or
multiple axes moving at the same time, also called Contour control. The controlled
moving axis is called link axis when the interpolation is executed. The moving distance,
direction and speed of it are controlled synchronously in the course of running to form the
required Composite motion path. Positioning control is defined that motion end point of
one axis or multiple axes instead of the motion path in the course of running is controlled.
TAC-100XT X and Z axis are link axes and 2 axes link CNC system. The system
possesses linear, circular and thread interpolation function.
Linear interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is a straight line from starting
point to end point.
Circular interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is arc radius defined by R or the
circle center (I, K) from starting point to end point.
Thread interpolation: Moving distance of X or Z axis or X and Z axis is defined by rotation
angle of spindle to form spiral cutting path on the workpiece surface to realize the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
thread cutting. For thread interpolation, the feed axis rotates along with the
spindle, the long axis moves one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev,
and the short axis and the long axis directly interpolate.
Example:
Fig. 1-7
G32 W-27 F3; (BC; thread interpolation)

G1 X50 Z-30 F100;
G1 X80 Z-50; (DE; linear interpolation)
G3 X100 W-10 R10; (EF; circular interpolation)
Programming
M30;
1.3.5 Absolute programming and incremental programming
Specify coordinate values of paths end point or target position in programming and there
are 3
kinds of programming method according to coordinate values in programming: absolute
programming,
incremental programming and compound programming.
Programming with X/Z axis absolute coordinate value to program (present with X, Z) is
defined to
be the absolute programming;
Programming with X/Z axis incremental movement (present with U, W) is defined to be the
incremental programming;
In the system, X, Z axis separately uses the absolute programming and incremental
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
program,
which is called the compound programming.
Example: AB linear interpolation
Fig.1-8
Absolute programming: G01 X200 Z50;
Incremental programming: G01 U100 W-50;
Compound programming: G01 X200 W-50; or G01 U100 Z50
Note: When there are command address X/ U or Z/ W at the same time, X/Z command value is
valid.
Example: G50 X10 Z20;
G01 X20 W30 U20 Z30; End point of the block (X20, Z30)
1.3.6 Diameter programming and radius programming
Programming methods of X coordinate values are divided into: diameter programming
and radius programming.
Diameter programming: when NO.001 Bit2 is 0, X input command value is in diameter and
X coordinate is in diameter at the moment;
Radius programming: when NO.001 Bit2 is 1, X input command value is in radius and X
coordinate is in radius at the moment.
Addresses relevant to diameter or radius programming
Except for addresses and data in Table 1-1, others (arc radius, taper in G90) are
unrelated to diameter or radius programming, and their input values in X direction are
defined by the radius.
Note: The diameter programming is used except for the special description in the following
explanation.
1.4 Structure of an NC Program

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
User needs to compile part programs (called program) according to command formats of
CNC system. CNC system executes programs to control the machine tool movement, the
spindle starting/stopping, the cooling and the lubricant ON/OFF to complete the machine
of workpiece. Program example:
Fig. 1-9
The tool leaves the path of ABCDA after the above-mentioned programs are
executed.
1.4.1 General structure of a program
A program consists of blocks. A block begins with a block number (it can be omitted) and
several
words ending with ;. General structure of a program is shown in Fig.1-10:
Programming
Program name
There are most 384 programs stored inTAC-1002T. To identify it, each program has only
one program name (there is no the same program name) beginning with command
address O and the following 4 digits.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Word
A word is the basic command unit to command CNC system to complete the control
function,composed of an English letter (called command address) and the following
number (operation command with/without sign). The command address describes the
meaning of its following operation
command and there may be different meaning in the same command address when the
different words are combined together. All words ofTAC-1002T are in Table 1-2.
Address Command value range Function meaning Unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Block
A block which is basic unit of CNC program consists of a sequence of words, ending with
; or* . There is the character ; or * between blocks. ; is used to separate blocks in
the manual as follows:
One block may be with a number of words or only with ; ending character(EOB) instead
of words. There must be one or more blank space between many words.
There is only one for other addresses except for N, G, S, T, H, L in one block, otherwise
the system alarms. The last word in the same address is valid when there are more N, G,
S, T, H, L in the same block. The last G code is valid when there are more G codes which
are in the same group inone block.
Block number
A block number consists of an address N and its following 4-digit: N0000N9999, and the
leading zero can be omitted. The block number must be at the beginning of block,
otherwise the block is invalid.
The block number can be omitted, but there must be the block number when the program
calls/skips the target block. The increment of block number is at will and it better to
increase or decrease the sequence of block number in order to conveniently search and
analyze programs.When Automatic number in the switch window is set to ON, block
numbers will be automatically created incrementally and their increment is defined by
No.42.
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Character for block skip
Insert / in the front of block and startup when some block cannot be executed
(cannot be deleted), and the system skips the block and executes the next one. The block
with / in the front of it is executed if the block skip switch is not started.
Character for end of a program
% is an ending character of program. % is a mark of communication ended when the
program
is transmitted. The system will automatically insert at the end of program.
Program annotation
A program annotation has less than 20 characters (10 Chinese characters) for each
program lies in a bracket following its program name and is expressed only in English and
digitals in CNC system; it can be edited in Chinese in PC and displayed in Chinese in
CNC system after being downloaded.
1.4.2 Main program and subprogram
To simply the programming, when the same or similar machining path and control
procedure is used many times, its program commands are edited to a sole program to call.
A program which calls the program is the main program and the called program (end with
M99) is subprogram. They both take up the program capacity and storage space of
system. The subprogram has own name, and can be called at will by the main program
and also can run separately. The system returns to the main program to continue when
the subprogram ends as follows.
Main program
1.5 Program Run

1.5.1 Sequence of program run
Running the current open program must be in Auto mode.TAC-1002T cannot open two or
more programs at the same, and runs only program any time. When the first block is open,
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the cursor is located in the heading of the first block and can be moved in Edit mode. In
the run stop state in Auto mode, the program starts to run by the cycle start signal (
is pressed or external cycle start signal)from a block pointed by current cursor, usually
blocks are executed one by one according to their programming sequence, the program
stops running till executing M02 or M30. The cursor moves along with program running
and is located at the heading of the current block. Sequence and state of program running
are changed in the followings:
The program stops running after pressing or emergent stop button;
The program stops running when the system or PLC alarms;

The program runs and single block stops (the program run stops after the current block
runs completely) in Edit, MDI mode, and then a block pointed by the current cursor starts
running
after the system switches into Auto mode, is pressed or external cycle start signal
is switched on;
The program stops running in Manual(Jog), Handwheel (MPG), Single Block, Program
Reference Point Return, Machine Reference Point Return mode and it continuously runs
from current position after the system is switched into Auto mode and is pressed
or the external cycle start signal is switched on;
The program pauses after pressing or the external cycle start signal is switched
off, and it continuously runs from current position after pressing or the external
cycle start signal is switched on;
When Single Block is ON, the program pauses after every block is executed completely,
and then it continuously runs from the next block after is pressed or the external
cycle start signal is switched on;
Block with / in the front of it is not executed when the block skipping switch is ON;
The system skips to the target block to run after executing G65;
Please see I Programming, Section Three G Commands about execution sequence of
G70~73;
Call corresponding subprograms or macro program to run when executing M98 or
M9000~M9999; the system returns to main program to call the next block when
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
executing
M99(if M99 specifies a target block number, the system returns to it to run) after the
subprograms or macro programs run completely;
The system return to the first block to run and the current program is executed
repetitively
when M99 is executed in a main program.
1.5.2 Execution sequence of word
There are many words (G, X, Z, F, R, M, S, T and so on) and most of M, S, T is
transmitted to
PLC by NC explaining and others are directly executed by NC. M98, M99, M9000
M9999, S word
used to specify the spindle speed r/min, m/min is directly executed by NC.
NC firstly executes G and then M commands when G codes and M00, M01, M02 and M30
are in
the same block.
NC firstly executes G and then M commands( without transmitting M signal to PLC) when
G codes and M98, M99, M9000M9999 are in the same block.
When G codes and M, S, T executed by PLC are in the same block, PLC defines M, S, T
and G to be executed simultaneously, or execute M, S ,T after G codes. Please see User
Manual of machine manufacturer for execution sequence of commands.
Execution sequence of G, M, S, T in the same block defined byTAC-1002T standard PLC
program is as follows: M3, M4, M8, M10, M12, M32, M41, M42, M43, M44, S, T
and G codes are executed simultaneously;
M5, M9, M11, M13, M33 after G codes are executed;
M00, M01, M02, M30 after other commands of current block are executed.
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CHAPTER 2 MSTF COMMAND
2.1 M (Miscellaneous Function)

M command consists of command address M and its following 12 or 4 bit digits, used
for
controlling the flow of executed program or outputting M commands to PLC.
M98, M99, M9000M9999 is executed by NC separately and NC does not output M

commands to PLC.
M02, M03 are for ending of programs defined by NC, and NC outputs M commands to
PLC which can control spindle OFF, cooling OFF and so on.
M98, M99, M9000M9999 are for calling programs, M02, M30 are for ending of program
which are not changed by PLC. Other M commands output to PLC and their function are
defined by PLC.
Please refer to User Manual from machine manufacturer.
There is only one M command in one block, otherwise the system alarms.
Table 2-1 M commands to control program execution
Commands Functions
End of program M02

Command format: M02 or M2
Command function: In Auto mode, after other commands of current block are executed,
the
automatic run stops, and the cursor stops a block in M02 and does not
return to the start of program. The cursor must return to the start of program
when the program is executed again.
Besides the above-mentioned function executed by NC, M02 function is also defined by
PLC ladder diagram as follows: current output of CNC is reserved after M02 is executed.
End of program run M30
Command format: M30
Command function: In Auto mode, after other commands of current block are executed in
M30,
the automatic run stops, the amount of workpiece is added 1, the tool nose
radius compensation is cancelled and the cursor returns to the start of
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
program (whether the cursor return to the start of program or not is defined
by parameters).
If No.005 Bit 4 is set to 0, the cursor does not return to the beginning of program, and the
cursor returns immediately after the program is executed completely when No.005 Bit 4 is
set to 1. Except for the above-mentioned function executed by NC, M30 function is also
defined by PLC
Programming
ladder diagram as follows: the system closes M03, M04 or M08 signal output and outputs
M05 signal after M30 is executed.
Subprogram call M98
Return from subprogram M99
Command function: After other commands of current block in the subprogram are
executed, the system returns to the main program and continues to execute next block
specified by P, and calls a block following M98 of current subprogram when P is not input.
The current program is executed repeatedly when M99 is defined to end of program
(namely, the current program is executed without calling other programs). M99 is invalid in
MDI mode.
Example: Execution path of calling subprogram (with P in M99) as Fig. 2-1.
Execution path of calling subprogram (without P in M99) as Fig. 2-2.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Called subprogram number 0000 9999 . The leading zero of

subprogram number can be omitted when the calling times is not input; the
subprogram number must be with 4 digits when the calling times is input..
Call times: 19999. The calling times cannot be input when it is 1.
Executed block after returning to the main program is 0000
9999and its leading zero can be omitted.
Macro program call M9000M9999
Command function: call macro programs corresponding to command values (O9000

O9999).
Macro programs: O9000O9999 programs are for machine manufacturer, used for
editing
subprogram with special functions, called macro programs. The system must have 2-level
operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
level (machine manufacturer) when editing O9000O9999, and macro programs calling
commands
are executed to call with 35 operation level. M9000M9999 are invalid in MDI mode.
M commands defined by standard PLC ladder diagram
Other M commands are defined by PLC except for the above-mentioned ones(M02, M30,
M98, M99, M9000M9999). The following M commands are defined by standard PLC,
andTAC-1002T Turning Machine CNC system is used for controlling machine tool. Refer
to commands of machine manufacturer about functions, significations, control time
sequence and logic of M commands.
M commands defined by standard PLC ladder diagram.
Code Function Remark
M00 Program pause
M00 Program option stop
M03 Spindle clockwise
M04 Spindle Functions interlocked
counterclockwise and states reserved
*M05 Spindle stop
M08 Cooling ON Functions interlocked
*M09 Cooling OFF and states reserved
M10 Tailstock forward Functions interlocked
M11 Tailstock backward and states reserved
M12 Chuck clamping Functions interlocked
M13 Chuck releasing and states reserved
M14 Spindle position control Functions interlocked
*M15 Spindle speed control and states reserved
M20 Spindle clamping Functions interlocked
*M21 Spindle releasing and states reserved
M24 The Functions interlocked
*M25 The and states reserved
M32 Lubricating Functions interlocked
*M33 Lubricating and states reserved
M63 The 2nd spindle rotation Functions interlocked
CCW and states reserved
M64 The 2nd spindle rotation
CW
*M65 The 2nd spindle stop
*M41, M42, Spindle automatic gear Functions interlocked
M43, M44 shifting and states reserved
Programming
Table 2-2 M commands
Note: Commands with * defined by standard PLC is valid when power on.
Program stop M00
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command function: After M00 is executed, the program stops and the system displays
Pause,
and then the program continuously runs after the cycle start key is pressed.
Program optional stop M01
26
Programming
Command function: in AUTO, MDI mode, it is valid. Press and its indicator lights and the
system enters the optional stop state, at the moment, the program stops run
and the system displays PAUSE after M01 is executed, after the cycle start
key is pressed, the program continuously runs. When the program optional
stop switch is not open, the program does not pause even if M01 runs.
Spindle CW, CCW and stop control M03, M04, M05
M04 or M4;
M05 or M5.
Command function: M03: Spindle CW rotation;
M04: Spindle CCW rotation;
M05: Spindle stop.
Note: Refer to time sequence of output defined by standard PLC ladder in INSTALLATION &
CONNECTION.
Cooling control M08, M09
Command format: M08 or M8;
M09 or M9;
Command function: M08: Cooling ON;
M09: Cooling OFF.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M08, M09 defined by standard PLC ladder in
INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.
Tailstock control M10, M11
Command format: M10;
M11;
Command function: M10: tailstock going forward;
M11: tailstock going backward.
INSTALLATION & CONNECTION
Chuck control M12, M13
Command format: M12;
M13;
Command function: M12: chuck clamping;
M13: chuck releasing.
Spindle position/speed control switch M14, M15
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command formatM14
M15
Command functionM14spindle is in the position control mode from speed control mode;
M15spindle is in speed control mode from the position control mode.
INSTALLATION
Chapter 2 MSTF Command
27
Programming
& CONNECTION.
Spindle clamped/released M20, M21
Command formatM20
M21
Command functionM20spindle clamped
M21spindle released
INSTALLATION
& CONNECTION.
The 2nd spindle position/speed switch M24, M25
Command formatM24
M25
Command functionM24The 2nd spindle is switched from the speed control mode to the
position
control mode;
M25The 2nd spindle is switched from the position control mode to the speed
control mode.
INSTALLATION
& CONNECTION.
Lubricating control M32, M33
Command formatM32
M33
Command functionM32lubricating ON;
M33lubricating OFF.
INSTALLATION
& CONNECTION.
Spindle automatic gear change M41, M42, M43, M44
Command formatM4n(n=1, 2, 3, 4)
Command functionWhen the system executes M4n, the spindle changes to gear n.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M41, M42, M43, M44 defined by standard PLC ladder in
INSTALLATION&CONNECTION.
Spindle 8-point orientation M50M58
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command formatM5n(n=08)
Command functionM50cancel orientation state;
M5n(n=08)the spindle oriented to No. n point.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M50M58 defined by standard PLC ladder in
The 2nd spindle rotation CCW, rotation CW , stop M63, M64, M65
Command format: M63
M64 Programming
M65
Command function:
M63: spindle rotation CCW;
M64: spindle rotation CW;
M65: spindle stop.
Note 1: The sequence of M63, M64, M65 defined by the standard PLC is the same that of M03, M04,
M05.
Note 2: The function is enabled when the 2nd spindle function is valid.
2.2 Spindle Function

S command is used for controlling spindle speed and thisTAC-1002T has two modes to
control it: Spindle speed switching value control: S(2 digits command value)is executed
by PLC, and PLC outputs switching value signal to machine tool to change spindle speed
with grades.
Spindle speed analog voltage control: S(4 digits command value)specifies actual
speed of spindle and NC outputs 0~10V analog voltage signal to spindle servo or
converter to realize stepless spindle speed.
2.2.1 Spindle speed switching value control
Spindle speed is controlled by switching value when No.001 BIT4 is set to 0. There is only
one S command in a block, otherwise the system alarms.
Their executing sequence is defined by PLC when S command and word for moving
function are in the same block. Please refer to User Manual from machine manufacturer.
When spindle speed is controlled by switching value,TAC-1002T Turning CNC system is
used for machine tool and the time sequence and logic of executing S command is
according to User Manual from machine manufacturer. Refer to S command defined by
standard PLC ofTAC-1002T
as follows:
Command format: S
0004(the leading zero can be omitted): No.1No.4 gear of spindle
speed is controlled by switching value.
In spindle speed switching value control mode, after S signal transmits to PLC, the system
dwells time defined by No.081, then return FIN signal, and the dwell time is called runtime
of S command.S01, S02, S03, S04 output are reserved when resetting CNC.
S1S4 output are invalid when CNC is switched on. The corresponding S signal output is
valid and reserved, and others are cancelled at the same time when executing one of S01,
S02, S03, S04.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
When executing S00, S1S4 output are cancelled and only one of S1S4 is valid at the
same time.
2.2.2 Spindle speed analog voltage control
Spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage when No.001 BIT4 is set to 1.
Command format: S
00009999 (the leading zero can be omitted.):Spindle speed
Dwell time Start to execute S command Start to execute the following word or block
Programming
analog voltage control
Command function: The spindle speed is defined, and the system outputs 010V analog
voltage to control spindle servo or converter to realize the stepless timing. S
command value is not reserved, and it is 0 after the system is switched on.
When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid, there are 2 methods to input the
spindle speed: the spindle fixed speed is defined by S command( r/min), and is invariant
without changing S command value, which is called constant speed control(G97 modal);
other is the tangent speed of tool relative to the outer circle of workpiece defined by S
command, which is called constant surface speed control (G96 modal), and the spindle
speed is changed along with the absolute coordinates value of X absolute coordinates in
programming path when cutting feed is executed in the constant surface speed.
Please refer to Section 2.2.3.
The system can execute 4 gears spindle speed. Count the analog voltage value
corresponding to the specified speed according to setting value(corresponding to
No.037No.040) of max. spindle speed (analog voltage is 10V)of current gear, and then
output to spindle servo or converter to ensure that the spindle actual speed and the
requirement are the same.
After the system is switched on, the analog output voltage is 0V. The analog output
voltage is reserved (except that the system is in cutting feed in the surface speed control
mode and the absolute value of X absolute coordinates is changed) after S command is
executed. The analog output voltage is 0V after S0 is executed. The analog output voltage
is reserved when the system resets and emergently stops.
Parameters relative to the analog voltage control of spindle speed:
System parameter No.021: offset value of output voltage with max. spindle speed (the
analog output voltage is 10V);
System parameter No.036: offset value of output voltage with spindle speed 0 (the analog
output voltage is 10V);
System parameter No.037No.040: max. spindle speed (the analog output voltage is
10V) with spindle 14 gears(corresponding to M41M44).
2.2.3 Constant surface speed control G96, constant rotational speed control G97
Command format: G96 S__; (S0000S9999, the leading zero can be omitted.)
Command function: The constant surface speed control is valid, the cutting surface speed
is defined (m/min) and the constant rotational speed control is cancelled.
G96 is modal G code. If the current modal is G96, G96 cannot be input.
Command function: The constant surface speed control is cancelled, the constant
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
rotational speed control is valid and the spindle speed is defined (r/min). G96 is
modal G code. If the current modal is G97, G97 cannot be input.
Command function: define max. spindle speed limit (r/min) in the constant surface speed
control and take the current position as the program reference point.
G96, G97 are the modal word in the same group but one of them is valid. G97 is the initial
word and the system defaults G97 is valid when the system is switched on.
When the machine tool is turning it, the workpiece rotates based on the axes of spindle as
the center line, the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around the
axes, and the instantaneous speed in the circle tangent direction is called cutting surface
(for short surface speed). There are different surface speed for the different workpiece
and tool with different material.
When the spindle speed controlled by the analog voltage is valid, the constant surface
control is valid. The spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute
coordinates of programming path in the constant speed control. If the absolute value of X
absolute coordinates adds, the spindle speed reduces, and vice verse, which make the
cutting surface speed as S command value. The constant speed control to cut the
workpiece makes sure all smooth finish on the surface of workpiece with diameter
changing.
Surface speed=spindle speed |X| 1000 (m/min)
Spindle speed: r/min
|X|: absolute value of X absolute coordinate value, mm
3.14
Fig. 2-4
In G96, the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute
coordinates value of programming path in cutting feed (interpolation), but it is not changed
in G00 because there is no actual cutting and is counted based on the surface speed of
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
end point in the program block.

In G96 (constant surface speed control), Z coordinates axis of workpiece system must
consist with the axes of spindle (rotary axis of workpiece), otherwise, there is different
between the actual surface speed and the defined one.
G96 control is valid, G50 S_ can limit max. spindle speed (r/min). The spindle actual
speed is the limit value of max. speed when the spindle speed counted by the surface
speed and X coordinates value is more than the max. spindle speed set by G50 S_. After
the system powers on, max. spindle speed limit value is not defined and its function is
invalid. Max. spindle speed limit value defined by G50 S_ is reserved before it is defined
again and its function is valid in G96. Max. spindle speed defined by G50 S_ is invalid in
G97 but its limit value is reserved.
Note: When NO.043 (lowest spindle speed in constant surface speed control) is set to 0 and G50
S0 is executed, the spindle speed is limited to 0 r/min (the spindle does not rotate).
When the constant surface speed is controlled by the system parameter No.043, the
spindle speed is lower limit, which is higher than one counted by the surface speed and X
axis coordinates value.
Example:
O0001 ; (Program name)

N0010 M3 G96 S300; (Spindle rotates clockwise, the constant surface speed control is
valid and the surface speed is 300 m/min)
N0020 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapid traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0030 G0 X50 Z0; (Rapid traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0040 G1 W-30 F200; (Cut from B to C with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0050 X80 W-20 F150; (Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r/min and surface
speed 1194 r/min)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
N0060 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapid retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0110 M30; (End of program, spindle stopping and cooling OFF)
N0120 %
Note 1: S value commanded in G96 is also reserved in G97. Its value is resumed when the system
is in G96 again;
Example:
G96 S50; (Cutting surface speed 50m/min)
G97 S1000; (Spindle speed 1000 r/min)
G96 X3000; (Cutting surface speed 50m/min)
Note 2: The constant surface speed control is valid when the machine tool is locked (X, Z do not
move when their motion command are executed);
Note 3: To gain the precise thread machining, it should not be adopted with the constant surface
speed control but the constant rotational speed (G97) in the course of thread cutting;
Note 4: From G96 to G97, if none of S command (r/min) is commanded in the program block in
G97, the last spindle speed in G96 is taken as S command in G97, namely, the spindle
speed is not changed at this time;
Note 5: In G96, when the spindle speed counted by the cutting surface speed is more than max.
speed of current spindle gear (system parameter No.037No.040), at this time, the spindle
speed is limited to max. one of current spindle gear.
2.2.4 Spindle override
When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid, the spindle actual speed can be
tuned real time by the spindle override and is limited by max spindle speed of current gear
after the spindle override is tuned, and it also limited by limited values of max. and min.
spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode.
The system supplies 8 steps for spindle override (50%120% increment of 10%). The
actual steps and tune of spindle override are defined by PLC ladder and introductions
from machine manufacturer should be referred when using it. Refer to the following
functions ofTAC-1002T standard PLC ladder.
The spindle actual speed specified byTAC-1002T standard PLC ladder can be tuned real
time by the spindle override tune key at 8 steps in 50%120% and it is not reserved when
the spindle override is switched off. Refer to the operations of spindle override in
OPERATION.
2.2.5 Multiple spindle control function

TAC-100XT can control up to two analog spindles. One S code is used to command one
of them which are selected by PLC signal and which have the gear change function.
BecauseTAC-1002T has only one spindle encoder interface, the 2nd spindle has no
encoder feedback and the spindle speed is not displayed.
Being the speed command, S code is sent to the spindle selected by the spindle selection
signalSWS1, SWS2 <G270, G271>, and each spindle rotates with the specified
speed. When the spindle has not received the spindle selection signal, it rotates with the
previous speed, which makes the spindle rotates with different speed in different time.
Each spindle has its own stop signal and enabling signal.
When 0014 is set to 1, setting MSEN1964to 1 can start the multiple spindle
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
control function.
The spindle control has several methods which are set by MSI1967as follows:
Multiple spindle control method A
When SWS1 signal selects the 1st spindle, SIND signal is used to determine that the
spindle analog voltage is controlled by PLC or CNC, R011 to R121 signals are used to set
the spindle analog voltage. These signals do not influence the 2nd spindle.
Multiple spindle control method A is shown below.
Multiple spindle control method B

Each spindle has separate SIND signal.
When the spindle selection signal, the 1st spindle or the 2nd spindle SIND signal is set to 1,
SIND signals separately determine each spindle to be controlled by PLC or CNC.
Multiple spindle control method B is shown below.
Target tool number01-32the leading zero cannot be omitted

Multiple spindle control function being invalid
When the multiple spindle control is invalid, the control method is shown below.
2.2.6 Cs contour control funciton

Controlling a spindle speed is called as the spindle rotation control (the spindle rotates by
the speed command), and controlling the spindle position is called as the spindle contour
control (the spindle rotates by the movement command). The function of the spindle
contour control is that of Cs contour control. Being the servo feed axis, the spindle rotates
and orients by the position movement command, and executes the interpolation with other
feed axes to machine the contour curve.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.3 Tool Function

2.3.1 Tool control
T functions ofTAC-1002T: automatic tool change and executing tool offset. Control logic of
automatic tool change is executed by PLC and tool offset is executed by NC.
Command format:
Command function: The automatic tool post rotates to the target tool number and the tool
offset of tool offset number commanded is executed. The tool offset number can be the
same as the tool number, and also cannot be the same as it, namely, one tool can
corresponds to many tool offset numbers. After executing tool offset and then T00, the
system reversely offset the current tool offset and the system its operation mode from the
executed tool length compensation into the non-compensation, which course is called the
canceling tool offset, called canceling tool compensation. When the system is switched on,
the tool offset number and the tool offset number displayed by T command is the state
before the system is switched off.
Only one T command is in a block, otherwise the system alarms.
Toolsetting is executed to gain the position offset data before machining (called tool
offset), and the system automatically executes the tool offset after executing T command
when programs are running. Only edit programs for each tool according to part drawing
instead of relative position of each tool in the machine coordinate system. If there is error
caused by the wearing of tool, directly modify the tool offset according to the dimension
offset.
Tool offset number00-32the leading zero cannot be omitted
Pr
ogramming
Fig.2-6 tool offset
The tool offset is used for the programming. The offset corresponding to the tool offset
number in T command is added or subtracted on the end point of each block. Tool offset
in X direction in diameter or radius is set by No.004 Bit4. For tool offset in diameter or
radius in X direction, the external diameter is changed along with diameter or radius when
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the tool length compensation is changed.

Example: When the state parameter No.004 Bit4 is set to 0 and X tool length
compensation value is 10mm, the external diameter of workpiece is 10mm; when No. 004
is set to 1 and X tool length compensation value is 10mm, the external diameter of
workpiec is 20mm. Fig.2-5 is the course of creating, executing and canceling tool offset in
traverse mode.
Fig. 2-7 Creation, execution and cancellation of tool length compensation
G01 X100 Z100 T0101; (Block 1, start to execute the tool offset)
G01 W150; (Block 2, tool offset Block 2, tool offset)
G01 U150 W100 T0100; (Block 3, canceling tool offset)
There are two methods defined by No.003 Bit4 to execute the tool length compensation:
Bit4=0: The tool length compensation is executed by the tool traversing;
Bit4=1: The tool length compensation is executed by modifying the coordinates;
Example:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming
Fig. 2-7 Tool traversing mode
Fig. 2-8 Modifying the coordinates mode

In Edit and Auto mode, a sole T word in executing tool offset (it is not with the motion
command in the same block) is relative to No.004 BIT3 setting (as Fig.2-6 and Fig.2-7).
When No.003 Bit4=1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
and a sole T command is executed, the tool offset number is displayed in poor, which is
cleared out(tool offset number is still displayed in poor when tool offset is not executed for
one axis, the previous bit of tool offset number is for X axis tool compensation and the
next one is for Z axis tool compensation) after executing tool offset.
executing Z axis as follows:
Executing a sole T0101 and tool offsets of two axes are not executed
Executing W0 after T0101, X tool offset is not executed but that of Z is done
When T command and the motion command are in the same block and execute tool offset
by
modifying coordinates, the motion command and T command are executed at the same
time, the
system executes by adding the current tool offset to coordinates of motion command and
whether the
traverse speed is employed the cutting feedrate or the rapid traverse speed defined by the
motion
command.
When T command and the motion command are in the same block and execute tool offset
by
traversing tool, the motion command or T command is executed separately. Firstly tool
change is
executed and then the motion command is executed. The tool offset is executed at current
rapid
traverse speed.
The tool offset is cancelled after one of the following operations is executed:
Programming
2. Execute G28 or manual machine reference point return (only the tool offset of
coordinate axis which is executed machine reference point return is cancelled, and
another one which is not executed machine reference point return is not cancelled);
When No.084 is not 1 (232) and target tool number is not equal to current display tool
number, the control sequence and logic of tool post is defined by PLC ladder diagram
after commanding T command, please see User Manual of machine tool
manufacturer.TAC-1002T standard PLC ladder diagram defines as follows: clockwise
rotation for selecting tool, counterclockwise rotation for tool post clamping, directly
inputting tool selection signal for tool change. Please refer to
When the system is employed with line-up tool post, No.084 should be set to 1 and
different tool
number is executed by different tool offset as T0101, T0102, T0103.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.3.2 Tool life management

1. Starting tool life management function
The state parameter No.002 Bit0 (TLIF) is the market whether the tool life management
function is valid or not, the corresponding tool life management window is not displayed
when it is invalid.
002 Tool life management
Bit 0 Tool life management function is not valid.
1 Tool life management function is valid.
2. Tool life management display window
Press repetitively into the tool life management display window.

1Tool compensation->tool life window
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
The current window displays the life management data of current used tool life
management and defined tool groups. The window is shown below:
Current tool state: display the current used tool life management data;
Tool number: current used tool and tool compensation number;
Group: the group where the tool is;
Life: tool life data, the specified value can be time or number of times according to the
different count N value; press to record the time or clear the times.Programming
Used: used tool life data.
Life unit: count unit of tool life, N1 is the used time (unit: minute), N0 is the used times
(unit:times) .
State display the tool state0not be used1being used 2used3
_p04___<skip.
2) Creating and displaying tool group number
A. In tool group state display window, press , group number, , and the
system display the tool group life data, and when the group does not exist, it is defined to
the new group number( the parameter switch is ON in MDI mode).
Note: After the new group is defined,TAC-1002T will automatically define the first tool,
for example, the new defined group number is 01, the display is as follows:
B. Press to move the cursor to Defined Group Number.
C. Press or to select the group number in Defined Group Number, and to
gradually display content of each group number.
3. Definition of tool life data
There are two ways to set the tool life data:
1) compile NC programs and run the program setting;
2) input directly in the tool life management window.
1) Compile NC programs and run program setting
Command format: G10 L3
Command function: set to be the tool life manage data input mode
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command format: G11

Command function: cancel the tool life management data input mode
Programming
L_: tool life data, the specified value
can be time or number of times
according to the different count
N value
Note 1: The tool group numbers specified by P may not be the continuous, but it is better to
gradually
increase the sequence number to easily search the tool group number.
Note 2: The tool life is 0 when the life data L_ is omitted, and the tool mode is 0 (minute) when the
specified
mode N_ is omitted, at the time, the system only counts and doest not alarm for the output.
Note 3: Other commands between G10 L3 and G11 are ignored.
Note 4: Running the tool life preset program (such as O0020) completely clear all previous life
data and
preset the life data according to the program requirements.
Note 5: Prevent the life data from being modified manually when the part programs are running
until the run
state stops (except for running the tool life preset programs).
Note 6: All tool life data is stored when power-down.
2) Input tool life management data in the tool life management window
Input directly the tool life management data in tool compensation- >tool life window in MDI
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
mode, parameter switch ON and 3-level operation limit.

A. alter data:
In tool compensation -> tool life window, press to move the tool to the life position,
input directly data, such as 500, press to confirm the input. Press to
complete data input (tool offset, life) .
Programming
B. Inserting data:
Insert any serial number in the current page, press 0108
,insert a new line, and the initial value definition is as follows:
Serial number Tool offset Life Used Mode State
a)Insert the front and the previous serial number moves backward
. Before insert
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
After insert
b)Insert the middle and the previous sequence number moves backward.
n
Before insert
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
After insert
c)Insert behind
Before insert
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
After insert
C. Delete data:
a) Delete data in all groups.
In tool compensation-> tool life window, press + to delete all defined data.
Before operation
After operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
b) Delete data in any group
Press input serial number02 ;
Before operation
After deletion
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
c) Delete any serial number in the current page(the parameter switch is ON)
Press input serial number04 Programming

Before deletion
After deletion
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4. Tool life function use

Command format:
Txx99: end of current used tool group, start the tool and execute the life management in
XX
group.
Txx88: cancel the tool offset in XX group
Two examples are as follows:
Application example:
O0000 (O0000)
T0199; End of previous tool group, and start the tool in 01 group
T0188; Cancel tool offset in 01 group(current used tool offset)
T0508; Use No.05 tool and 08 tool offset without life management
T0500; Cancel No.05 tool offset

mming
T0299; End of No.05 tool and start the tools in 02 group
T0199;
End of tools in No.02 group, start tools in No.02 group, and
start the next tool when there are many tools in No.01 group.
5. Tool life count:

When the count result is for the used life value being more than or equal to the setting
value of the life data, the next tool group number selects the standby tool in the
commanded selection tool group and the new selected tool will be counted, the count will
be continuously executed and the system alarms to output to PLC when all tool life in the
tool groups reaches and there is no standby tools. Executing the counting in MDI mode is
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
determined by No.002 Bit3 (MDITL).
002 MDITL
MDITL0 Tool life management is invalid in MDI mode.
MDITL1 Tool life management is valid in MDI mode.
The tool life count has two methods including time and number of times.
A. Time count
Use the time (minute) to count the tool life in cutting feed mode(such as G01, G02, G03,
G32, G33, G34 and so on), and do not count it in G00, G04, single block stop, machine
lock,auxiliary lock, dry run and so on.
B. Number of times count
There are two methods about the number of times count which is determined by No.002
Bit2
(LIFC).
002 LIFC
LIFC=0 Tool life management count mode 1
Execute the tool select (Txx99) to change the tool number, execute the count in the
cutting feed mode (except for machine lock, auxiliary lock, dry run state). The count is not
executed
when the tool number is changed and the system is not in the cutting feed mode.
Application example:
LIFC1 Tool life management count 2

The tool group adds when the machining program runs to M30(M99), when the system
resets halfway, the number of time does not add, the count is not executed in machine
lock,auxiliary lock and dry run mode.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
6. G, F signals relevant to tool life function

a Tool change signal TLCHF0640
Type output signal
Function inform PLC that the last tool life ends of in this group
Output condition the signal is set to 1, the last tool life in one group ends, all other tool
life ends.
b New tool selection signal TLNWF0641
Type output signal
Function inform a new tool in some tool group has been selected
Output condition the signal is set to 1 and a new tool in some tool group has been
selected.
c Tool change reset signal TLRSTG0487
Type input signal
Function clear all execution data
Operation when the signal is set to 1, the control unit clears the used tool life data of in
all groups; the tool state is reset to the unused.
Note: when the automatic operation signal OP is 0, the tool change reset signal TLRST is valid.
d Tool skip signal TLSKPG0485
Type input signal
Functionuse the following two methods to change the tools which have not reached
the
life:
1 When LIFJNO.2#4is set to 1the selection signals of the tool group number
G47#0~#4specify the tool group number, then, the tool skip signal TLSKP
becomes 1the next T command skips the tool which is being used of the
current group, and the tool which life has not reach in the group specified by
G47#0~#4 is used.
2When LIFJNO.2#4is set to 0the group numbers specified by the tool group
number signal G47#0~#4are invalid, the tool skip signal TLSKP becomes 1,
the machine skips to the next tool in the current used tool group.
Operationwhen the signal is set to 1, the operation described in [Function] is executed.
Note: When cycle start light signal(STL) and feed pause light signal(SPL) must be 0, inputting
TLSKP signal
is valid.
e Tool group number selection signal TL01~TL16G47#0~#4
Type input signal
Function when TLSKP is input, using the tool group selection signal TL01~TL16
specifies the tool group number with the binary system. The specified tool
group number = G47#4~#01.
Operation specify the selected tool group
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CHAPTER 3 G COMMANDS
3.1 Commands
G command consists of command address G and its following 12 bits command value,
used for defining the motion mode of tool relative to the workpiece, defining the
coordinates and so on. Refer to G commands as Fig. 3-1.
G words are divided into 9 groups (00, 01, 02, 03, 060712141621). Except that
commands in the group 01 and 00 are not in the same block, G words in the different
groups can be input to the same block and the last one is valid when two or more G words
in the same group are input. The words in the different groups without the same
parameter (word) can be in the same block and their functions are valid without sequence
at the same time. The system alarms when G words do not belong to Table 3-1 or they
are optional functions without being supplied.
Table 3-1 G command list
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.1.1 Modal, non-modal and initial mode

G commands are divided into group 00, 01, 02, 03, 06, 07, 16, 21.
After G commands are executed, their defined functions and states are valid until they are
changed by others in the same group, which commands are called modal G commands.
After the modal G words are executed, and before their defined functions and states are
changed, the G command cannot be input again when they are executed by the following
block.
The defined function and state are valid one time after G command is executed, and the G
word must be input again when it is executed every time, which command is called
non-modal G command. Programming
After the system is switched on, the valid modal G commands which are not executed
their functions or states are called initial mode G command. Take it as the initial mode G
command to be executed when it is not be input after the system is switched on.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.1.2 Omitting words

To simplify the programming, their command values are reserved after executing words in
Table 3-2. If the words are contained in the previous blocks, they cannot be input when
the words are used with the same values and definitions in the following blocks.
Table 3-2
Note 1: For the command addresses with functions (such as F, used for feedrate per minute,
feedrate per revolution and metric pitch and so on), they can be omitted not to input when
executing the same function to definite words after the words are executed. For example, after
executing G98 F_ without
executing the thread command, the pitch must be input with F word when machining metric
thread.
Note 2: They can be omitted not to input when the address characters X(U) , Z(W) are the
coordinates of end
point of block and the system defaults the current absolute coordinates in X or Z direction to the
coordinate value of end point of block.
Note 3: The corresponding words must be input when the command addresses which are not in
Table 3-2 are used.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Example 1:
O0001;
G0 X100 Z100; (rapid traverse to X100 Z100; the modal G0 is valid)
X20 Z30; (rapid traverse to X20 Z30; the modal G0 is not input)
G1 X50 Z50 F300; (linear interpolation to X50 Z50, feedrate 300mm/min; the modal G1 is
valid)
X100; (linear interpolation to X100 Z50, feedrate 300mm/min; Z coordinate is
not input and is the current coordinates Z50; F300 is kept, G1 is modal
and is not input)
G0 X0 Z0; (rapid traverse to X0 Z0 and the modal G0 is valid)
M30;
Example 2:
O0002;
G0 X50 Z5; (rapid traverse to X50 Z5)
G04 X4; (dwell 4 seconds)
G04 X5; (dwell 5 seconds again, G04 is non-modal and is needed to input again)
M30;
Example 3 (the first run after power-on) :

O0003;
G98 F500 G01 X100 Z100; (Feedrate per minute 500mm/min in G98)
G92 X50 W-20 F2 ; (F value is a pitch and must be input in thread cutting)
G99 G01 U10 F0.01 (Feedrate per revolution in G99 must be input again)
G00 X80 Z50
M30;
3.1.3 Related definitions
In the user manual, the definitions of Word are as follows except for the especial
explanations:
Starting point: position before the current block runs;
End point: position after the current block ends;
X: X absolute coordinates of end point;
U: different value of absolute coordinates between starting point and end point;
Z: Z absolute coordinates of end point;
W: different value of absolute coordinates between starting point and end point;
F: cutting feedrate.
3.2 Rapid Traverse Movement G00

Command format: G00 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: X, Z rapidly traverses at the respective traverse speed to the end
points from their starting point. G00 is initial command as Fig.3-1.
X, Z traverses at the respective traverse speed, the short axis arrives the
end point and the length axis continuously moves to the end point and the
compound path may be not linear.
Command specification: G00 is initial mode;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X, U, Z, W range: 99999999 least input increment

Can omit one or all command addresses X(U), Z(W). The coordinate values of starting
point and end point are the same when omitting one command address; the end point and
the starting point are in the same position when all are omitted. X, Z are valid, and U, W
are invalid when X,U, Z and W are in the same one block. X, U, Z, W rang is referred to
Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1,
unit: mm//inch.
Command path:
Programming
The respective rapid traverse speed of X, Z is defined by the system parameter No.022,
No.023,
and their traverse speed can changed by rapid override key on the machine control panel.
Example: The tool rapidly traverses to B from A as Fig. 3-2.
Fig. 3-2
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G0 X20 Z25; (absolute programming)

G0 U-22 W-18; (incremental programming)
G0 X20 W-18; (compound programming)
G0 U-22 Z25; (compound programming)
3.3 Linear Interpolation G01

Command format: G01 X(U) _ Z(W) _ F_;
Command function: The movement path is a straight line from starting point to end point
as Fig.3-3.
Command specification: G01 is modal.

Can omit one or all command addresses X (U), Z (W). The coordinate
values of starting point and end point are the same when omitting one
command address; the end point and the starting point are in the Programming
same position when all are omitted. X, U, Z, W rang is referred to
Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm//inch.
F command value is the vector compound speed of X and Z
instantaneous speed and the actual cutting feedrate is the product
between the feedrate override and F command value.
After F command value is executed, it has been reserved unless the
new one is executed. Do not repeat it when the following G
commands adopt functions of F word. Its range is referred to Table 1-2.
Note: In G98, F max. value cannot exceed the value set by the data parameter No.027(upper speed
of cutting feed), otherwise, the system alarms.
Command path:
Example: Cutting path from 40 to 60 as Fig.3-4:

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.4 Circular Interpolation G02, G03
Command function:
G02 movement path is clockwise (rear tool post coordinate system)/counterclockwise
(front tool post coordinate system) arc from starting point to end point as Fig. 3-5.
G03 movement path is counterclockwise (rear tool post coordinate system/clockwise
(front tool post coordinate system) arc from starting point to end point as Fig. 3-6.
Command path:
Command specification:
G02, G03 are modal,
R is arc radius, range: 99999999 least input increment;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
I: X difference value between circle center and starting point of arc in radius;
K: Z difference value between circle center and starting point of arc;
Center point of arc is specified by address I, K which separately corresponds to X, Z, I, K
expresses the vector (it is the increment value) from starting point to center point of arc as
the
following figure;
I=Coordinates of center point-that of starting point in X direction; K= Coordinates of center
point-that of starting point in Z direction;
I, K are with sign symbol. When directions of I, K are the same as those of X, Z, they are
positive,
otherwise, they are negative.
X, U, Z, W, R, I, K range is referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.
Arc direction: G02/G03 direction (clockwise/counterclockwise) is opposite on the front tool

post coordinate system and the rear one as Fig.3-7:
Notes:
When I = 0 or K = 0, they can be omitted; one of I, K or R must be input, otherwise the
system alarms.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
R is valid and I, K are invalid when they are input at the same time.
R value must be equal to or more than half distance from starting point to end point, and
The system alarms if the end point is not on the arc defined by R command;
Omit all or one of X(U), Z(W); coordinates of starting point and end point of this axis are
the same when omitting ones, the path is a full circle(360) in G02/G03 when center
point are specified by I,K; the path is 0(0) when center point is specified by R.
R should be used for programming. The system executes in R= I 2 + K 2 to ensure
Starting point and end point of arc path are the specified ones in I, K programming.
When the distance from center point to end point is not equal to R(R I 2 + K 2 ) in I,K
programming, the system automatically adjusts position of center point to ensure

starting point and end point of arc path are the specified ones; when the distance from
center point to end point is more than 2R, and the system alarms.
Arc is less than 360when R is commanded, the arc is more than 180when R is
negative, and it is less than or equal to 180when R is positive.
Example: Arc cutting path from 45.25 to 63.06 shown in Fig. 3-8.
Compound programming in G02/G03:

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Program: O0001
N001 G0 X40 Z5; (Rapidly traverse)
N002 M03 S200; (Start spindle)
N003 G01 X0 Z0 F900; (Approach workpiece)
N005 G03 U24 W-24 R15; (Cut R15 arc)
N006 G02 X26 Z-31 R5; (Cut R5 arc)
N007 G01 Z-40; (Cut 26)
N008 X40 Z5; (Return to starting point)
N009 M30; (End of program)
3.8 Plane Selection G17G19

Command format
G17XY plane
G18ZX plane
G19YZ plane
Command function: use G commands to select the plane of the arc interpolation or the
one of the cutter compensation
Command explanation: G17, G18, G19 are modal, and the plane does not change in the
block without the command.
Notes:
Firstly set the basic axis Y when the system selects G17, G19 plane;
Cannot switch the planes in C tool compensation;
G71~G76G90G92G94 can be used in G18 plane;
The plane selection code can be in the same block with G codes in the other groups;
The movement command is not relevant to the plane selection;
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Diameter or radius programming: currently, because there is only one bit parameter No
1.2 to select the diameter or the radius programming and is valid to only X axis, Z and Y
axis use the only radius programming in G2, G3, and X axis is selected by the parameter;
The tool nose direction of C tool compensation is 0 in G17, G19.
3.11 Chamfering Function

Chamfering function is to insert one straight line or circular between two contours to make
the tool smoothly transmit from one contour to another one.TAC-1002T uses the linear
and circular chamfering functions.
3.11.1 Linear chamfering
Linear chamfering: insert one straight line in the linear contours, arc contours, linear
contour and arc contour. The command address of linear chamfering is L, behind which
data is the length of chamfering straight line. The linear chamfering must be used in G01,
G02 or G03 command.
A. Linear to linear
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_ ;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
Programming
Command function: insert one straight line between two linear interpolation blocks.
B. Linear to circular
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one straight line between the linear and circular interpolation
blocks.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
C. Circular to circular
Command format:
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one straight line between two circular interpolation blocks.
Programming
D. Circular to linear
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command function: insert one straight line block between circular and linear
interpolation block.
3.11.2 Circular chamfering

Circular chamfering: insert one circular between linear contours, circular contours, linear
contour and circular contour, the circular and the contour line are transited by the tangent.
The command of circular chamfering is D, and the data behind the command is the radius
of chamfering circular. The circular chamfering must be used in G01, G02 or G03.
A. Linear to linear
Command format:
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular between two straight lines, the inserted circular
block and two straight lines are tangent, the radius is the data behind the command
address D.Programming
B. Linear to circular
Command format:
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Command function: insert one circular between linear and circular, the inserted circular
is tangent to the linear and the circular, and the radius is the data behind the command
address D.
C. Circular to circular
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Command function: insert one circular between two circular blocks, the inserted circular
is tangent to the two circular blocks, and the radius is the data behind
the command address D.
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
D. Circular to linear
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular block between the circular and the linear, the
inserted circular block is tangent to the circular and the linear, and
the radius is the data behind the command address D.
3.11.3 Special cases

The chamfering function is invalid or alarms as follows:
1) Linear chamfering
A. The chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the same
linear.
B. CNC alarms when the chamfering linear is too long.

L1 is the chamfering linear, and the length is L1; l2 is the third edge of the triangle which is
formed by two interpolation straight lines, the length is L2, CNC alarms when L1 is bigger
Programming
C. Some linear block is too short
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
The chamfering linear length is L, CNC alarms when other end of the caculated
chamfering
linear is not in the interpolation linear(in the extension line of the interpolation linear).
2) Circular chamfering
A. The circular chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in
the same block.
B. CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is too big.

CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is D, max. circular radius of the
tangential linear lines is Rmax which is less than D as follows.
C. The circular chamfering function is invalid when the linear and the circular, or the
circular and the linear are tangential.
D. The circular chamfering function is invalid when one circular and another one are
tangential.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming
The circular chamfering function is valid when the circular tangency is as follows:
3.12 Dwell G04

Command format: G04 P__ ; or
G04 X__ ; or
G04 U__ ; or
G04;
Command function: each axis stops the motion, the modal of G commands and the
reserved data, state are not changed, and execute the next block after dwelling the
defined time.
Command specification: G04 is non-modal.
G04 dwell time is defined by the word P__, X__ or U__.
Range of -9999999999999999 unit: ms.
X, U range is -9999999999999999 x least input unit (unit: s)
Notes:
The exact stop is executed between the blocks when P, X, U are not input.
The system exactly stop a block when P, X, U are not input or P, X , U specify negative
values.
P is valid when P, X, U are in the same block; X is valid when X, U are in the same
block.
When the system executes the feed hold in G04, dwell can be executed after the
Current delay time.
3.13 Machine Zero Function

3.13.1 Machine 1st reference point G28
Command function: the tool rapid traverses to the middle point defined by X(U), Z(W)
from starting point and then return to the machine zero.
Command specifications:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G28 is non-modal.
X, Z, Y: absolute coordinates of middle point;
U, W, V: Z absolute coordinates of middle point;ing
W: Difference value of absolute coordinates between middle point and starting point in Z
direction. Omit all or one of X(U), Z(W) as follows:
Running path(as Fig. 3-12) :

(1) Rapid traverse to middle point of specified axis from current position(A pointB
point) ;
(2) Rapid traverse to reference point from the middle point(B pointR point) ;
(3) If the machine is not locked, LED is ON when the machine reference point return is
completed.
Fig.3-12
Note 1: Do not execute G28 and machine zero return without the zero switch on the machine.
Note 2: Machine zero returns in Jog mode and in G28 are the same and their deceleration signals
and the signal every rotation must be detected;
Note 3: X and Z move at the respectively rapid traverse speed from A to B and from B to R, and so
the path is not always a straight line;
Note 4: The system cancels the tool length compensation after executing G28 to perform the
machine zero return;
3.13.2 Machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point G30
Machine zero is fixed point in the machine tool, decided by the zero switch and zero return
switch installed on the machine tool.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Machine reference point is located at the position after the machine zero offsets No.114 or
No.115 value, when No.114, No.115 setting value is 0, the machine reference point
coincides with the machine zero. The coordinates of machine reference point are No.120,
No.121 setting value. Executing machine zero return is considered to executing the
machine reference point return.
TAC-100XT has machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point functions. Use separately No.122
No.127
Command Function
G28 X(U) X returns to machine zero and Z axis remains in the previous position
G28 Z(W) Z returns to machine zero and X axis remains in the previous position
G28 in the previous positions and continuously execute the next block
G28 X(U) Z(W) X, Z return to machine zero simultaneously to set X, Z machine
coordinates of the machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point.
The relationship between the machine zero, machine reference point, machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th
reference point is as follows:
Command format:
G30 P2 X(U) __ Z(W) __;
G30 P3 X(U) __ Z(W) __;
G30 P4 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: the tool rapidly traverses with the rapid traverse speed to the middle
point specified by X(U) , Z(W)
Command specifications: G30 is non-modal.
X: X absolute coordinate of the middle point;
U: difference value of X absolute coordinate value between the middle point and starting
point;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of the middle point;
W: difference point of Z absolute coordinate between the middle point and starting point.
Omit one or all of X(U) , Z(W) as follows:
Command Function
G30 Pn X(U) X returns to the machine nth reference point, Z axis retains
G30 Pn Z(W) Z return to the nth machine reference point, X axis retains
G30 X and Z retain, go on executing the next program block
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G30 Pn X(U) Z(W) X and Z return to the machine nth reference point simultaneously
Note 1: n in the above table is 2, 3 or 4;

Note 2: Do not check the deceleration, zero signal when you execute the machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th
reference point.
Command operations: (taking example of returning to machine 2nd reference point as
follows):
(1) Rapidly traverse to the middle position of command axis from the current position (A
point
B point);
(2) Traverse from the middle point with the speed set by No.113 to the 2nd reference point
set by
No.122 and No.123 (B point R2 point);
(3) When CNC is not in the machine lock state, the completion signal of reference point
return ZP21 Bit0, Bit1 is high.
Note 1: Execute the machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return after you manually execute the
machine reference point return or G28 (machine reference point return).
Note 2: AB and B0R2, two axes separately traverse, and so their trails are linear or not.
Note 3: CNC cancels the tool length compensation after you execute G30 to return 2nd, 3rd, and
th
4 reference point.
Note 4: Must not execute G30 (machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return) when the zero switch
is not installed on the machine.
Note 5: Do not set the workpiece coordinate system when you execute the 2nd, 3rd, and the
th
machine 4 reference point return.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.14 Skip Interpolation G31

Command format: G31 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_;
Command function: in executing the command, when the outside skip signal (X3.5) is
input, the system stops the command to execute the next block. The function is used
to the dynamic measure (such as milling machine), toolsetting measure and so on of
workpiece measure.
Command explanations: non-modal G command (00 group);
Its address format is same that of G01;
Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before using it;
Feedrate should not be set to too big to get the precise stop position;
a. following block execution after skip:
1. The next block of G31 is the incremental coordinate programming shown in Fig. 3-13:
Fig. 3-13
2. The next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of one axis as Fig. 3-14:
Fig. 3-14
3. The next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of two axes shown in
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-15:
Program:
G31 Z200 F100
G01 X100 Z300
Programming
b. Signals relevant to G31
Skip signal:
SKIP:G6.6
Type: input signal
Function: G6.6 ends the skip cutting. I.e. in a block containing G31, the skip signal
becoming the absolute coordinate position of 1 is to be stored in the macro
variable (#5011#5015 separately corresponds to X, Z, Y)
Operation: when the skip signal becomes 0, CNC executes as follows:
When the block is executing G31, CNC stores the current absolute coordinates
Of each axis. CNC stops G31 to execute the next block, the skip signal detects
its state instead of its RISING EDGE. So when the skip signal is 1, it meets the
skip conditions.
Note:
CNC immediately stops the feed axis (without acceleration/deceleration execution), and G31
feedrate should be as low as possible below 1000 mm/min to get the precise stop position.
3.16 Workpiece Coordinate System G50

Command function: define the absolute coordinates of current position and create the
workpiece coordinates system (called floating coordinates system) by
setting the absolute coordinates of current position in the system. After
G50 is executed, the system takes the current position as the program
zero (program reference point), and the system returns to the point after
executing the program zero return. After the workpiece coordinate system
is created, input the coordinate values with the coordinate system in the
absolute coordinates programming until the next workpiece coordinate
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
system is created again (using G50).

G50 is non-modal;
X: New absolute coordinates of current position in X direction;
U: Different value between the new absolute coordinates of current position in X direction
And the absolute coordinates before executing commands;
Z: New absolute coordinates of current position in Z direction;
W: Different value between the new absolute coordinates of current position in X direction
and the absolute coordinates before executing commands;
In G50, when X(U) or Z(W) are not input, the system does not change current coordinates
position as program zero; when X(U) and Z(W) are not input, the system takes the
previous setting position as program zero.
Example:
Programming Fig.3-16
As Fig.3-16, create the above-mentioned workpiece coordinate system and set (X100
Z150) to the reference point of program after executing G50 X100 Z150.
Note: When No.003 Bit4 is 1(executing tool compensation by coordinates offset), T function is
executed,motion command is not executed and the system creates workpiece coordinate system
with G50, the displayed coordinate value are ones which are defined by G50 adding or
subtracting tool compensation value which is not executed.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.18 Workpiece Coordinate System G54G59

Command format
G54 workpiece coordinate system 1
Command function: one of G54G59 is specified, one of workpiece coordinate system
16 is selected. After a workpiece coordinate system is specified, the specified
point is in the specified workpiece coordinate system till a new workpiece
coordinate system is set.
Explanation: G54G59 are modal.
In the system, each coordinate system should correspond to ZOFS1~ ZOFS6 of zero
offset value of one workpiece coordinate system, relation between ZOFS1~ ZOFS6 and
previous workpiece is shown below:
Programming
When 11.7APRSis set to 1, an absolute coordinate system is set after machine zero
return,and then EXOFS and ZOFSn setting values are offset. Current workpiece
coordinate setting after zero return is shown: new workpiece coordinates=current absolute
coordinates-ZOFSn + EXOFS.
G54G59 workpiece coordinate system switch
Specifying G54~G59 can switch 6 workpiece coordinate systems to make the system
work in different workpiece systems. Absolute coordinate variation of current position is
the origin offset value between the new workpiece coordinate system and the old.
Namelynew absolute coordinates
=current absolute coordinates -ZOFS new ZOFS old
Example
Example 1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Absolute coordinates after zero return is0,0EXOF=(0,0) ZOFS1=(-10,-10);

Absolute coordinate values after zero return in G54: 0 - (-10 + 0) = 10;
Example 2
Absolute coordinate values after zero return:20,20EXOF=(5,5) ZOFS2=(10, 10);
Absolute coordinate values after zero return in G55: 20 - (10 + 5) = 5;
Example 3
Current absolute coordinates (10,10); EXOF=(5,5) ; ZOFS1=(-10,-10); ZOFS2 =
(-30,-30); absolute coordinate values from G54 to G55: 10--30--10= 30
EXOFSexternal workpiece coordinate zeroit is added to zero offset value of each
workpiece
coordinate system, its value is a part of tool compensation->setting in the workpiece
coordinate
system
ZOFSnzero offset value of each workpiece coordinate system ZOFS1ZOFS6its value
is a
part of tool compensation->setting in the workpiece coordinate system
86
Programming
Notes
When 11.7APRSis set to 0, the absolute coordinate system after machine zero
return is
not set, and the EXOF and ZOFSn offset cannot be executed because the workpiece
coordinate system is not set again.
Modification setting of EXOFS and ZOFSn are valid only in non-run state, namely,
setting
values of each workpiece coordinate system cannot be modified when a program is
running.
The workpiece coordinate system offset is immediately valid after values of EXOFS
and
ZOFSn are modified.
Whether the incremental coordinates include offset values of the coordinate system is
set
by05.1PPD.
In tool nose radius compensation mode, compensation is cancelled temporarily in
G54~G59,
and is recovered in the next movement command.
When G54~G59 and G50 are in the same block, G54~G59 are invalid, but G50 is
valid.
When G50 sets the coordinate system, origin of the current workpiece system is
modified. So,
there is an offset value of origins between a new coordinate system set by G50 and
previously current coordinate system. The offset value should be added to offset values of
origins of all workpiece coordinate systems, i.e. all workpiece coordinate systems move
the same values, which are shown below: Offset value A are all workpiece coordinate
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
systems, which are shown below:
Prog
ramming
3.19 Fixed Cycle Command

To simplify programming, the system defines G command of single machining cycle with
one
block to complete the rapid traverse to position, linear/thread cutting and rapid traverse to
return to
the starting point:
G90: axial cutting cycle;
G92: thread cutting cycle;
G94: radial cutting cycle;
G92 will be introduced in section Thread Function.
3.19.1 Axial cutting cycle G90
Command format: G90 X(U) __ Z(W) __ F__; (cylinder cutting)
G90 X(U) __ Z(W) __ R__ F__; (taper cutting)
Command function: From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper
surface is completed by radial feeding(X) and axial (Z or X and Z) cutting.
G90 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of linear interpolation(cutting feed)
End point of cutting: end position of linear interpolation(cutting feed)
X: X absolute coordinates of cutting end point
U: different value of X absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
Z: different value of Z absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
W: different value of Z absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
R: different value (radius value) of X absolute coordinates between end point and start
point of cutting. When the signs of R is not the same that of U, RU/2; when R0 or
the input is default, the cylinder cutting is executed as Fig.3-17, otherwise, the cone
cutting is executed as Fig. 3-18; unit: mm.
Ranges of X, U, Z, WR are referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.
Cycle process:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X rapidly travrses from starting point to cutting starting point;

Cutting feed (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
X executes the tool retraction at feedrate (opposite direction to the above-
mentioned), and return to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting
point are the same;
Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
a
Fig. 3-17
Fig. 3-18
Cutting path: Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U, W, R,
and tool path of U, W, R with different signs are shown in Fig. 3-19:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-19
Example: Fig. 3-20, rod 125110
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-20
Programming
3.19.2 Radial cutting cycle G94
Command format: G94 X(U) __ Z(W) __ F__; (face cutting)
G94 X(U) __ Z(W) __ R__ F__; (taper face cutting)
Command function: From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper
surface
is completed by radial feeding(X) and axial (Z or X and Z) cutting.
G94 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of linear interpolation (cutting feed). Unit: mm;
End point of cutting: end position of linear interpolation (cutting feed). Unit: mm;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting. Unit: mm;
U: Different value of absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting in X
direction .Unit: mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinates of end point of cutting, Unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, Unit:
mm;
R: Different value(R value) of X absolute coordinates from end point to starting point of
cutting. When the sign of R is not the same as that of U, R, RW.
Radial linear cutting is shown in Fig. 3-21, radial taper cutting is as Fig. 3-22.
Ranges of X, U, Z, WR are referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.
Cycle process:
Z rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point;
Cutting feed (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
Z executes the tool retraction at the cutting feedrate (opposite direction to the
above-mentioned ), and returns to the position which the absolute coordinates and the
starting point are the same;
The tool rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-21
ogra
mming Fig. 3-22
Cutting path: Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U, W is
shown in Fig.3-23:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-23
Programming
Example: Fig. 3-24, rod 125112
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-24
3.19.3 Caution of fixed cycle commands

1) After X(U) , Z(W) , R are executed in the canned cycle command, their command
values are value if X(U) , Z(W) ,R are not redefined by executing a new canned cycle
commands. The command values of X(U) ,Z(W) ,R are cleared if non-modal G
command(00 Group) except for G04 or G00,G01, G02, G03, G32 is executed.
2) In MDI mode, the previous canned cycle can be executed by pressing the cycle start
key after the canned cycle is completed.
3) One cycle cannot be executed repetitively in G90G94 when the next block of G90
G94 is M, S, T command; the previous cycle is executed repetitively in G90G94 when
the next block is ended( EOB;).
Example:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
N010 G90 X20.0 Z10.0 F400;

N011 ; (execute G90 one time repetitively)
4) Pause or single block is executed in G90, G94, the single block stops after the tool
moves end
point of current path.
Outer cutting 120
CBAcutting 60 rogramming
3.20 Multiple Cycle Commands

Multiple cycle commands of the system includes axial roughing cycle G71, radial roughing
cycle G72, closed cutting cycle G73, finishing cycle G70, axial grooving multiple cycle
G74, axial grooving multiple cycle G75 and multiple thread cutting cycle G76. When the
system executes these commands, it automatically counts the cutting times and the
cutting path according to the programmed path, travels of tool infeed and tool retraction,
executes multiple machining cycle (tool infeed cuttingretract tooltool infeed ),
automatically completes the roughing, finishing
workpiece and the starting point and the end point of command are the same one.
3.20.1 Axial roughing cycle G71
G71 has two kinds of roughing cycle: type I and type II.
Command formatG71 U(d) R(e) F S T
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(u) W(w) K0/1 J0/1
Command function: G71 is divided into three parts:

1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and retract tool, the cutting feedrate,
the spindle speed and the tool function when roughing;
2nd blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;
3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without
being executed actually when executing G71.
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and tool
retract,
the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in
paralleling with Z,
and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool
infeedcuttingtool
retraction. The starting point and the end point are the same one. The command is applied
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
to the
formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Relevant definitions:
Finishing path: The above-mentioned Part 3 of G71(nsnf block)defines the finishing
path, and the starting point of finishing path (starting point of ns block)is the same these of
starting point and end point of G71, called A point; the first block of finishing
path(ns block)is used for X rapid traversing or tool infeed, and the end point of
finishing path is called to B point; the end point of finishing path(end point of nf
block)is called to C point. The finishing path is ABC.
Programming
Roughing path: The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing
allowance(u,w) and is the path contour formed by executing G71. A, B, C point of
finishing path after offset corresponds separately to A, B, C point of roughing path, and
the final continuous cutting path of G71 is BC point.
d: It is each travel(unit: mm, radius value) of X tool infeed in roughing, its value:
0.001~99.999(unit: mm/inch,radius value) without sign, and the direction of tool infeed is
defined by move direction of ns block. The command value d is reserved after executing
U(d) and the value of system parameter No.051 is rewritten to d1000(unit: 0.001
mm) .
The value of system parameter No.051 is regarded as the travel of tool infeed when U(d)
is not input.
e: It is travel (unit: mm/inch, radius value) of X tool retraction in roughing its value:
0.001~99.999
(unit: mm,radius value) without sign, and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that
of tool infeed, the command value e is reserved and the value of system parameter
No.052 is rewritten to e1000(unit: 0.001 mm) after R(e) is executed. The value of system
parameter No.052 is regarded as the travel of tool retraction when R(e) is not input.
ns: Block number of the first block of finishing path.
nf: Block number of the last block of finishing path.
u: X finishing allowance is 99999999 least input increment with sign symbol (diameter,
unit:mm/inch, with sign). X coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path,
i.e. the different value of X absolute coordinates between A and A. The system defaults
u=0 when U(u) is not input, i.e. there is no finishing allowance in X direction for
roughing cycle.
w: Z finishing allowance is 99999999 least input increment with sign symbol (diameter,
unit:mm/inch, with sign). the Z coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing
path, i.e.the different value of Z absolute coordinate between A and A. The system
defaults w=0
when W(w) is not input, i.e. there is no Z finishing allowance for roughing cycle.
K: When K is not input or is not 1, the system does not check the program monotonicity
except that the Z value of starting point and end point of the arc or ellipse or parabola or
the arc is more than 180 degree; K=1, the system checks the program monotonicity.
F: Feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
M, S, T, F: They can be specified in the first G71 or the second ones or program nsnf. M,
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
S, T,F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G71, and they are valid in G70 finishing
blocks.
Type I
1Execution process: (Fig. 3-25)
X rapidly traverses to A from A point, X travel is u, and Z travel is w;
X moves from A is d( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed
with G0,is for tool infeed at feedrate F with G71, and its direction of tool infeed is that of
AB point;
Z executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path, and its direction is the same that of
Z coordinate AB point;
X, Z execute the tool retraction e (45straight line) at feedrate, the directions of tool
retraction is opposite to that of too infeed;
Z rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z
coordinate;
After executing X tool infeed (d+e)again, the end point of traversing tool is still on the
middle point of straight line between A and B(the tool does not reach or exceed B), and
after executing the tool infeed (d+e)again, execute ; after executing the tool infeed
(d+e)again, the end point of tool traversing reaches B point or exceeds the straight line
between AB point and X executes the tool infeed to B point, and then the next step is
executed;
Cutting feed from B to C point along the roughing path;
Rapid traverse to A from C point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf
block after G71 cycle is ended.
Fig. 3-25 G71 cycle path

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:

u, w define the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in finishing, and their sign symbol
are as follows Fig. 3-26: BC for finishing path, BC for roughing path and A is the tool
start-up point.
Fig.3-26
Programming
Type II
The type II is different from the type I as follows:
1Relative definition: more one parameter than the type I .
JWhen J is not input or J is not 1, the system does not execute the run along the
roughing contour; J=1: the system executes the run along the roughing contour.
2The system does not execute the monotonous increasing or the monotonous
decreasing along X external contour, and the workpiece can be up to 10 grooves as
follows:
Fig. 3-26-1type
But, the Z external contour must be the monotonous increasing or the monotonous
decreasing, and the following contour cannot be machined:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-26-2type
3The first tool cutting need not the vertical: the machining can be executed when Z is the
monotonous change shape as follows:
Fig. 3-26-3rogramming
4After the turning, the system should execute the tool retraction, the retraction travel is
specified by Reor No. 52 as follows:
5Command execution processroughing path A->H

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-26-5type
Notes
ns block is only G00, G01. When the workpiece is type II, the system must specify the
two axes X(U) and Z(W), and W0 must be specified when Z does not move;
For type II, only X finishing allowance can be specified; when Z finishing allowance is
specified, the whole machining path offsets, and it can be specified to 0;
For type II, after the current grooving is completed to execute the next, the tool
approaches the workpiece(remark 25 and 26) in the remainder tool retraction distance at
G1 speed; when the tool retraction is 0 or the remainder distance is less than the tool
retraction, and the tool approaches the workpiece at G1 speed;
Some workpiece without remarking the type I or the type II adapts the both;
For the finishing path(nsnf block)Z dimension must be monotonous change(always
increasing or decreasing), X dimension in the type I must be monotonous change and
does not need in the type II;
nsnf blocks in programming must be followed G71 blocks. If they are in front of G71
blocks,the system automatically searches and executes nsnf blocks, and then executes
the next program following nf block after they are executed, which causes the system
executes nsnf blocks repetitively;
nsnf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed
when G71 is executed. F, S, T commands of nsnf blocks are invalid when G71 is
executed, at the moment, F, S, T commands of G71 blocks are valid. F, S, T of nsnf
blocks are valid when executing nsnf to command G70 finishing cycle;
In nsnf blocks, there are only G commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2,
G6.3,G7.2, G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms(M98/M99);
G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are invalid when G71 is executed, and are valid
when G70 is executed;
When G71 is executed, the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse,
but return to the position before manual traversing when G71 is executed again, otherwise,
the following path will be wrong;
When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the system has executed end point of current path;

d,u are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P, Q
commands;
G71 cannot be executed in MDI, otherwise, the system alarms;
There are no the same block number in ns~nf when compound cycle commands are
executed repetitively in one program;
The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the
workpiece.
ExampleFig. 3-73Type I
Fig. 3-27
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.20.2 Radial roughing cycle G72
Command function: G72 is divided into three parts:

1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, the cutting speed,
the spindle speed and the tool function in roughing;
2nd blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;
3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without
being executed actually when G72 is executed.
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and retract
tool,the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in
paralleling with Z,and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle
tool infeedcutting feedtool retraction. The starting point and the end point of G72 are
the same one. The command is applied to the formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Finishing path: the above-mentioned Part of G71(nsnf block)defines the finishing
path,and the starting point of finishing path (i.e. starting point of ns block)is the same
these of starting point and end point of G72, called A point; the first block of
finishing path(ns block)is used for Z rapid traversing or cutting feed, and the end
point of finishing path is called to B point; the end point of finishing path(end
point of nf block)is called to C point. The finishing path is ABC.
Roughing path: The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing allowance(u,
w) and is the path contour formed by executing G72. A, B, C point of finishing path after
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
offset corresponds separately to A, B, C point of roughing path, and the final

continuous cutting path of G72 is BC point.
d: it is Z cutting in roughing, its value: 0.001~99.999(unit: mm/inch) without sign symbol,
and the direction of tool infeed is determined by ns block traverse direction. the specified
value d is reserved and the data value is switched to the corresponding value to save to
No.051 after W(d) is executed. The value of system parameter No.051 is regarded as
the tool infeed clearance when R(e) is not input.
e: it is Z tool retraction clearance in roughing, its value: 0~99.999(unit: mm) without sign
symbol, and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed, the specified
value e is reserved and the data value is switched to the corresponding value to save to
No.052 after R(e) is executed. The value of system parameter No.052 is regarded as the
tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.
uit is X finishing allowance in roughing, its range: 99999999least input increment(X
coordinate offset of roughing contour corresponding to the finishing path, i.e. X absolute
coordinate difference between A and A.(diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol).
wit is Z finishing allowance in roughing, its range: 99999999least input increment(Z
coordinate offset of roughing contour corresponding to the finishing path, i.e. Z absolute
coordinate difference between A and A.(diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol).
F: Cutting feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
S, T,F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G72, and they are valid in G70 finishing
blocks.
Execution process: Fig. 3-28
X rapidly traverses to A from A point, X travel is u, and Z travel is w;
X moves from A is d( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed
with G0, is for tool infeed at G72 feedrate F in G1, and its direction of tool infeed is
that of AB point;
X executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path, and its direction is the same that of
X coordinate BC point;
X, Z execute the tool retraction e (45straight line)at feedrate, the directions of tool
retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed ;
X rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z
coordinate;
After Z tool infeed (d+e)again is executed, the end point of traversing tool is still on
the middle point of straight line between A and B(the tool does not reach or exceed
B), and after Z executes the tool infeed (d+e)again, is executed; after the tool
infeed (d+e) is executed again, the end point of tool traversing reaches B point or
exceeds the straight line between AB point and Z executes the tool infeed to B
point, and then the next step is executed;
Cutting feed from B to C point along the roughing path;
Rapidly traverse to A from C point and the program jumps to the next clock following
nf block after G71 cycle is completed.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming Fig. 3-28

nsnf blocks in programming must be followed G72 blocks. If they are in the front of
G72 blocks, the system automatically searches and executes nsnf blocks, and then
executes the next program following nf block after they are executed, which causes the
system executes nsnf blocks repetitively;
blocks are valid when executing nsnf to command G70 finishing cycle;
There are G00, G01 without the word X(U) in ns block, otherwise the system alarms;
The dimensions in X, Z direction must be changed monotonously (always increasing
or reducing) for the finishing path;
In nsnf blocks, there are only G commands: G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2, G6.3,
G7.2,G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms(M98/M99);
when G70 is done;
the following path will be wrong;
d, u are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P, Q
commands;
executed repetitively in one program;
G72 cannot be executed in MDI, otherwise, the system alarms;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
workpiece.
ogramming
Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:
u, w define the coordinate offset and its direction of cut-in in finishing, and their sign
symbol are as follows Fig. 3-29: BC for finishing path, BC for roughing path and A is
the tool start-up point.
Fig.3-29
ExampleFig. 3-30
Fig.3-30
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Program:
O0005;
G00 X176 Z10 M03 S500 (Change No.2 tool and execute its compensation, spindle
CW rotation with 500 r/min)
G72 W2.0 R0.5 F300; (Tool infeed 2mm, tool retraction 0.5mm)
G72 P10 Q20 U0.2 W0.1; (Roughing a--d,X roughing allowance 0.2mm and Z 0.1mm)
Programming
N10 G00 Z-55 S800 ; (Rapid traverse)
G01 X160 F120; (Infeed to a point)
X80 W20; (Machining ab) Blocks for finishing path
W15; (Machining bc)
N20 X40 W20 ; (Machining cd)
G70 P050 Q090 M30; (Finishing ad)
3.20.3 Closed cutting cycle G73
Command functions: G73 is divided into three parts:

Blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, the cutting speed, the
spindle speed and the tool function when roughing;
Blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;
Blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without being
executed actually when executing G73.
According to the finishing allowance, the travel of tool retraction and the cutting times, the
system automatically counts the travel of roughing offset, the travel of each tool infeed
and the path of roughing, the path of each cutting is the offset travel of finishing path, the
cutting path approaches gradually the finishing one, and last cutting path is the finishing
one according to the finishing allowance. The starting point and end point of G73 are the
same one, and G73 is applied to roughing for the formed rod. G73 is non-modal and its
path is shown in Fig.3-31.
Finishing path: The above-mentioned Part 3 of G73 (nsnf block)defines the finishing
path,and the starting point of finishing path (start point of ns block)is the same these
of starting point and end point of G73, called A point; the end point of the first
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
block of finishing path(ns block)is called B point; the end point of finishing
path(end point of nf block) is called C point. The finishing path is ABC.
Roughing path: It is one group of offset path of finishing one, and the roughing path
times are the same that of cutting. After the coordinates offset, A, B, C of finishing path
separately corresponds to An, Bn , Cn of roughing path(n is the cutting times,
the first cutting path is A1, B1, C1 and the last one is Ad, Bd, Cd). The
coordinates offset value of the first cutting compared to finishing path is
(i2+u, w+k) (diameter programming) , the coordinates offset value of
the last cutting compared to finishing path is(u, w) , the coordinates offset
value of each cutting compared to the previous one is as follows:
i: It is X tool retraction clearance in roughing, and its range is 99999999 least input
increment (radius, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) , i is equal to X coordinate offset
value (radius value) of A1 point compared to Ad point. The X total cutting travel(radius
value) is equal to |i| in roughing, and X cutting direction is opposite to the sign of i: i
0, the system executes X negative cutting in roughing. It is reserved after i specified
value is executed and the data is switched to the corresponding value to save to NO.053.
The No.053 value is regarded as X tool retraction clearance in roughing when U(i) is
not input.
k: It is Z tool retraction clearance in roughing, and its range is 99999999 least input
increment (radius, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) , k is equal to Z coordinate offset
value (radius value) of A1 point compared to Ad point. Z total cutting travel(radius value)
is equal to |k| in roughing, and Z cutting direction is opposite to the sign of k: i0,
the system executes Z negative cutting in roughing. It is reserved after k specified
value is executed and the data is switched to the corresponding value to save to NO.054.
The No.054 value is regarded as Z tool retraction clearance in roughing when W(k) is
not input.
d: It is the cutting times 1~9999 (unit: times). R5 means the closed cutting cycle is
completed
by 5 times cutting. R (d) is reserved after it is executed and NO.055 value is rewritten to d
(unit: times). No.055 value is regarded as the cutting times when R(d) is not input. When
the cutting times is 1, the system completes the closed cutting cycle based on 2 times
cutting.
u: It is X finishing allowance and its range is 99999999 least input increment
(diameter,
unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) and is the X coordinate offset of roughing path
compared to finishing path, i.e. the different value of X absolute coordinates of A1
compared to A. u0,it is the offset of the last X positive roughing path compared to
finishing path. The system defaults u=0 when U(u) is not input, i.e. there is no X
finishing allowance for roughing cycle.
w: It is Z finishing allowance and its range is 99999999 least input increment
(diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) and is the X coordinate offset of roughing path
compared to finishing path, i.e. the different value of Z absolute coordinates of A1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
compared to A. w0,it is the offset of the last X positive roughing path compared to
finishing path. The system defaults w=0 when W(w) is not input, i.e. there is no Z
finishing allowance for roughing cycle.
F: Feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
S,T, F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G73, and they are valid in G70 finishing
blocks.
Execution process: (Fig. 3-31)
AA1: Rapid traverse;
First roughing A1B1C1 :
A1B1: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns
block in G1;
B1C1: Cutting feed.
C1A2: Rapid traverse.
Second roughing A2B2C2 :
A2B2: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns
block in G1;B2C2: Cutting feed.
C2A3: Rapid traverse:
No. n times roughing, AnBnCn :

AnBn: ns Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns
block in G1;
BnCn: Cutting feed.
CnAn+1: Rapid traverse;
Last roughing, AdBdCd :

AdBd: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns
block in G1;
BdCd: Cutting feed.
CdA: Rapid traverse to starting point;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-31 G73 path

system executes nsnf blocks repetitively.
blocks are valid when executing nsnf to command G70 finishing cycle.
There are only G00, G01 in ns block.
I n nsnf blocks, there are only G commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2,
G6.3,G7.2, G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms(M98/M99) Programming
when G70 is executed.
the following path will be wrong.
the system has executed end point of current path.
i, u are specified by the same U and k, w are specified by the same U, and
they are different with or without being specified P,Q commands.
G73 cannot be executed in MDI, otherwise, the system alarms.
executed repetitively in one program.
workpiece.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:

i, k define the coordinates offset and its direction of roughing; u, w define the
coordinate
offset and the cut-in direction in finishing, and their sign symbols are as follows Fig. 3-32:
A is tool start-up point, BC for workpiece contour, BC for roughing contour and
BC for finishing path.
Programming Fig-3-32
ExampleFig. 3-33
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig.3-34
3.20.4 Finishing cycle G70

Command format: G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
Command function: The tool executes the finishing of workpiece from starting point
along with the finishing path defined by nsnf blocks. After executing G71, G72 or
G73 to roughing, execute G70 to finishing and single cutting of finishing
allowance is completed. The tool returns to starting point and execute the
next block following G70 block after G70 cycle is completed.
G70 path is defined by programmed one of nsnf blocks. Relationships of relative
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
position of ns, nf block in G70G73 blocks are as follows:
system executes nsnf blocks repetitively.
F, S, T in nsnf blocks are valid when executing nsnf to command G70 finishing
cycle.
G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are valid in G70;
the following path will be wrong.
the system has executed end point of current path.
G70 cannot be executed in MDI, otherwise, the system alarms.
executed repetitively in one program.
workpiece.
3.20.5 Axial grooving multiple cycle G74
Command format: G74 R(e) ;
G74 X(U) Z(W) P(i) Q(k) R(d) F ;
Command function: Axial (X axis) tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous
cutting cycle: Tool infeeds from starting point in radial direction( Z), retracts, infeeds again,
and again and again, and last tool retracts in axial direction, and retracts to the Z
position in radial direction, which is called one radial cutting cycle; tool infeeds in axial
direction and execute the next radial cutting cycle; cut to end point of cutting, and
then return to starting point (starting point and end point are the same one in G74),
which is called one radial grooving compound cycle. Directions of axial tool infeed
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
and radial tool infeed are defined by relative position between end point X(U) Z(W)
and starting point of cutting. G75 is used for machining radial loop groove or column
surface by radial discontinuously cutting, breaking stock and stock removal.
Starting point of axial cutting cycle: starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial
cutting cycle, defining with An(n=1,2,3), Z coordinate of An is
the same that of starting point A, the different value of X coordinate between An and An-1 is
i. The starting point A1 of the first axial cutting cycle is the same as the starting
point A, and the X coordinate of starting point (Af ) of the last axial cutting cycle is the
same that of cutting end point.
End point of axial tool infeed: starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial cutting
cycle,defining with Bn(n=1,2,3), Z coordinate of Bn is the same
that of cutting end point, X coordinate of Bn is the same that of An , and the end point (Bf )
of the last axial tool infeed is the same that of cutting end point.
End point of radius tool retraction: end position of radius tool infeed (travel of tool
infeed is d) after each axial cutting cycle reaches the end point of axial
tool infeed, defining with Cn(n=1,2,3), Z coordinate of Cn is the same that of cutting
end point, and the different value of X coordinate between Cn and An is d;
End point of axial cutting cycle: end position of axial tool retraction from the end point of
radius tool retraction, defining with Dn(n=1, 2, 3), Z coordinate of Dn is the same that
of starting point, X coordinate of Dn is the same that of Cn (the different value
of X coordinate between it and An is d);
Cutting end point: it is defined by X(U) Z(W) , and is defined with Bf of the last axial
tool infeed.
R(e) : it is the tool retraction clearance after each axial(Z) tool infeed, and its range is
0~99.999(unitmm) without sign symbols. The specified value is reserved validly after
R(e) is executed and the data is switched to the corresponding value to save to NO.056.
The NO.056 value is regarded as the tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.
X: X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point.
Z: Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinates between cutting end point Bf and starting
point.
P(i) radial(X) cutting for each axial cutting cycle , range: 0i 9999999 least input
increment (unit: least input increment, diameter value, without sign symbol).
Q(k)radial(Z) cutting for each axial cutting cycle, range: 0k 9999999 least input
increment (unit: least input increment, diameter value, without sign symbol).
R(d) : radial (X) tool retraction after cutting to end point of axial cutting, range:
0~99999999
least input increment (unit: mm/inch, diameter value, without sign symbol).. The radial (X)
tool retraction clearance is 0 when the system defaults the axial cutting end point. The
system defaults the tool retraction is executed in positive direction when X(U) and P(i)
are omitted.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Axial (Z) cutting feed k from the starting point of axial cutting cycle, feed in Z
negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of
starting point in Z direction, otherwise, feed in Z positive direction;
Axial (Z) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of ;
X executes the cutting feed (k+e) again, the end point of cutting feed is still in it
between starting point An of axial cutting cycle and end point of axial tool infeed, Z
executes the cutting feed (k+e)again and execute ; after Z executing the cutting P
feed (k+e)again, the end point of cutting feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and
Bn cutting feed to Bn in Z direction and then execute ;
Radial(X) rapid tool retraction d to Cn , when X coordinate of Bf (cutting end point)
is less than that of A (starting point), retract tool in X positive, otherwise, retract tool
in X negative direction;
Axial(Z axial) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n axial cutting cycle is completed. If the
current axial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ; if it is the previous one
before the last axial cutting cycle, execute ;
Radial(X axial)rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to retract tool. If the end
point of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last axial cutting
cycle) after X executes the tool infeed (d+i) , i.e. DnAn+1 and then execute
(start the next axial cutting cycle); if X end point of tool infeed is not on it between Dn
and Af after tool infeed (d+i), rapidly traverse to Af and execute to start the
first axial cutting cycle;
X rapidly traverse to return to A, and G74 is completed.
Fig. 3-34 G74 path

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
The cycle movement is executed by Z(W) and P(k) blocks of G74, and the movement
is not executed if only G74 R(e) ; block is executed;
d and e are specified by the same address and whether there are Z(W) and P(k)
word or not in blocks to distinguish them;
The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G74 is executed,
but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G74 is
executed again,otherwise the following path will be wrong.
When the single block is running, programs dwell after each axial cutting cycle is
completed.
R(d) must be omitted in blind hole cutting, and so there is no distance of tool
retraction when the tool cuts to axial end point of cutting.
ExampleFig. 3-35
Program (suppose that the grooving tool width is 4mm, system least increment is
0.001mm):
O0007;
G0 X40 Z5 M3 S500; (Start spindle and position to starting point of machining)
G74 R0.5 ; (Machining cycle)
G74 X20 Z60 P3000 Q5000 F50; (Z tool infeed 5mm and tool retraction 0.5mm each time;
rapid return to starting point (Z5) after cutting feed to end point(Z-20), X tool infeed 3mm
and cycle the above-mentioned steps)
M30; (End of program)
3.20.6 Radial grooving multiple cycle G75
Command formatG75 R(e)
G75 X(U) Z(W) P(i) Q(k) R(d) F
Command function: Axial (Z) tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous cutting
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
cycle:
Tool infeeds from starting point in radial direction, retracts, infeeds again, and again and
again, and last tool retracts in axial direction, and retracts to position in radial direction,
which is called one radial cutting cycle; tool infeeds in axial direction and execute the next
radial cutting cycle; cut to end point of cutting, and then return to starting point (starting
point and end point are the same one in G75), which is called one radial grooving
compound cycle. Directions of axial tool infeed and radial tool infeed are defined by
relative position between end point X(U) Z(W) and starting point of cutting. G75 is used for
machining radial loop groove or column surface by radial discontinuously cutting, breaking
stock and stock removal.
Starting point of radial cutting cycle: Starting position of axial tool infeed for each radial
cutting
cycle, defined by An(n=1, 2, 3), X coordinate of An is the same that of starting point A,
the different value of X coordinate between An and An-1 is k. The starting point
A1 of the first radial cutting cycle is the same as the starting point A, and Z starting point
(Af ) of the last axial cutting cycle is the same that of cutting end point.
End point of radial tool infeed: Starting position of radial tool infeed for each radial
cutting cycle, defined by Bn (n=1, 2, 3), X coordinates of Bn is the same that of cutting
end point, Z coordinates of Bn is the same that of An, and the end point (Bf ) of the last
radial tool infeed is the same that of cutting end point.
End point of axial tool retraction: End position of axial tool infeed (travel of tool infeed is
d) after each axial cutting cycle reaches the end point of axial tool infeed, defining with
Cn(n=1,2,3), X coordinate of
Cn is the same that of cutting end point, and the different
value of Z coordinate between Cn and An is d;
End point of radial cutting cycle: End position of radial tool retraction from the end point
of axial tool retraction, defined by Dn(n=1, 2, 3), X coordinate of Dn is the same that of
starting point, Z coordinates of Dn is the same that of Cn (the different value of Z coordinate
between it and An is d);
Cutting end point: It is defined by X(U) Z(W) , and is defined with Bf of the last radial
tool infeed. R(e) : It is the tool retraction clearance after each radial(X) tool infeed, its
range is 0~99.999 (unit:mm, radius value) without sign symbols. The specified value is
reserved validly after R(e) is executed and the data is switched and saved to No.056.
NO.056 value is regarded as the tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.
X: X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point.
Z: Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit:mm).
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point
A(unit:mm).
P(i) : Radial(X) discontinuous tool infeed of each axial cutting cycle, its range: 0i
9999999(IS_B)/ 0k 99999999IS_C (unit: least input increment, without sign
symbol).
Q(k) : Axial(Z) discontinuous tool infeed of each radial cutting cycle, its range: 0k
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
9999999(IS_B)/0k 99999999IS_C(unit: least input increment, without sign

symbol)..
R(d)Axial (Z) tool retraction clearance after cutting to end point of radial cutting, its
range:0~99999999least input increment(unit: mm/inch, without sign symbol).
The system defaults the tool retraction clearance is 0 after the radial cutting end point is
completed when R(d) is omitted.
The system defaults it executes the positive tool retraction when Z(W) and Q(k) are
omitted.
P
r Fig. 3-36 G75 path

Radial (X) cutting feed i from the starting point of radial cutting cycle, feed in X
negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of
starting point in X direction, otherwise, feed in X positive direction;
Radial(X) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of ;
X executes the cutting feed (k+e) again, the end point of cutting feed is still in it
between starting point An of radial cutting cycle and end point of radial tool infeed, X
executes the cutting feed (i+e) again and executes ; after X cutting feed (i+e) is
executed again, the end point of X cutting feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and
Bn cutting feed to Bn and then execute4 ;
Axial(Z) rapid tool retraction d to Cn , when Z coordinate of Bf (cutting end point) is
less than that of A (starting point), retract tool in Z positive, otherwise, retract tool in Z
negative direction;
Radial (Z) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n radial cutting cycle is completed. The current
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
radial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ; if it is the previous one before the
last radial cutting cycle, execute ;
Axial(X) rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to retract tool. If the end point
of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last radial cutting cycle)
after Z tool infeed (d+k), i.e. DnAn+1 and then execute (start the next radial
cutting cycle); if the end point of tool infeed is not on it between Dn and Af after Z tool
infeed (d+k), rapidly traverse to Af and execute to start the first radial cutting
cycle;
Z rapidly traverses to A, and G75 is completed.
Explanation:
The cycle movement is executed by X(W) and P(i) blocks of G75, and the movement
is not executed if only G75 R(e) ; block is executed;
d and e are specified by the same address R and whether there are X(U) and P(i)
words or not in blocks to distinguish them;
The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G75 is executed,
but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G75 is
executed again,otherwise the following path will be wrong;
R(d) must be omitted in grooving, and so there is no tool retraction clearance when
the tool cuts to radial cutting end point.
ExampleFig.3-37
Fig. 3-37 G75 cutting

Program (suppose the grooving tool width is 4mm, the system least increment is
0.001mm):
O0008;
G00 X150 Z50 M3 S500; (Start spindle with 500 r/min)
G0 X125 Z-20; (Position to starting point of machining)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G75 R0.5 F150; (Machining cycle)

G75 X40 Z-50 P6000 Q3000; (X tool infeed 6mm every time, tool retraction 0.5mm,
rapid returning to starting point (X125) after infeeding to end point (X40), Z tool infeed
3mm and cycle the above-mentioned steps to continuously run programs)
G0 X150 Z50; (Return to starting point of machining)
3.21 Thread Cutting Commands

TAC-100XT CNC system can machine many kinds of thread cutting, including metric/inch
single,multi threads, thread with variable lead and tapping cycle. Length and angle of
thread run-out can be changed, multiple cycle thread is machined by single sided to
protect tool and improve smooth finish of its surface. Thread cutting includes: continuous
thread cutting G32, thread cutting with variable lead G34, Z thread cutting G33, Thread
cutting cycle G92, Multiple thread cutting cycle G76.
The machine used for thread cutting must be installed with spindle encoder whose pulses
are set by No.070m. Drive ratio between spindle and encoder is set by No.110 and
No.111. X or Z traverses to start machine after the system receives spindle signal per rev
in thread cutting, and so one thread is machined by multiple roughing, finishing without
changing spindle speed.
The system can machine many kinds of thread cutting, such as thread cutting without tool
retraction groove. There is a big error in the thread pitch because there are the
acceleration and the deceleration at the starting and ending of X and Z thread cutting, and
so there is length of thread lead-in and distance of tool retraction at the actual starting and
ending of thread cutting.X, Z traverse speeds are defined by spindle speed instead of
cutting feedrate override in thread cutting when the pitch is defined. The spindle override
control is valid in thread cutting. When the spindle speed is changed, there is error in pitch
caused by X and Z acceleration/deceleration, and so the spindle speed cannot be
changed and the spindle cannot be stopped in thread cutting, which will cause tool and
workpiece to be damaged.
3.21.1 Thread cutting with constant lead G32
Command format: G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(I)_ J_ K_ Q_
Command function: The path of tool traversing is a straight line from starting point to end
point as Fig.3-33; the longer moving distance from starting point to end point(X in radius
value) is called as the long axis and another is called as the short axis. In course of motion,
the long axis traverses one lead when the spindle rotates one revolution, and the short
axis and the long axis execute the linear interpolation. Form one spiral grooving with
variable lead on the surface of workpiece to realize thread cutting with constant lead.
Metric pitch and inch pitch are defined respectively by F, I. Metric or inch straight, taper,
end face thread and continuous multi-section thread can by machined in G32.
G32 is modal;
Pitch is defined to moving distance when the spindle rotates one rev(X in radius);
Execute the straight thread cutting when X coordinates of starting point and end point are
the same one(not input X or U);
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Execute the end face thread cutting when X coordinates of starting point and end point
are the same one(not input Z or W);
Execute the cutting taper thread when X and Z coordinates of starting point and end point
are different;
Related definitions:
F: Metric pitch is moving distance of long axis when the spindle rotates one rev: 0.001
mm500mm. After F is executed, it is valid until F with specified pitch is executed again.
I: Teeth per inch. It is ones per inch(25.4 mm) in long axis, and also is circles of spindle
rotation when the long axis traverses one inch(25.4 mm) :0.06tooth/inch
25400tooth/inch. After I is executed, it is valid until I with specified pitch is executed again.
The metric, inch input both express the teeth per inch thread.
J: Movement in the short axis in thread run-out, its range: 99999999 least input
increment with negative sign; if the short axis is X, its value is specified with the radius; J
value is the modal parameter.
K: Length in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 99999999 least input increment.
If the long axis is X, its value is in radius without direction; K is modal parameter.
Q: Initial angle(offset angle)between spindle rotation one rev and starting point of thread
cutting: 0360000 (unit: 0.001 degree). Q is non-modal parameter, must be defined
every time,otherwise it is 00.rogramming
Q rules:
1. Its initial angle is 0if Q is not specified;
2. For continuous thread cutting, Q specified by its following thread cutting block except
for the first block is invalid, namely Q is omitted even if it is specified;
3. Multi threads formed by initial angle is not more than 65535;
4. Q unit : 0.0010 . Q180000 is input in program if it offsets 1800 with spindle one-turn; if
Q180 or Q180.0, it is 0.18.
Difference between long axis and short axis is shown in Fig. 3-38.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-38 G32 path

Notes:
J, K are modal. The thread run-out is previous J, K value when they are omitted in the
next block in continuous thread cutting. Their mode are cancelled when no thread cutting
are executed;
There is no thread run-out when J, or J, K are omitted; K=J is the thread run-out value
when K is omitted;
There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, K=0;
The thread run-out value J=K when J0,K=0;
There is no thread run-out when J=0 or K0;
If the current block is for thread and the next block is the same, the system does not
test the spindle encoder signal per rev at starting the next block to execute the direct
thread cutting,which function is called as continuous thread machining;
After the feed hold is executed, the system displays Pause and the thread cutting
continuously executes not to stop until the current block is executed completely; if the
continuous thread cutting is executed, the program run pauses after thread cutting blocks
are executed completely;
In Single block, the program stops run after the current block is executed. The program
stops running after all blocks for thread cutting are executed;
The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stop or its
drive unit alarms.
Example: Pitch: 2mm. 1 = 3mm,2 = 2mm,total cutting depth 2mm divided into two
times cut-in.
Fig-3-39
Program:
O0009;
G00 X28 Z3; (First cut-in 1mm)
G32 X51 W-75 F2.0; (First taper cutting)
G00 X55; (Tool retraction)
W75; (Z returns to the starting point)
X27; (Second tool infeed 0.5mm)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G32 X50 W-75 F2.0; (Second taper thread cutting )

G00 X55; (Tool retraction)
W75 ; (Z returns to the starting point)
M30;
3.21.3 Thread cutting with variable lead G34
Command formatG34 X(U)__ Z(W)__ F(I)__ J__ K__ R__
Command function: The motion path of tool is a straight line from starting point of X, Z to
end point specified by the block, the longer moving distance from starting point
to end point(X in radius value) is called as the long axis and another is called as the short
axis. In course of motion, the long axis traverses one lead when the spindle rotates one
rev, the pitch increases or decreases a specified value per rev and one spiral grooving
with variable lead on the surface of workpiece to realize thread cutting with variable lead.
Tool retraction can be set in thread cutting.
F, I are specified separately to metric, inch pitch. Executing G34 can machine metric or
inch straight, taper, end face thread with variable pitch.
G34 is modal;
Meanings of X(U) , Z(W) , J, K are the same that of G32;
F: Specify lead, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: Specify thread teeth per inch, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
R: Increment or decrement of pitch per rev, R=F1- F2, with direction; F1>F2, pitch
decreases when R is negative; F1<F2, pitch increases when R is positive (as Fig. 3-41);
R: 0.001~500.000 mm/pitch (metric thread);
0.060~25400 tooth/inch (inch thread).
The system alarms when R exceeds the above-mentioned range or the pitch exceeds
permissive value or is negative owing to R increases or decreases.
Note: It is the same as that of G32.

Example: First pitch of starting point: 4mm, increment 0.2mm per rev of spindle.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Use macro variables to simplify programming when G34 is used many times. 1 =
4mm,2 =4mm, total cutting depth 4mm, total cutting cycle 15 times; first tool infeed
0.8mm, gradual decreasing cutting every time 0.2mm, min. infeed 0.2mm.
ProgramO0010
G00 X60 Z4 M03 S500;
G65 H01 P#102 Q800;
G65 H01 P#103 Q0;
N10 G65 H02 P#104 Q#103 R1;
G65 H01 P#103 Q#104;
G65 H81 P30 Q#104 R15;
G00 U-10;
G65 H01 P#100 Q#102;
G00 U-#100;
G34 W-78 F3.8 J5 K2 R0.2;
G00 U10;
Z4;
G65 H03 P#101 Q#100 R200;
G65 H01 P#102 Q#101;
G65 H86 P20 Q#102 R200;
G65 H80 P10;
N20 G65 H01 P#102 R200;
G65 H80 P10;
N30 M30;
First tool infeed: assignment #102=0.8mm
Cycle count: assignment #103=0
Cycle count starting: #104=#103+1
#103=#104
Total cutting cycle times: #104=15,jump to block N30
Tool infeed to 50
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Cutting infeed: #100=#102

Tool infeed
Variable pitch cutting
Tool retraction
Z returns to starting point
Decreasing of cutting feed again: #101=#100-0.2
Assignment again #102=#101
Infeed: Jump to block N20 when #1020.2mm
Unconditionally jump to block N10
Min. infeed: #102=0.2
Unconditionally jump to block N10
Starting point of machining
Programming
3.21.4 Z thread cutting G33
Command formatG33 Z(W)__ F(I)__ L__
Command function: Tool path is from starting point to end point and then from end point
to starting point. The tool traverses one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev, the pitch
is consistent with pitch of tool and there is spiral grooving in internal hole of
workpiece and the internal machining can be completed one time.
Command specification: G33 is modal command;
Z(W): When Z or W is not input and starting point and end point of Z axis are the same
one, the thread cutting must not be executed;
F: Thread pitch, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: Teeth per inch thread 0.0625400 teeth/inch; its range is referred to Table 1-2. It is
single thread when L is omitted.
Cycle process:
Z tool infeed (start spindle before G33 is executed);
M05 signal outputs after Z reaches the specified end point in programming;
Test spindle after completely stopping;
Spindle rotation (CCW) signal outputs(reverse to the original rotation direction);
Z executes the tool retracts to starting point;
M05 signal outputs and the spindle stops;
Repeat the steps if multi threads are machined.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Example: Fig. 3-89, thread M101.5

Program:
O0011;
G00 Z90 X0 M03; Start spindle
G33 Z50 F1.5; Tap cycle
M03 Start spindle again
G00 X60 Z100; Machine continuously
M30
Note 1: Before tapping, define rotation direction of spindle according to tool rotating. The spindle
stops rotation after the tapping is completed and the spindle is started again when machining
thread continuously.
Note 2: G33 is for rigid tapping. The spindle decelerates to stop after its stop signal is valid, at the
moment, Z executes continuously infeeds along with the spindle rotating, and so the actual
cutting bottom hole is deeper than requirement and the length is defined by the spindle speed
and its brake in tapping.
Note 3: Z rapid traverse speed in tapping is defined by spindle speed and pitch is not relevant to
cutting feedrate override.
Note 4: In Single block to feed hold, the tapping cycle continuously executes not to stop until the
tool returns to starting point when the system displays Pause.
Note 5: The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stop or its
driver alarms.
3.21.5 Rigid tapping G84, G88
Command formatEnd face rigid tapping G84 X(U)__ C(H)__ Z(W)__ P__ F(I)__
K__M__
Side rigid tapping G88 Z(W)__ C(H)__ X(U)__ P__ F(I)__ K__ M__
Command explanations: modal G codes
G84: End face tapping cycle G code
G88: Side tapping cycle G code
(XC): Tapping hole position------G84
Z: Hole bottom position of tapping------G84
(ZC)Tapping hole position------G88
X: Hole bottom position of tapping hole------G88
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
P: Pause time (ms) when tapping to the hole bottom

F(I)Thread lead, FI> 0 right-hand tapping, FI< 0 left-hand tapping
K: Repetitive count of tapping. When the incremental programming is used to the tapping
hole position, the tapping is performed in the different hole position
M: Used to clamp the graduation spindle.
Rigid tapping method:
M29 S_ before G84/G88 is specified below
M29 S_
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) P_ F_ K_ M_
M29 S_ in the same block is commanded below
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M29 S_
Notes
1) For the above 2nd method, the machine zero return is executed before the spindle executes the
tapping, otherwise, the method cannot be used. In M29, CNC cannot select a spindle to execute
the tapping. The rigid tapping needs to be clamped when the spindle positioning is completed,
the method also cannot be used because M codes cannot be in the same block;
2) The axis movement command cannot be use between M29 and G84/G88;
3) M29 cannot be specified repetitively in rigid tapping;
4) In multiple spindle rigiding tapping, a spindle used to the rigid tapping must be selected before
M29, and it cannot be switched before the rigid tapping state is cancelled;
Operations is shown below:
Execution
explanations
Operation 1positioning to the hole positionstarting point of rigid tapping
Before starting operation 2, the system outputs M when it has M code used to clamp
the spindle;
Operation 2start the rigid tapping
Operation 3pause time P in rigid tapping in hole bottom;
Operation 4the rigid tapping returns to the hole bottomstarting point of rigid tapping;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
When the block for rigid tapping specifies M code used to clamp the spindle, M is
output.
Note: value is set in 170, 1, so, these corresponding M codes in PLC are executed.
Rigid tapping sequence
Taking example of G84 right-hand tapping, explain the creation, execution and
cancellation of rigid tapping.
Creation and execution of rigid tapping
The spindle rotation operation is defined that the rotary axis is switched to the position
control mode(i.e. send the position mode switch signal to the servo spindle), and the
system checks the position mode arrival signal of the servo spindle.
Rigid tapping cancellation
The cancellation methods of rigid tapping are shown below:
1 G80 cancels the rigid tapping mode;
2 G codes commands other cycles;
3 Other G codes in Group 01;
4 CNC resets.
The falling edge of F76.3 signal cancels the rigid tapping mode signal.
(a) RTCRG(1862) is set to 1 when:
The system executes directly the next block instead of waiting the rigid tapping mode
signal RGTAP<G610> to become 0.
Rigid tapping cancellation is shown below:
(b) RTCRG(1862) is set to 0 when:

Wait the rigid tapping mode signal RGTAP<G610> to become 0 and then execute the
next block. Rigid tapping cancellation is shown below:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Notes:
In rigid tapping, when the tapping direction is changedi.e. G84 and G88 are
switchedthe system specifies again the hole bottom position of the tapping, otherwise,
the unexpected result rises;
The rigid tapping G command is in Group 01, it is cancelled temporarily in the rigid
tapping state, and then is recovered it after the tapping is done;
The dry run function is disabled in rigid tapping;
In the rigid tapping, the machine lock function is valid; the tapping axis and the spindle
do not move when the machine lock function is enabled;
When the reset is executed in the rigid tapping, the rigid tapping state is released and
the spindle returns to the previous state before the rigid tapping;
In rigid tapping, when the tapping block is executed and the tapping returns, the feed
hold/single block run function is disabled temporarily till the tapping return completes;
In rigid tapping mode, the backlash compensation is performed to compensate the dry
run of the spindle rotation(CW, CCW). It is set in parameters (3334 or 180
182). The backlash compensation along the tapping axis is performed in general
method;
In multiple spindle tapping, the 1st spindle is used to the graduation and the 2nd to the
tapping.After the 1st spindle graduation is completed, the spindle must be clamped on the
machine and the machine clamping/releasing M code can be specified in the rigid tapping.
M code used to clamp the spindle is added in G84/G88, i.e. the system can output two
kinds of M code. M code used to clamp the spindle is set in the data parameter (170). M
code used to the releasing is the setting value +1 of 170;
Setting RTORIstate parameter 1867to 1 can execute the reference point return
of the spindle before the system starts the rigid tapping.
3.21.6 Thread cutting cycle G92
Command format: G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ F_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric straight thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ I_ J_ K_ L ; (Inch straight thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ R_ F_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ R_ I_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
Command function: Tool infeeds in radial(X) direction and cuts in axial(Z or X, Z)
direction from starting point of cutting to realize straight thread, taper thread cutting cycle
with constant thread pitch. Thread run-out in G92: at the fixed distance from end
point of thread cutting, Z executes thread interpolation and X retracts with
exponential or linear acceleration, and X retracts at rapidly traverse speed after
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Z reaches to end point of cutting as Fig. 3-44.

G92 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of thread interpolation;
End point of cutting: end position of thread interpolation;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
U: different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, unit:
mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, unit:
mm;
R: Different value(radius value) of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of
cutting.When the sign of R is not the same that of U, RU/2, unit: mm;
F: Thread lead, its range: 0 F 500 mm. After F value is executed, it is reserved and
can be omitted;
I: Thread teeth per inch, its range: 0.06tooth/inch25400tooth/inch , it is reserved and it
can be omitted not to input after I specified value is executed;
J: Movement in the short axis in thread run-out, its range 0~99999999 least input
increment , unit: mm/inch, without direction ( automatically define its direction according to
starting position of program), and it is modal parameter. If the short axis is X, its value is
specified by radius;
K: Movement in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999 least input
increment ,
unit: mm/inch, without direction ( automatically define its direction according to starting
position of program), and it is modal parameter. If the long axis is X, its value is specified
by radius;
L: Multi threads: 199 and it is modal parameter. (The system defaults it is single thread
when L is omitted).
Fig. 3-44
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-45
The system can machine one thread with many tool infeed in G92, but cannot do
continuous two thread and end face thread. Definition of thread pitch in G92 is the same
that of G32, and a pitch is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius)
when the spindle rotates one rev.
Pitch of taper thread is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius). When
absolute value of Z coordinate difference between B point and C point is more than that of
X (in radius), Z is long axis; and vice versa.
Cycle process: straight thread as Fig.3-44 and taper thread as Fig.3-45.
X traverses from starting point to cutting starting point;
Thread interpolates (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end
point;
X retracts the tool at the cutting feedrate (opposite direction to the above-mentioned
), and return to the position which X absolute coordinate and the starting point are
the same;
Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
Programming
Notes
Length of thread run-out is specified by 019 when J, K are omitted;
Length of thread run-out is K in the long direction and is specified by 019 when J is
omitted
Length of thread run-out is J=K when K is omitted;
There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, K=0;
Length of thread run-out is J=K when J0,K=0;
There is no thread run-out when J=0,K0;
After executing the feed hold in thread cutting, the system does not stop cutting until
the thread cutting is completed with Pause on screen;
After executing single block in thread cutting, the program run stops after the system
returns to starting point(one thread cutting cycle is completed);
They are executed as the positive values when J, K negative values are input;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stops or its
driver alarms.
Command path: relative position between thread cutting end point and starting point with
U, W, R and tool path and thread run-out direction with different U, W, R signs below:
Fig.3-46
ExampleFig.3-47
Fig.3-47
Program:
O0012;
M3 S300 G0 X150 Z50 T0101; (Thread tool)
G0 X65 Z5; (Rapid traverse)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G92 X58.7 Z-28 F3 J3 K1; (Machine thread with 4 times cutting, the first tool infeed
1.3mm)
X57.7 ; (The second tool infeed 1mm)
X57; (The third tool infeed 0.7mm)
X56.9; (The fourth tool infeed 0.1mm)
M30;
3.21.7 Multiple thread cutting cycle G76
Command format: G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q(dmin) R(d) ;
G76 X(U) Z(W) R(i) P(k) Q(d) F(I) ;
Command function: Machining thread with specified depth of thread (total cutting
depth)is completed by multiple roughing and finishing, if the defined angle of
thread is not 0, thread run-in path of roughing is from its top to bottom,
and angle of neighboring thread teeth is the defined angle of thread. G76
can be used for machining the straight and taper thread with thread
run-out path, which is contributed to thread cutting with single tool edge to
reduce the wear of tool and to improve the precision of machining thread.
But G76 cannot be used for machining the face thread. machining path is
shown in Fig. 3-48(a):
Starting point(end point): Position before block runs and behind blocks run, defined by
A point;
End point of thread(D point): End point of thread cutting defined by X(U) Z(W) .The tool
will not reach the point in cutting if there is the thread run-out path;
Starting point of thread: Its absolute coordinates is the same that of A point and the
different value of X absolute coordinates between C and D is i(thread taper with radius
value). The tool cannot reach C point in cutting when the defined angle of thread is not 0;
Reference point of thread cutting depth (B point) : Its absolute coordinates is the
same that of A point and the different value of X absolute coordinate between B and C is
k(thread taper with radius value).The cutting depth of thread at B point is 0 which is the
reference point used for counting each thread cutting depth by the system;
Thread cutting depth: It is the cutting depth for each thread cutting cycle. It is the
different value(radius value, without signs) of X absolute coordinate between B and
intersection of reversal extension line for each thread cutting path and straight line BC.
The cutting depth for each roughing is n d, n is the current roughing cycle times, d is
the thread cutting depth of first roughing;
Thread cutting amount: Different value between the current thread current depth and
the previous one:( n n 1 ) d;
End point of tool retraction: It is the end position of radial (X) tool retraction after the
thread cutting in each thread roughing, finishing cycle is completed, defining with E point;
Thread cut-in point: Bn (n is the cutting cycle times) is the actual thread cutting starting
point in each thread roughing cycle and finishing cycle, B1 is the first thread roughing
cutting-in point, Bf is the last thread roughing cut-in point, Be is the thread finishing
cutting-in point. Bn is X, Z replacement formula corresponding to B.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X: X absolute coordinate (unit: mm) of thread end point;

U: Different value (unit: mm) of X absolute coordinate between thread end point and
starting point;
Z: Z absolute coordinate (unit: mm) of thread end point;
W: Different value (unit: mm) of Z absolute coordinate between thread end point and
starting point;
P(m): Times of thread finishing: 0099 (unit: times). It is valid after m specified value is
executed, and the system parameter 057 value is rewritten to m. The value of system
parameter 057 is regarded as finishing times when m is not input. In thread finishing,
every feed cutting amount is equal to the cutting amount d in thread finishing dividing the
finishing times m;
P(r): Width of thread run-out 0099(unit: 0.1L,L is the thread pitch). It is valid after r
specified value is executed and the system parameter 019 value is rewritten to r. The
value of system parameter
019 is the width of thread run-out when r is not input. The thread run-out function can be
applied to
thread machining without tool retraction groove and the width of thread run-out defined by
system
parameter 019 is valid for G92, G76;
P(a): Angles at taper of neighboring two toothrange: 0099unitdeg(). It is valid after
a specified
value is executed and the system parameter 058 value is rewritten to a. The system
parameter
058 value is regarded as angle of thread tooth. The actual angle of thread in defined by
tool ones
and so a should be the same as the tool angle;
Q(dmin): Minimum cutting travel of thread roughing, range: 0 999999( IS-C)/ 0
99999( IS-B),(unit: least input increment, radius value). When ( n n 1 ) ddmin,
dmin
is regarded as the cutting travel of current roughing, i.e. depth of current thread cutting is
( n 1 d+dmin) . Setting dmin is to avoid the too small of roughing amount and
too many
roughing times caused by the cutting amount deceleration in thread roughing. After Q(
dmin) is
executed, the specified value dmin is valid and the system data parameter NO. 059
value is
rewritten to dmin (unit: 0.001). when Q(dmin) is not input, the system data parameter
NO.059
value is taken as the least cutting amount;
R(d): It is the cutting amount in thread finishing, range: 0099.999 (unit: mm/inch, radius
value
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
without sign symbols), the radius value is equal to X absolute coordinates between cut-in
point Be of
thread finishing and Bf of thread roughing. After R(d) is executed, the specified value d is
reserved
and the system parameter 060 value is rewritten to d1000(unit: 0.001 mm) . The value
of system
parameter 060 is regarded as the cutting travel of thread finishing when R(d) is not
input;
130
Programming
R(i): It is thread taper and is the different value of X absolute coordinate between thread
starting
point and end point, rang: -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C)
(unit:
mm/inch, radius value). The system defaults R(i)=0(straight thread) when R(i) is not input;
P(k): Depth of thread tooth, the total cutting depth of thread, range: 199999999(unit:
least input
increment, radius value, without sign symbols). The system alarms when P(k) is not input;
Q(d): Depth of the 1st thread cutting, range: 199999999 unit: least input increment,
radius
value, without sign symbols). The system alarms when d is not input;
F: metric thread pitch, its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: thread teeth per inch for inch thread, its range is referred to Table 1-2.
Jmovement amount (run-out amount) (unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the short axis
when
thread run-out; when the short axis is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple
parameter;
Kmovement amount (run-out amount) (unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the long axis
when
thread run-out; when the long axis is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple
parameter.
Note: J, K are not compiled in G76, its thread run-out method is the same that of the previous, i.e.
the thread
run-out is executed according to P or No.19; when J or, K, or J, K are compiled, the thread
run-out
method is the same those of G32, G92.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 3-48(a)
Cut-in method as follows: Fig. 3-48(b)
Programming
Fig. 3-48(b)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Pitch is defined to moving distance ( X radius value) of long axis when the spindle rotates
one rev.
Z is long when absolute value of coordinate difference between C point and D point in Z
direction is more than that of X direction ( radius value, be equal to absolute value of i);
and vice versa
Execution process:
The tool rapidly traverses to B1, and the thread cutting depth is d. The tool only
traverses in X direction when a=0; the tool traverses in X and Z direction and its
direction is the same that of AD when a0;
The tool cuts threads paralleling with CD to the intersection of DE (r0: thread
run-out);
The tool rapidly traverses to E point in X direction;
The tool rapidly traverses to A point in Z direction and the single roughing cycle is
completed;
The tool rapidly traverses again to tool infeed to Bn ( is the roughing times), the cutting
depth is the bigger value of ( n d) ,( n -1 d+dmin) , and execute if the
cutting depth is less than(k-d) ; if the cutting depth is more than or equal to(k-d) , the tool
infeeds(k-d) to Bf, and then execute to complete the last thread roughing;
The tool cuts threads paralleling with CD to the intersection of DE (r0: thread
run-out);
X axis rapidly traverses to E point;
Z axis traverses to A point and the thread roughing cycle is completed to execute the
finishing;
After the tool rapidly traverses to B(the cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is d),
execute the thread finishing, at last the tool returns to A point and so the thread finishing
cycle is completed;
If the finishing cycle time is less than m, execute to perform the finishing cycle, the
thread cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is 0; if the finishing cycle times are equal
to m, G76 compound thread machining cycle is completed.
Notes:
In thread cutting, execute the feed hold, the system displays Pause after the thread
cutting is executed completely, and then the program run pauses;
Execute single block in thread cutting, the program run stops after returning to starting
point(one thread cutting cycle is completed);
The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets and emergently stop or
the driver alarms;
Omit all or some of G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q(dmin) R(d) . The omitted address runs
according to setting value of parameters;
m, r, a used for one command address P are input one time. Program runs according
to setting value of 57, 19, 58 when m, r, a are all omitted; Setting value is a when
address P is input with 1 or 2 digits; setting values are r, a when address P is input with 3
or 4 digits;
The direction of ACDE is defined by signs of U,W , and the direction of CD is
defined by the sign of R(i) . There are four kinds of sign composition of U, W
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
corresponding to four kinds of machining path as Fig. 3-46.

Example: Fig. 3-49, thread M686.
Fig.3-49
Program:
O0013;
G50 X100 Z50 M3 S300; (Set workpiece coordinate system, start spindle
and specify spindle speed)
G00 X80 Z10; (Rapid traverse to starting point of machining)
G76 P020560 Q150 R0.1; (Finishing 2 times, chamfering width 0.5mm, tool
angle 60, min. cutting depth 0.15, finishing allowance 0.1)
G76 X60.64 Z-62 P3680 Q1800 F6; (Tooth height 3.68, the first cutting depth 1.8)
G00 X100 Z50 ; (Return to starting point of program)
3.22 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational
Speed Control G97

The detailed is referred to Section 2.2.3.
ming
3.23 Feedrate per Minute G98, Feedrate per Rev G99

Command format: G98 F_; (its range is referred to Section 1.6.5, the leading zero can be
omitted, feed rate per minute is specified, mm/min)
Command function: cutting feed rate is specified as mm/min, G98 is the modal G
command.G98 cannot be input if the current command is G98 modal.
Command format: G99 F_; (its range is referred to Section 1.6.5, the leading zero can be
omitted)
Command function: Cutting feed rate is specified as mm/min, G99 is the modal G
command.G99 input may be omitted if current state is G99. The actual cutting
feedrate is gotten by multiplying the F command value (mm/r) to the current spindle
speed(r/min). If the spindle speed varies, the actual feedrate changes too. If the spindle
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
cutting feed amount per rev is specified by G99 FXXXX , the even cutting texture on the
surface of workpiece will be gotten. In G99 state, a spindle encoder should be fixed
on the machine tool to machine the workpiece.
G98, G99 are the modal G commands in the same group and only one is valid. G98 is the
initial state G command and the system defaults G98 is valid when the system turns on.
Reduction formula of feed between per rev and per min:
Fm = FrS
Fm: feed per min (mm/min) ;
Fr: feed per rev (mm/r) ;
S: spindle speed (r/min) .
After the system turns on, the feedrate is ones set by 030 and F value is reserved after
F is executed. The feed rate is 0 after F0 is executed. F value is reserved when the
system resets and emergently stops. The feedrate override is reserved when the system
is turned off.
Note: In G99 modal, there is the uneven cutting feed rate when the spindle speed is lower than 1
r/min; there is the follow error in the actual cutting feed rate when there is the swing in the spindle
speed. To gain the high machining quality, it is recommended that the selected spindle speed
should be not lower than min. speed of spindle servo or converter.
Relative Parameter:
No.027: cutting speed upper limit value P
No.029: cutting feed and manual feed index Acc&Dec time
No.030: cutting feed start and end speed
3.25 Macro Commands

TAC-100XT provides the macro command which is similar to the high language, and can
realize the variable assignment, and subtract operation, logic decision and conditional
jump by user macro command, contributed to compiling part program for special
workpiece, reduce the fussy counting and simplify the user program.
gramming
3.25.1 MACRO variables
Presentation of macro variables
Present with # macro variables number.;
Format: # i(i=100,102,103,) ;
Example: #105, #109, #125.
Variable Type
The variable is divided into four types according to the variable number:
Number NO. Variable type Function
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Macro variables reference
1. Macro variables can replace command values

Format: Address+# i orAddress+# I. It shows the system takes variable
value or negative value of variable value as address value.
Example: F#103when #103=15, its function is the same that of F15;
Z-#110when #110=250, its function is the same that of Z-250;
2. Macro variables can replace macro variables values.
Format: +9+macro variables number
Example: if #100 = 205, #105 = 500,
The command function of X#9100 is the same as X500;
The command function of X-#9100 is the same as X-500
Note 1: The address O, G and N cannot refer macro variables. For example, O#100G#101N#120
are illegal;
Note 2: If macro variables values exceed the maximum rang of command values, they cannot be
used. For
example: #130 = 120, M#130 exceeds the maximum command value.
Variable display
Programming
(1) In macro window, the variable being displayed to the null means it is null, i.e. it is not
defined. The variable being displayed to ******** means it exceeds the displayable
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
range.
(2) The share variable (#100~#199, #500~#999) values are displayed in the macro
variable
window, and is also displayed the window, the data is input directly to value the share
variable.
(3) The local variable (#1~#33) and the system variable values are not displayed. Some
local variable or system variable value is displayed by assigned with the share variable.
System variable
1Input signal: #1000 --- #1047 (Read PMC input signal)

2Output signal #1100 --- #1147 (output to PMC signal)
3X length compensation #1500 --- #1531 (radius ,can read/write)
4Z length compensation #1600 --- #1631 (can read/write)
5Y length compensation #1700 --- #1731 (can read/write)
6Radius compensation #1800 --- #1831 (can read/write)
7X wear compensation #1900 --- #1931 (radius ,can read/write)
8Z wear compensation #2000 --- #2031 (can read/write)
9Y wear compensation #2100 --- #2131 (can read/write)
10Radius wear compensation #2200 --- #2231 (can read/write)
11Alarm #3000
12User data list table #3500 --- #3755 (read only)
13Modal info.#4000 --- #4030 (read only)
14position info #5001 --- #5030 (read only)
1Interface signal: CNC only executes G and F signals. Whether there are I/O to
correspond to it is defined by PLC.
Variable No. Function
(2) Tool compensation system variable:
(3) Machined workpiece number:

#3901 Machined workpiece number(completion)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(4) System modal information variable
(5) system variable of coordinate position information:
Note: The position listed in the above table separately corresponds orderly to X, Y, Z, 4 th, 5th axis.
For example:
#5001 meanings to be X position information, #5002 meanings to be Y position information, #5003
meanings to be Z position information and #5004 meanings to 4th position information and #5005
meanings to 5th position information.
6zero offset value and workpiece coordinate systems
G54#5206 #5210
G55#5211 #5215
G56#5216 #5220
G57#5221 #5225
G58#5226 #5230
G59#5231 #5235
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(7) address and local variable relationship
3.25.2 Operation and jump command G65

Command format:
G65 Hm P# i Q# j R# k;
m: operation or jump command, range 0199.
# I: macro variables name for storing values.
# j: macro variables name 1 for operation, can be constant.
# k: macro variables name 2 for operation, can be constant.
Command significance: # i = #j O # k
Example: P#100 Q#101 R#102..#100 = #101 O #102;
P#100 Q#101 R15.#100 = #101 O 15;
P#100 Q-100 R#102..#100 = -100 O #102;
Note: Macro variable name has no # when it is presented directly with constant.
Macro command list
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1 Operation commands
1) Assignment of macro variables: # I = # J
G65 H01 P#I Q#J
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(Example) G65 H01 P# 101 Q1005; (#101 = 1005)

G65 H01 P#101 Q#110; (#101 = #110)
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#102; (#101 = -#102)
2) Decimal add operation: # I = # J+# K
G65 H02 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15; (#101 = #102+15)amming
3) Decimal subtract operation: # I = # J# K
G65 H03 P#I Q#J R# K
(Example) G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102#103)
4) Decimal multiplication operation: # I = # J# K
G65 H04 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102#103)
5) Decimal division operation: # I = # J# K
G65 H05 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102#103)
6) Binary logic add(or) : # I = # J.OR. # K
G65 H11 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.OR. #103)
7) Binary logic multiply(and) : # I = # J.AND. # K
G65 H12 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example ) G65 H12 P# 201 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.AND.#103)
8) Binary executive or: # I = # J.XOR. # K
G65 H13 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.XOR. #103)
9) Decimal square root: # I = #J
G65 H21 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H21 P#101 Q#102 ; ( #101= #102 )
10) Decimal absolute value: # I = | # J |
G65 H22 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H22 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = | #102 |)
11) Decimal remainder: # I = # JTRUNC(#J/#K)# K,TRUNC: omit decimal fraction
G65 H23 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H23 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102- TRUNC (#102/#103)#103
12) Decimal converting into binary: # I = BIN (# J)
G65 H24 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H24 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = BIN(#102) )
13) Binary converting into decimal: # I = BCD (# J)
G65 H25 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H25 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = BCD(#102) )
14) Decimal multiplication/division operation: # I =(# I# J) # K
G65 H26 P#I Q#J R# k
(Example) G65 H26 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =(# 101# 102) #103)
15) Compound square root: # I = # J 2 +#K 2

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
G65 H27 P#I Q#J R#K

(Example) G65 H27 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =
#1022 +#1032 )
16) Sine: # I = # JSIN(# K) (Unit: )
G65 H31 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H31 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102SIN(#103) )
17) Cosine: # I = # JCOS(# K) (Unit: )
(Example) G65 H32 P#1Q#102 R#103; (#101 =#102COS(#103) )gramming
18) Tangent: # I = # JTAM(# K) (Unit: )
G65 H33 P#I Q#J R# K
(Example) G65 H33 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102TAM(#103) )
19) Cosine: # I = ATAN(# J /# K) (Unit: )
(Example) G65 H34 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =ATAN(#102/#103) )
2 Jump commands
1) Unconditional jump
G65 H80 Pn; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H80 P120; (jump to N120)
2) Conditional jump 1 #J.EQ.# K ( = )
G65 H81 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H81 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101= #102 and executes in order when #101 #102.
3) Conditional jump 2 #J.NE.# K ( )
(Example) G65 H82 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 #102 and executes in order when #101 = #102.
4) Conditional jump 3 #J.GT.# K ( )
(Example) G65 H83 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 #202 and executes in order when #101
#102.
5) Conditional jump 4 #J.LT.# K ( )
(Example) G65 H84 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101#102 and executes in order when #101#102.
6) Conditional jump 5 #J.GE.# K ( )
(Example) G65 H85 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 #1 and executes in order when #101 #102.
7) Conditional jump 6 #J.LE.# K ( )
(Example) G65 H86 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
8) P/S alarm
G65 H99 Pi; i: alarm number +500
(Example) G65 H99 P15;
P/S alarm 515.
Note: Block number can be specified by variables. Such as: G65 H81 P#100 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps to block that its block number is specified by #100.
3.25.3 Program example with macro command
Differences between user macro program call (G65, G66) and subprogram call (M98) are
as follows:
1. G65, G66 can specify the argument data and send them to macro program and M98
has no such function.
2. G65, G66 can change the level of local variable and M98 has no such function.
3. G65, G66 only follows N and only P or H follows them.
3.25.3.1 Non-modal call G65

Command format: G65 P_ L_ <argument>_;
Macro program specified by P is called, the argument (data) is send to the user macro
program body.
Command explanation:
P called macro program number
L called times (it is 1 when it is omitted, it can be the repetitive times from 1 to
9999)
<argument> data sent to macro program is valued with the corresponding local
variable.
Nest call: G65 call has four-level nest.
Main program macro program (1st level) macro program (2nd level) macro program (3rd level) macro program (4th level)
Argument address and corresponding variable No. table in method 1

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Note: The addresses which are not needed to specify can be omitted, the corresponding local
variable of the omitted address is valued by <null>.
Method II: use A, B, C and li, Ji, Ki (I is 1~10), the used letter and executed times(I, J, K)
automatically decides the corresponding variable number of argument. The argument in
the method specifies A, B, C one time for each and I, J, K up to 10 times ( 10 times
replacing the more).
Programming
Argument address and corresponding variable No. table in method II
Note 1: The subscripts of I, J, K are used to confirming the specified sequence of argument, and
are not written in the actual programming.
Note 2: The system can identify the variable number according to the present sequence and
times of I, J, K in the method.
If the block has: G65 P9010 A1 B2 C3 I14 J15 I6 J7 K9 K11 K12 J30;
Call program O9010, transfer the argument A1 to the local variable, and their
corresponding relationship as follows:
#1=1#2=2#3=3#4=14#5=15#7=6#8=7#6=9#9=11#12=12#11=30
The specified method I, II compound of argument: CNC can automatically identifies the
specified method I and II of the argument. When the two methods are specified together,
the later specifies is valid.
Argument specifying mode I, II compound:
CNC internal can automatically identify the argument specifying mode I and II. When the
two modes are specified, the later specified is valid.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming
3.27 Metric/Inch Switch

Command format: G20; (inch input)
G21; (metric input)
Explanation: input/output unit of CNC system is divided into two, i.e., metric unit: mm and
inch unit:
inch.Input unit of modifying the system has also:
Modifying BIT0 (metric/inch): 0: metric input 1: inch input
No. 001# completely corresponds to G20/G21, namely, the parameter also changes
when G20/G21 is executed; G20/G21 mode also changes when the parameter is
modified, and the alarm prompt occurs after modification. Parameters relevant to
metric/inch are referred to Installation & Connection, Section 3.2.17.
Notes
No.0010(INI) input increment unit change
After the input increment unit is changed (inch/metric input), the following unit system
is
changed: (i.e.: mm<>inch; mm/min<>inch/min):
F specifies the feedrate (mm/min<>inch/min), thread lead (mm <>inch)
position command (mm<>inch)
tool compensation value (mm<>inch)
MPG graduation unit (mm<>inch)
movement distance in incremental feed (mm<>inch)
some data parameters, including NO.49~NO.54, NO.56, NO.59, NO.60, NO.114~
NO.116,
NO.120~ NO.127, NO.140, No.141, No.154; the unit is 0.001mm(IS-B) in the metric input
system, is 0.0001inch(IS-B) in the inch input system. For example, the same parameter
NO.49 setting value is 100m, it means to be 0.1mm in the metric input system (G21), and
it means 0.01inch in the inch input system (G20).
The machine coordinates will automatically switch after the input increment unit
change is switched:
No.0040(SCW) output command unit change
SCW=0: the system minimal command increment uses the metric output (0.001mm)
SCW=1: the system minimal command increment uses the inch output (0.0001inch)
Some data parameter meanings will be changed when the output control bit parameter
SCW is changed:
Speed parameter:
Metric machine: mm/min
Inch machine: 0.1 inch/min
Example: when the speed is set to 3800, the metric machine is 3800 mm/min and the
inch machine is 380 inch/min.
Speed parameters: No.22, No.23, No.27, No.28~No.31, No.32, No.33, No.41, No.107,
No.113;
Position(length) parameter
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
metric machine: 0.001 mm

inch machine: 0.0001 inch
When the setting is 100, the metric machine is 0.1mm and the inch machine is 0.01
inch.
Position parameters: No.34, No.35, No.37~No.40, No.45~No.48, No.102~No.104 and
all pitch error compensation parameter;
Note 1: When the minimal input increment unit and the minimal command unit are different, the
maximal error
is the half of minimal command unit. The error cannot be accumulated.
Note 2: The current system increment is IS-B in the above explanation.
Programming
CHAPTER 4
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41, G42)
4.1 Application
4.1.1 Overview
Part program is compiled generally for one point of tool according to a workpiece contour.
The point is generally regarded as the tool nose A point in an imaginary state (there is no
imaginary tool nose point in fact and the tool nose radius can be omitted when using the
imaginary tool nose point to program) or as the center point of tool nose arc ( as Fig. 4-1).
Its nose of turning tool is not the imaginary point but one arc owing to the processing and
other requirement in the practical machining.
There is an error between the actual cutting point and the desired cutting point, which will
cause the over- or under-cutting affecting the part precision. So a tool nose radius
compensation is needed in machining to improve the part precision.
Fig. 4-1 Tool

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4.1.2 Imaginary tool nose direction

Suppose that it is generally difficult to set the tool nose radius center on the initial position
as Fig.4-3; suppose that it is easily set the tool nose on it as Fig. 4-4; The tool nose radius
can be omitted in programming. Fig. 4-5 and Fig.4-6 correspond separately to the tool
paths of tool nose center programming and imaginary tool nose programming when tool
nose radius is executed or not.
Programming
Tool path is shown in Fig.4-5 when the tool nose center programming is executed.
Fig. 4-5-1 the tool nose center path is the same that of programmed path without radius
compensation
Fig. 4-5-2 precise cutting with tool radius compensation
The tool path is shown in Fig. 4-6 when imaginary tool nose programming is executed
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
The tool is supposed to one point in programming but the actual cutting blade is not one
ideal point owing to machining technology. Because the cutting blade is not one point but
one circular,
machining error is caused which can be deleted by tool nose circular radius compensation.
In actual machining, suppose that there are different position relationship between tool
nose point and tool nose circular center point, and so it must create correct its direction of
imaginary tool nose.
From tool nose center to imaginary tool nose, set imaginary tool nose numbers according
to tool direction in cutting. Suppose there are 10 kinds of tool nose setting and 9 directions
for position relationship. The tool nose directions are different in different coordinate
system (rear tool post coordinate system and front tool post coordinate system) even if
they are the same tool nose direction numbers as the following figures. In figures, it
represents relationships between tool nose and starting point, and end point of arrowhead
is the imaginary tool nose; T1T8 in rear tool post coordinate system is as Fig. 4-7; T1
T8 in front tool post coordinate system is as Fig. 4-8.
The tool nose center and starting point for T0 and T9 are shown in Fig. 4-9.
Programming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-7 Imaginary tool nose number in rear tool post coordinate system
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-8 Imaginary tool nose number in front tool post coordinate system
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-9 Tool nose center on starting point

4.1.3 Compensation value setting
Preset imaginary tool nose number and tool nose radius value for each tool before
executing tool nose radius compensation. Set the tool nose radius compensation value in
OFFSET window (as Fig. 4-1), R is tool nose radius compensation value and T is
imaginary tool nose number.
Table 4-1 CNC tool nose radius compensation value display window
Note: X tool offset value can be specified in diameter or radius, set by No.004 Bit4 ORC, offset
value is in radius when ORC=1 and is in diameter when ORC=0.
In toolsetting, the tool nose is also imaginary tool nose point of Tn (n=0~9) when taking
Tn(n=0~9) as imaginary tool nose. For the same tool, offset value from standard point to
tool nose radius center (imaginary tool nose is T3) is different with that of ones from
standard point to imaginary
tool nose(imaginary tool nose is T3) when T0 and T3 tool nose points are selected to
toolsetting in rear tool post coordinate system, taking tool post center as standard point. It
is easier to measure distances from the standard point to the tool nose radius center than
from the standard point to the imaginary tool nose, and so set the tool offset value by
measuring distance from the standard point to the imaginary tool nose
(tool nose direction of T3).
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-10 Tool offset value of tool post center as benchmark

4.1.4 Command format
4.1.5 Compensation direction

Specify its direction according to relative position between tool nose and workpiece when
executing tool nose radius compensation is shown in Fig. 4-11 and Fig.4-12.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-11 Compensation direction of rear coordinate system

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4.1.6 Notes
The system is in tool nose radius compensation mode at initial state, and starts to
create tool nose radius compensation offset mode when executing G41 or G42. When the
system starts to execute compensation, it pre-read two blocks, and the next block is
saved to storage for tool nose radius compensation when executing one of them. The
system reads two blocks in
Single mode and stops after executing end point of the first block.
In tool nose radius compensation mode, the tool nose center moves to end point of
previous block and is vertical to its path when the system executes two block or more than
blocks without motion Command.
The system cannot create and cancel tool nose radius compensation.
Tool nose radius R is without negative value, otherwise there is a mistake running path.
Tool nose radius compensation is created and cancelled in G00 or G01 instead of G02
or G03,otherwise, the system alarms.
The system cancels the tool nose radius compensation mode when pressing RESET
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
key.
G40 must be specified to cancel offset mode before the program is ended, otherwise
the tool path offsets one tool nose radius.
The system executes the tool nose radius compensation in main program and
subprogram but must cancel it before calling subprogram and then create it again in the
subprogram.
The system does not execute the tool nose radius compensation in G71, G72, G73,
G74, G75,G76 and cancel it temporarily.
The system executes the tool nose radius compensation in G90, G94, it offsets one tool
nose radius for G41 or G42.
4.1.7 Application
Machine a workpiece in the front tool post coordinate system as Fig. 4-13. Tool number:
T0101, tool nose radius R=2, imaginary tool nose number T=3.
For toolsetting in Offset Cancel mode, after toolsetting, Z axis offsets one tool nose radius
and its direction is relative to that of imaginary tool nose and toolsetting point, otherwise
the system excessively cuts tool nose radius when it starts to cut.
Set the tool nose radius R and imaginary tool nose direction in TOOL OFFSET&WEAR
window as following:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Program:
G00 X100 Z50 M3 T0101 S600; (Position, start spindle, tool change and execute
tool compensation)
G42 G00 X0 Z3; (Set tool nose radius compensation)
G01 Z0 F300; (Start cutting)
X16;
Z-14 F200;
G02 X28 W-6 R6;
G01 W-7;
X32;
Z-35;
G40 G00 X90 Z40; (Cancel tool nose radius compensation)
G00 X100 Z50 T0100;
M30;
4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path

4.2.1 Inner and outer side
Inside is defined that an angle at intersection of two motion blocks is more than or equal
to 180;
Outside is 0~180.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3 steps to execute tool nose radius compensation: tool compensation creation, tool
compensation execution and tool compensation canceling.
Tool traverse is called tool compensation creation (starting tool) from offset canceling to
G41 or G42 execution.
Note: Meanings of S, L, C in the following figures are as follows: SStop point of single block;
Llinear; Ccircular.
Note: Tool movement path is marked with the tool nose direction 0 in the following figures.
Note: Tool path is described in rear tool post coordinate system and tool compensation direction
G41 in the following figures.
Programming
4.2.2 Tool traversing when starting tool
(a) Tool traversing inside along corner(180)
(b) Tool traversing inside along corner(18090)

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(c) Tool traversing inside along corner (90)
(d) Tool traversing outside along corner , linear linear ( angle set by No. 237)
Programming
4.2.3 Tool traversing in Offset mode
Offset mode is called to ones after creating tool nose radius compensation and before
canceling it.
Offset path without changing compensation direction in compensation mode
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(b) Tool traversing outside along corner(18090)

1Linear linear 2) 2Linearcircular
(c) Tool traversing outside along corner(90)

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(d) Special cutting

1) Without intersection
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Offset path of changing compensation direction in compensation mode

The compensation direction can be changed in compensation mode in special cutting.
There is no inside and outside cutting when the system changes the compensation
direction. The following are the path of tool running when the compensation changes are
changed:
1Linearlinear 2Linearcircular
5) No intersection when compensation is executed normally

When the system executes G41 and G42 to change the offset direction between block A
and B, a vector perpendicular to block B is created from its starting point.
i ) Linear----Linear
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-15a Linearlinear, no intersectionchanging compensation direction

ii ) Linear ---circular
Fig. 4-15b Linearcircular without intersection changing compensation direction

iii ) Circular-----circular
Fig. 4-15c Circularcircular without intersection (changing compensation direction)

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4.2.4 Tool traversing in Offset canceling mode

In compensation mode, when the system executes a block with one of the followings, it
enters compensation canceling mode, which is defined to compensation canceling of
block.
1. Execute G40 in a program;
2. Execute M30.
The system cannot execute G02 and G03 when canceling C tool compensation (tool nose
radius compensation), otherwise the system alarms and stops run.
In compensation canceling mode, the system executes the block and ones in the register
for tool nose radius compensation. At the moment, the run stops after one block is
executed when single block is ON. The system executes the next one but does not read
its following one when pressing
CYCLE START button again.
1Linearlinear 2Circularlinear
(b) Tool traversing outside along corner(18090)

(c) Tool traversing outside along corner(90)

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4.2.5 Tool interference check

Interference is defined that the tool cuts workpiece excessively and it can find out
excessive cutting in advance, the interference check is executed even if the excessive
cutting is not created, but the system cannot find out all tool interferences.
(1) Fundamental conditions
1) The tool path direction is different that of program path (angle is 90~270).
2) There is a big difference (180) for two angles between starting point and end point of
tool nose center path, and between starting point and end point of program path.
Example: linear machining
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(2) Executing it without actual interference

1) Concave groove less than compensation value
Fig. 4-17 Executing interference (1)

Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without
interference, the tools stops and the system alarms.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2) Concave channel less than compensation value
Programm
Fig. 4-18 Executing interference (2)
Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without
interference,the tools stops and the system alarms.
4.2.6 Commands for canceling compensation vector temporarily
In compensation mode, the compensation vector is cancelled temporarily in G50,
G71~G76 and is automatically resumed after executing the commands. At the moment,
the compensation is cancelled temporarily and the tool directly moves from intersection to
a point for canceling compensation vector. The tool directly moves again to the
intersection after the compensation mode is resumed.
Setting coordinate system in G50
Fig. 4-19 Temporary compensation vector in G50

Note: SS indicates a point at which the tool stops twice in Single mode.
Reference point automatic return G28
In compensation mode, the compensation is cancelled in a middle point and is
automatically resumed after executing the reference point return in G28.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 4-20 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in G28

G71G75 compound cycle; G76, G92 thread cutting
When executing G71G76 , G96 thread cutting, the system does not execute the tool
nose radius compensation and cancel it temporarily, and there is G00, G01,in the
following blocks, and the system automatically recovers the compensation mode.
G32, G33,G34 thread cutting
They cannot run in the tool nose radius compensation mode, otherwise, No.131 alarm
occurs
CANNOT USED TO C COMPENSATION.
Fig. 4-21 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in G71G76

G32, G33, G34 constant thread cutting
They cannot be executed in tool nose radius compensation mode, otherwise, No. 131
alarm occurs the command cannot be used in C compensation mode.
G90, G94 (taking an example of G42)
Compensation method of tool nose radius compensation in G90 or G94:
A. Cancel the previous tool nose radius compensation;
B. Create the previous C compensation before cutting, and the path in the following
figure creates the previous radius compensation mode;
C. The paths 2, 3 in the following figure are the radius compensation cutting;
D. The path 4 in the following figure can cancel the radius compensation, and the tool
returns to the cycle starting point; there is G00,G01 in the following block, and the CNC
automatically recovers the compensation mode.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Programming
Operation
Operation Operation
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY

INTERFACE
1.1 Panel Division

TAC-100XT,TAC-1002T-V CNC system uses an integrated panel, which is divided as
follows:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
1.1.1 State indication
Indicator for axis zero return completion

Three-color light
1.1.2 Display Submenu
Menu Remark
To enter Position interface including RELATIVE POS, ABSOLUTE
POS, POS &
PRG, INTEGRATED POS page.
ABSOLUTE POS page can display the current absolute
coordinates, clear
out machining count, machining time;
POS & PRG page can display current coordinate information
and current run
program;
RELATIVE POS page can display current relative coordinates,
clear relative
coordinates;
INTEGRATED POS can display current coordinate information
and clear
machine coordinates
To enter Program interface including program content, program list,
program state page
Edit/search current open programs in program content page;
Edit MDI programs, display coordinates, override and modal
state in MDI page;
Display, preview, open, copy machining programs in CNC in
local catalog page;
Display, preview, open and copy machining programs in U disk
in U disk catalog page
Enter tool offset interface including offset setting, macro variables,
workpiece coordinate system and tool life page
Set/search tool offset value and wear value in tool offset setting
page;
Set/search CNC macro variables in macro variable page;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Set/search G54G59 coordinate system and zero offset value

in workpiece coordinate system page;
Set/search use information of current tool life
Enter alarm interface including alarm information, alarm log page
Search CNC alarm, CNC warning, PLC alarm, PLC warning in
alarm information page;
Display alarm/warning history record in alarm log page
Enter Setting interface including CNC setting, system clock, file
management page
Set switch, level and parameters in CNC setting page;
Set system clock, data in system clock page;
Search/management files in CNC/U disk, copy/resume files in
file management page
Enter Parameter interface including state parameters, data
parameter, often used parameters and pitch compensation page.
Search/set state parameters in the state parameter page;
Search/set data parameters in the data parameter page;
Search/set users customized parameters in the often used
parameter page;
Search/set pitch error compensation data of each axis in the
pitch compensation page.
Enter Diagnosis interface including the system diagnosis, system
information page
Search the current diagnosis information of the CNC in the
diagnosis page.
Search the product information, ladder information and ladder
state.
PLC page includes three subpages: PLC state, PLC monitor, PLC
data.
PLC state page can search states of X, Y, F, G, R, A, C,T;
PLC monitor page can monitors the execution state of current
ladder on-line;
PLC data page can search/set K, D, DT, DC value.
1.1.4 Machine panel

The key functions on MST-2000 machine panel are defined by PLC program (ladder), the
detailed function meanings are referred to machine manufacturer manual.
The functions of this MST-2000 machine panel keys defined by standard PLC program
are as follows:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
1.2 Summary of Operation Mode

There are 8 modes inTAC-1002T, which are Edit, Auto, MDI, Machine zero, Step/MPG,
Manual,Program Zero, and MPG trial-cut modes.
Edit mode
In this mode, the operation of part program setup, deletion and alteration can be
performed.
Auto mode
In this mode, the program is executed automatically.
MDI mode
In this mode, the operation of parameter input, command blocks input and execution can
be performed.
Machine zero mode
In this mode, the operation of X, Z machine zero return can be performed separately.
MPG / Step mode
In the Step/MPG feed mode, the moving is performed by an increment selected by CNC
system.
Manual mode
In this mode, the operation of Manual feed, Manual Rapid, feedrate override adjustment,
Rapid override adjustment and spindle ON/OFF, cooling ON/OFF, Lubricating ON/OFF,
spindle jog,manual tool change can be performed.
Program zero return mode
In this mode, the operation of X, Z program zero return can be performed separately.
MDP trail-cut mode
In this mode, rotating the MPG can control programs execution speed, which can check
whether the machining program is correct.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1.3 Display Interface

The chapter introduces page switch, relationship between operation input and soft key,
and concrete operation methods.
TAC-100XT has 9 function keys including POS, PRG, SET, etc. on its edit keyboard. Each
function key corresponds to one interface which has many pages and operation soft keys,
which are shown below:
1.3.1 POS interface
Press to enter POS interface which includes pages and , and these
pages can be viewed by corresponding soft function key or repetitively press .
1) ABSOLUTE POS display interface

The X, Z coordinates displayed are the absolute position of the tool in current workpiece
coordinate system, these coordinates are memorized as power is down and the
workpiece coordinate system is specified by G50.
Basic information in POSITION interface (taking an example of the above figure):

G code : information of each G code;
M : last executed M code;
S :it is input spindle speed when analog spindle is executed, and input spindles gear
when the spindle is executed;
L : call times of subprogram;
F :the first half (0.0000mm/min) is the actual speed, and the second half (200mm/min)
is the command speed;
JOG F.( JOG speed): theory speed value of current override in JOG mode;
FED OVRI(Feedrate override):override selected by feedrate override switch;
RAD OVRI (Rapid override): display currently rapid override;
SPI OVRI (Spindle override): display the spindle override when NO.001 Bit1 is set to 1;
PART CNT(Part counting) : part counting adds 1 when M30 (M99 in the main program)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
is executed;
CUT TIME: the system counts the time when the automatic run is started, time unit is
hour,minute and second in order.
The part counting and cut time are memorized at power-down, the clearing ways for them
are shown below:
Method 1 Operation
Press and the following interface appears:
At the moment, press to clear part count, press to clear the cut time;
Method 2
Directly press to enter the absolute coordinate page, at the moment, press +
to clear part counting, simultaneously press + to clear the cut time.
2) RELATIVE POS display interface
Displayed U, W coordinates are the current position relative to the relative reference point,
and they are held on when power on. They can be cleared at any time. When No.005
Bit1=1, and the absolute coordinates are set by G50, the relative coordinates are set
simultaneously.Clearing U, W:
Method 1: Operation
Press and the following page appears:
At the moment, press to clear U value, and press to clear W value;
Method 2
Switch to the relative coordinate page, at the moment, press . Press to clear U
value when the big character U flashes in the page. Method of clearing W value is the
same those of clearing U value;
Note: Clearing method is the same when many axes are enabled.
3) INTEGRATED POS display interface
Clearing method of absolute coordinates are shown below:
Method 1 Operation
Press and the following page is shown:
At the moment, press to clear X coordinate value, and press to clear Z coordinate value;
Method 2
Switch to the integrated coordinate page, simultaneously press + to clear X
machine coordinate value; meanwhile, press + to clear Z machine coordinate value.
Note 1: Clearing method is the same when many axes are enabled.
Note 2: Clearing operation is enabled only when each axis has no machine zero (No.0014 bit0
bit4 is set to 0) .
4) POS&PRG display interface
In POS&PRG interface, it displays ABSOLUTE, RELATIVE coordinate of the current
position (ABSOLUTE, DIST TO GO of current position and machine coordinates will be
displayed when No.180 BIT0 is set to 1) as well as 7 blocks of current program together.
During the program execution, the displayed blocks are refreshed dynamically and the
cursor is located in the block being executed.
peration
1.3.2 PRG interface
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Press to enter PRG interface, which includes. Press repetitively PRG keys to switch
interfaces.
O
1) PRG page
In the page, the program content including current block can be displayed. Press
and the program content can be viewed forward or backward by

pressing or key.
2) Program status interface

In MDI mode, the page can be displayed, and is value when the corresponding soft
function key is pressed as follows:
3) Local directory page
Press to enter the local program page as follows: Operation
Press to enter the next menu as follows:
4) U disk directory page
Press to enter U disk directory page as follows:
Press to enter the next menu as follows:
1.3.3 TOOL OFFSET Interface

Press to enter the TOOL OFFSET interface which includes , ,
, (it enters the interface when No. 002 Bit0 is set to 1). Press repetitively or corresponding
keys to switch pages. The interface is shown below: .
1 TOOL OFFSET&WEAR interface
There are 5 pages and 33 offset & wear No. (No.000No.032) available for user in the
interface,which can be shown as follows by pressing or key.
When the valid axis number is more than 2, pressing or can display the tool offset &
wear pages of other three axes, which is shown below.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Note: The axis names of Y, the 4th, the 5th axis is defined by No.225.
2 MACRO interface
There are 25 pages in this interface, which can be shown by pressing or key. In
Macro window there are 600 (No.100No.199 and No.500No.999) macro variables
which can be specified by macro command or set directly by keypad. The public variable
page is shown below:eration
The local variable page is shown below:
The system variable page is shown below:
Operation
Note: The local variable and the system local are specified by macro codes instead of directly set
by the
keyboard in the page.
3 Workpiec coordinate system setting
4 Tool life management
Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface
193
Operation
1.3.4 ALARM interface

1) Alarm:
Press key to enter alarm interface including , which can be
switched by pressing repetitively , or the corresponding soft function. The alarm interface
is
shown below:
1 Alarm information page
Note: Alarm clearing: It can clear alarms by pressing .
194
Operation
2 Alarm log page
1.3.5 Setting interface

Press to enter the SETTING interface including
which can be switched by pressing repetitively or corresponding soft keys. The interface is
shown below:
Note 1: *1, *2 soft function menus are displayed but *3 is not done when the cursor is in the
switch setting
column in page; *1, *2 soft function menus are not displayed but *3 is done when the cursor
is in the privilege setting or parameter setting column;
Note 2: *4 soft function menu is displayed to (Copy to U disk) when the cursor is in CNC directory
in
page; it is displayed to (Copy to CNC) when the cursor is in U disk directory;
Note 3: *5 soft function menu is displayed to (Select) when the system enters into page and the
item where the cursor is has not selected; it is displayed when the item has selected.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

195
Operation
1) CNC setting page
2) System clock page
3) Document management page
196
Operation
1.3.6 PARAMETER Interfaces

Press to enters PARAMETER interface including pages , ,
, which can be switched by pressing repetitively or the corresponding
soft keys. The interface is shown below:
1) Bit parameter page
197
Operation
2) Data parameter page
3) Common used parameter page
198
Operation
4) Pitch compensation parameter page
1.3.7 Diagnosis Interface

Press to enter diagnosis interface including pages which can be
switched by pressing repetitively or the corresponding soft keys. The interface is shown
below:
1) System diagnosis page

199
Operation
The page is used to detect CNC interface signal and its inner run state. Please refer to
INSTALLATION, Section 5.1.
2) System information page
1.3.8 Graph Interface

Press to enter GRAPH interface. The interface is shown below:
200
Operation
Graph page is shown below:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1.3.9 Ladder Interface

Press to enter LADDER interface including pages , , ,
which can be switched by pressing repetitively or corresponding soft keys. The
interface is shown below:
201
Operation
1) PLC I/O state page
The page can display PLC I/o state information.
2) Ladder monitor page
202
Operation
The monitor page can view states of current contact, coil ON/OFF state, values of timer
and
counter. They are displayed with a green background when they are ON, otherwise, they
are the
same those of the page background. means the contact X0.5 is ON, means Y25.2 is
OFF.
1. page program view
In MONITOR page, the system can monitor simultaneously three windows, the ladder
blocks
corresponded to each window can be viewed by separately pressing , ,
, at the moment, the ladder corresponded to the selected block is displayed on the
screen.
2. Window block selection
1Select the window which needs to select blocks, press respectively , ,
to select the windows.
2Press to select the window program. At the moment, the display page is shown
below:
203
Operation
3Move the cursor to select the ladder block for display.
4Press , and then return the previous menu, press to cancel the
selection operation to return to the previous menu.
3. Find parameters, commands and network
1Select the required block window for finding commands, parameters and network,
make the
corresponding block display in the window, and find the command, parameters and
network
in the window.
2 Respectively press to find the corresponding
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
parameter, functional command and network in the current displayed block, and move the
cursor to the corresponding position.
3Press , to locate the cursor to the home or end of the current block.
3) PLC data page
PLC data includes K, D, DT, DC, which can be set in the page.
204
Operation
4) File list page
The ladder file list page displays all ladders and their relevant information included in the
current
system, and the new ladder can run in the page. The program name marked with is the
current
running ladder.
Note: The file list page is displayed when the above 2-level privilege is executed.
Chapter 2 Power ON/OFF And Protection
205
Operation
CHAPTER 2 POWER ON/OFF AND PROTECTION
2.1 System Power-on

BeforeTAC-1002T power on, the following items should be confirmed:
1. The machine is in a normal state.
2. The power voltage conforms to the requirement of the machine.
3. The connection is correct and secure.
The following window is displayed afterTAC-1002T is turned on:
The current position (ABSOLUTE POS) page is displayed afterTAC-1002T automatic
detection
and initiation are finished.
2.2 System Power-off

Before power is off, ensure that:
1. The feed axes of the CNC is at stop;
2. Miscellaneous functions (spindle, cooling etc.) are OFF;
3. Cut off CNC power prior to machine power cutting off.
Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturers manual about turn-off the machines power
supply.
206
Operation
2.3 Overtravel Protection

Overtravel protection should be used to prevent machine from being damaged due to the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
overtravel of X, Y, or Z.
2.3.1 Hardware overtravel protection

The stroke switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum travel of the machine
X, Z, Y
axis respectively, they are connected by the following figure. And the BIT3 of bit
parameter No.172
must be set to 0. If the overtravel occurs, the stroke switch acts to makeTAC-1002T stop,
and the
emergency alarm is issued.
When the hardware overtravel occurs, there will be an emergency stop alarm
inTAC-1002T.
The steps to eliminate this alarm are: press the OVERTRAVEL button to switch to the
ALARM page,
view the alarm message, and reset the alarm and move the table reversely to detach the
stroke
switch (for positive overtravel, move negatively; vice versa) .
2.3.2 Software Overtravel Protection

When the Bit4 of bit parameter No.172 is set to 0, the software limit is active.
1. X, Z axis
The software strokes are set by data parameter No.045, No.046, they refer to the machine
coordinates. As follows figure shows, X, Z are the machine coordinate system axes;
No.045 is for X
axis positive and negative strokes, No.046 is for Z axis positive and negative strokes,
within the
broken line is the software stroke scope.
If the machine position (coordinate) exceeds the area within broken line, overtravel alarm
will be
issued. The steps to eliminate this alarm are: press the overtravel alarm release key to
clear the
Chapter 2 Power ON/OFF And Protection
207
Operation
alarm, then moves reversely (for positive overtravel, move out negatively; vice versa).
2. Additional axis
The stroke range setting is the same that of the basic axis. When the additional axis is
enabled,
No. 045, No.046 displays stroke range parameter of the corresponding additional axis.
2.4 Emergency Operation

During the machining, some unexpected incidents may occur because of the user
programming,
operation and product fault etc. So theTAC-1002T should be stopped immediately for
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
these
incidents. This section mainly describes the resolutions that the system is capable of
under the
emergency situation. Please see the relative explanation on these resolutions under the
emergency
by machine manufacturer.
2.4.1 Reset
Press key to resetTAC-1002T system when there are abnormal output and axis
operations:
1 All axes motion stops;
2 M, S function output is inactive (the parameter sets whether the system automatically
cuts off
signals of spindle rotation, lubricating, cooling by pressing key, defined by PLC
ladder);
3 Automatic run ends, modal function and state remain.
2.4.2 Emergency stop

During machine running, if the emergency button is pressed under the dangerous or
emergent
situation (external SP signal active), the CNC system enters into emergency status and
the machine
movement is stopped immediately. All the outputs such as the spindle running, cooling are
cut off. If
the emergency button is released, the emergency alarm is cancelled and the CNC resets.
Its circuit
wiring is shown in Section 2.3.1 of the Chapter.
Note 1: Ensure the fault is eliminated before the emergency alarm is cancelled.
Note 2: Pressing down the Emergency button prior to power on or off may alleviate the electric
shock to the
machine system.
Note 3: Re-perform the machine zero return to get the correct position coordinate after the
emergency alarm
is cancelled (machine zero return is forbidden if there is no machine zero on the machine.).
Note 4: Only Bit3 of the bit parameter No.172 is set to 0, is the external emergency stop active.
2.4.3 Feed hold

Press key during the machine running to make the running pause. However, in threading
cutting, tapping cycle state, the function cannot stop the running immediately.
2.4.4 Power-off
Under the dangerous or emergency situations during the machine running, the machine
power
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
208
Operation
should be cut off immediately to avoid the accidents. But it should be noted that there may
be a large
error between the CNC coordinates displayed and the actual position. So the toolsetting
operation
should be performed again.
Chapter 3 Manual Operation
209
Operation
CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Press key, it enters Manual mode. In the mode, the system can perform the manual feed,
spindle control, override adjustment, tool change etc..
3.1 Coordinate Axis Move

In Manual mode, 2 coordinate axes can perform manual feeding and rapid traverse.
3.1.1 Manual feed

Press or in and X feeds negatively or positively, and its
feeding stops if the key is released; press or and Z axis feeds negatively or positively,
and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or , and Y feeds negatively or
positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and the 4th axis
feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and
the 5th axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released.
In Manual mode, press key to make the indicator enter the manual rapid traverse mode.
3.1.2 Manual rapid traverse
Note!
The key functions of thisTAC-1002T machine panel are defined by PLC
program (ladders), please refer to the manual from the machine builder for
their
function significance.
Please note that the following functions for the machine panel keys are
described based on theTAC-1002T standard PLC programs!
210
Operation
Press in and the key indicator is ON; press or and X
feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and Z
axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or ,
and Y feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or
and the 4th axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
press or and the 5th axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is
released. The rapid override time-tuning is enabled.
In Manual mode, press key to make the indicator OFF, and the rapid traverse is disabled
and manual feed is executed.
Note 1: If no reference point return is performed after power on, as the rapid traverse switch is
turned on
(rapid indicator ON), the manual feedrate or rapid rate for the traverse is defined by the Bit0 of the
bit
parameter No.012 of thisTAC-1002T system.
Note 2: In Edit/MPG mode, key is inactive.
3.1.3 Speed tune

In Manual mode, press , , to alter the manual feed override which is divided into
16 steps. The relation of the override and the feedrate is as follows table when data
parameter
No.031 is set to 1260:
Feedrate override (%) Feedrate (mm/min)
00
10 126
20 252
30 378
40 504
50 630
60 756
70 882
80 1008
90 1134
100 1260
110 1386
120 1512
130 1638
211
Operation
Feedrate override (%) Feedrate (mm/min)
140 1764
150 1890
Note : There is about 2% error for the data in the above table.
In the manual rapid traverse, it can press key to alter the rapid override,
and there are 4 steps of F0, 25%, 50%,100% for the override.(F0 is set by data parameter
No.032)
The rapid override is active under the following conditions:
(1) G00 rapid traverse (2) Rapid traverse in canned cycle
(3) Rapid traverse in G28 (4) Manual rapid traverse
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.2 Other Manual Operations
3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control

: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates counterclockwise if pressing this key;
: In Manual mode, the spindle stops if pressing this key;
: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key.
3.2.2 Spindle jog

: At the moment, the spindle is in JOG state.
Functional description:
Press to enter JOG mode, and the spindle JOG function ON/OFF is executed only when
the spindle is in the state of stop.
In spindle JOG mode, by pressing key, the spindle rotates counterclockwise for jogging;
by pressing key, the spindle rotates clockwise for jogging. The jog time and speed are set
by
data parameter No.108 and No.109 respectively.
When the spindle JOG rotates, is pressed to stop the spindle JOG rotation, the spindle
brake signal is not output when the JOG rotation stops.
K10.4 is set to 1, the spindle JOG is valid in any mode. In Auto or MDI mode, the spindle
is in the
JOG rotation state, the program closes the spindle JOG rotation and the JOG function.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter K104 1/0: the spindle JOG is valid in any mode/Manual, MPG, Zero return
mode.
Data parameter No.108: spindle JOG time
Data parameter No.109: rotary speed in spindle JOG.
212
Operation
3.2.3 Cooling control

: In Manual mode, press this key, the cooling is switched on/off.
Parameter setting: PLC parameter K10.1 1/0: the spindle lubricating and cooling output
remains/closes in reset.
3.2.4 Lubricating control

Function description:
1. Non-automatic lubricating (DT017 =0)
When PLC DT013=0, it is the lubricating turn output. Pressing the can execute the
output. And the lubricating is cancelled by pressing it again. M32 is to execute lubricating
output, and
M33 is to cancel lubricating output.
When PLC DT013 1, it is timing lubricating output. Pressing the can execute the output.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
And it is cancelled after a setting time by data parameter DT013; M32 is to execute
lubricating output
and the output is cancelled after a time set by DT013. If the setting time is not yet up, M33
is executed
to cancel the lubricating output.
2. Automatic lubricating (DT017>0)
For automatic lubricating, the system executes the lubricating in the time set by DT017
and the
stops the output. After lubricating interval time set by DT016, the output is done again, it
does
repetitively like this. During the automatic lubricating, M32, M33 codes as well as the key
are
all active.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K10.1 1/0: the spindle lubricating/cooling output remains/closes in reset;
PLC parameter:K16.2 1/0: whether the lubricating outputs in power-on when the
automatic
lubricating is valid;
PLC data DT005: M execution duration(ms);
PLC data DT013: lubricating start time (0-60000ms)(0:lubricating time is not limited);
PLC data: DT016 automatic lubricating interval time (ms);
PLC data: DT017: automatic lubricating output time (ms).
3.2.5 Chuck control

: press it to switch the chuck releasing/clamping in any mode.
When the chuck control is invalid, the system alarms in executing the chuck control M
command;
When the system checks the chuck clamping (K12.1=1), the spindle cannot be started
when the
chuck is not clamped, and the chuck cannot be released after the spindle is started;
When using the input signal controls the chuck operation, the spindle should stop and
delay the
time set by DT21, the control is valid.
213
Operation
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K12.0 1/0: chuck control valid/invalid;
PLC parameter: K12.1 1/0: do not check/check the chuck clamping before the spindle
start;
PLC parameter: K12.2 1/0: chuck outer/inner control mode;
PLC parameter: K12.3 1/0: check/not chuck in-position signal;
PLC data: DT018: chuck pulse output width(ms);
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
PLC data: DT021: spindle stops, chuck operation enabling delays(ms).

Note: The chuck function is only forTAC-1002T-V CNC system.
3.2.6 Tailstock control

: In any mode, press it to switch the tailstock forward/backward.
When the tailstock control is invalid, the tailstock control M command alarms;
When the tailstock and the spindle control is interlocked, before the spindle is started, the
system
check whether the tailstock forward is valid. After the spindle is started, the tailstock
backward cannot
be executed.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameterK13.0 1/0tailstock control valid/invalid
PLC parameterK13.1 1/0the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward are/not
interlocked
Note: The tailstock function is only for TOMATECH 980TDc-V CNC system.
3.2.7 Hydraulic control

: press it to switch the hydraulic motor ON/OFF in any mode.
When the hydraulic control function is valid, is pressed to control HPST output to start the
hydraulic motor.
When the system is in non-run, the spindle stops and the speed is zero, is pressed to
close HPST output.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K14.7 1/0: hydraulic control function valid/invalid
Note: The hydraulic function key is only forTAC-1002T-V CNC system.
3.2.8 Manual tool change

: In Manual mode, pressing the key can manually change tools in sequence (if current tool
is No.1, it is changed for No.2 tool by pressing it; if current tool is No.4, it is changed for
No.1 tool by
pressing it.
214
Operation
3.2.9 Spindle override

In Manual mode, if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output, the spindle
speed
may be overrided.
Pressing , can change the spindle speed in real-time to adjust 8 steps of 50120
of the spindle override.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Chapter 4 MPG/Step Operation

215
Operation
CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION

In MPG/Step mode, the machine moves by a specified increment.
4.1 Step Feed

Set the system parameter No.001 Bit3 to 0, and press key to enter the STEP working
mode, it displays as follows:
4.1.1 Increment selection

Press to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in the
page. When the BIT7(SINC) of K016 is 1, step width value is inactive; when the BIT7 is 0,
are all active. For example, to press key, the window is shown as
follows:
Note!
program (ladders), please refer to the manuals by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the key functions in this chapter
is based on theTAC-1002T standard PLC program!
216
Volume Operation
4.1.2 Moving direction selection

Pressing or key once can move X negatively or positively by a step increment;
pressing or key once can move Z negatively or positively by a step increment;
pressing or key once can move Y negatively or positively by a step increment.
4.2 MPG(handwheel) Feed

Set the BIT3 of the system parameter No.001 to 1, and press key to enter the MPG mode,
it displays as follows:
217
Operation
The MPG figure is shown as follows:
The handwheel (MPG) figure
4.2.1 Increment selection

Press key to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in
the window. When the BIT7(SINC) of PLC K016 is 1, step is inactive; when BIT7 is 0,
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
are all active. For example, to press key, the window is shown as
follows:
4.2.2 Moving axis and direction selection

In MPG mode, press , , , , , key, the corresponding axis will
be selected. For example, press key and the window is shown below:
218
Volume Operation
The MPG feed direction is defined by its rotation direction. Generally, the MPG CW is for
positive
feed, and CCW for negative feed. In case of that MPG CW is for negative feed, CCW for
positive feed,
it may exchange the A, B signals of the MPG terminals. Bit0Bit4 of NO. 013 selects the
feed
direction of MPG rotation.
4.2.3 Other operations

1 Spindle CCW, CW, stop control
: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates counterclockwise if pressing this key;
: In Manual mode, the spindle stops if pressing this key;
: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key.
2 Spindle Jog
: at the moment, the spindle is in JOG working mode.
In spindle Jog mode, pressing can rotate counterclockwise for jogging; pressing
can rotate clockwise for jog. The jogging time and speed are set by DT12 and No.109
respectively.
Referred to Section 3.2.2.
3 Cooling control
Refer to OPERATION, Section 3.2.3
4 Lubricating control
5 Chuck control
6 Tailstock control
219
Operation
7 Hydraulic control
Refer to II OPERATION, Section 3.2.7
8) Manual tool change
: In MPG/Step mode, press it to change tools orderly.
9) Spindle override tune
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
In MPG/Step mode, if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output, the spindle
speed
may be overrided.
Pressing , can change the spindle speed in real-time to adjust 8 steps of 50120
of the spindle override
4.2.4 Explanation items

The correspondence of the handwheel scale to the machine moving amount is as follows
table:
Moving amount of each MPG scale
MPG increment 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
Specified coordinate value 0.001mm 0.01mm 0.1mm 1mm
Taking example of the least input increment 0.001mm
Note 1: The MPG increment is related to the systems current metric/inch input state and the
systems least
input increment.
Note 2: The MPG speed cannot be more than 5r/s, otherwise, the scale value is inconsistent with
the
movement amount.
220
Operation
CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION

In MDI mode, the operations of parameter setting, code words input and execution can be
performed.
5.1 Block Input

Select MDI mode to enter PROGRAM->MDI page, to input an block G50 X50 Z100, the
steps
are shown below:
1) Press key to enter MDI mode;
2) Press , and then press to enter MDI program page below:
The page is shown as follows after above operations are completed:
Note!
significance.
Please note that the following description for the key functions in this chapter is
based on theTAC-1002T standard PLC program!
221
Operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
5.2 Block Execution

After the word is input, is pressed and the display is as follows:
After the code words are input and is pressed to display the block, key is pressed
to execute the input block. During the execution, , and Emergency Stop button may be
pressed to terminate these code words execution.
Note: The subprogram call codes (M98 P_ etc.), compound cutting cycle codes(G70, G71, G72,
G73, G12.1,
G7.1 and so on) is inactive in MDI mode.
5.3 Parameter Setting

In MDI mode, the parameter value can be altered after entering the parameter interface.
The
222
Operation
detailed is referred to OPERATION, Chapter 10.
5.4 Data Alteration

In PRG->MDI page, if there is an error during words inputting before executing the input
block,
is pressed to cancel the display to alter the program, or is pressed to clear all the
input, then correct re-inputting is executed.
5.5 Other Operations

1. Adjusting spindle override
In MDI mode, the spindle speed can be adjusted when the analog voltage output controls
the
spindle speed.
Pressing , can adjust the spindle override to change the spindle speed, which can
realize the 8 steps adjustment in real-time from 50120.
2.Adjusting rapid override
Pressing can execute the rapid traverse, which can realize the 4 steps
adjustment in real-time.
3. Adjusting feedrate
In MDI mode, pressing , , can adjust the federate override to change the
federate, which can realize 16 steps adjustment from 0150.
4. Feedrate override is available.
Chapter 6 Program Edit and Management
223
Operation
CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT AND MANAGEMENT

In Edit mode, a program can be created, selected, altered, copied and deleted, and the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
bidirectional communication of CNC to CNC, or CNC to PC can also be done.

To prevent the program to be altered or deleted accidentally, a program switch is set up
for this
TAC-100XT system. And it must be turned on before program editing. Please see details
in Section
10.1.1 of the part.
The system provides multi-level user permission to facilitate the management. More than
4 levels
(4 level, 3 level) can open the program switch to edit programs. See OPERATION,
Section 10.1.2 .
6.1 Program Creation
6.1.1 Creating a block number

In the program, a block number can be added or not, the program is executed by the
sequence.
When the AUTO SEG switch in SWITCH SETTING window is OFF, CNC doesnt
generate the block
number automatically, but the blocks may be numbered manually.
When the AUTO SEG switch in SWITCH SETTING window is ON, CNC generates the
block
number automatically, it automatically generates the next block number by pressing or
in editing. The block number increment is set by the CNC data parameter No.042. (See
details in
Section 10.1.1 of this part.)
6.1.2 Inputting a program

Press to enter the Edit mode. Press to enter the Program interface, create a
machining program before inputting a machining program. The creating method is shown
below:
Method 1:
224
Operation
1 Press address key , number key , , and key by sequence (e.g.
taking an example of creating program O0001, the leading 0 can be omitted when its
name is
input). Its display is shown below:
2 Press ( or ) to create the new program. The display is shown below:
Method 2:
1) Pres continuously press it twice when other page is displayed to enter the local
directory page. The display is shown below:
225
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
2) Press input orderly , , , in the pop-up dialog boxtaking
example of creating O0001, the leading zero can be omitted when it is input. It display is
shown
below:
3) Press ( or ) to create the new program. The current page is automatically switched
into the program content page. Its display is shown below:
226
Operation
Note: When a program is needed to create, the input program name exists, the system opens the
file,
otherwise, it automatically create a new one.
Input the edited part program one by one, the character will be displayed on the screen
immediately as it is input(as for compound key, press this key repeatedly for alternate
input),
after a block is finished, press or to terminate it.
Note: The unexpected power-off when the program is input, the program being edited cannot be
saved.
6.1.3 Searching a character

1. Scanning: To scan the character one by one by cursor
1) Press key to enter the Edit mode, then press key to enter the PRG CONTENT
window;
2 Press key, the cursor shifts a row upward; if the number of the column where the
cursor locates is over the total columns of the previous row, the cursor moves to the
previous block
end (at ; sign) after key is pressed;
3 Press key, the cursor shifts a row downward; if the number of the column where the
cursor locates is over the total columns of the next row, the cursor moves to the next block
end (at ;
sign) after the key is pressed;
4 Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the right; if the cursor locates at the row end,
it moves to the head of the next block;
5 Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the left; if the cursor locates at the row head,
it moves to the end of the next block;
6 Press key to window upward, the cursor moves to the 1st row and 1st column of the
227
Operation
previous window, if it windows to the head of the program, the cursor moves to the 2nd row
and 1st
column;
7 Press key to window downward, the cursor moves to the 1st row and 1st column of
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the next window, if it windows to the end of the program, the cursor moves to the last row
and 1st
column of the program;
2. Finding: To search for the specified character upward or downward from the
cursor
current location
The steps of finding is as follows:
1) Press to enter Edit mode, and press key to enter the PRG CONTENT window;
2) Press , and input the required characters to be searched(can input one block). For
example, finding G00 page is shown below:
4) Press key ( or is determined by the location of the character searched to
the character where the cursor locates), it displays as follows:
228
Operation
4) After the finding, the CNC system is still in FIND state, press or key again, the
next character can be found. Or press key to exit the FIND state.
5) If the character is not found, the prompt of Search fail will be displayed.
Note : During the searching, it doesnt search the characters in the called subprogram, and the
character in
subprogram is searched in subprogram.
3. Positioning the cursor to the specified line
1) Press to enter Edit mode, and press to enter the PRG CONTENT page.
2) Press , and input the line number (the line number of block is the left of one row label).
For example, the cursor positions to the 10th line, the display is shown below:
3) Press or and the display page is shown below:
229
Operation
4. The method to return to the program head
1) In Program interface of the Edit mode, press key, the cursor returns to the program
head;
2) Search the program head character by the methods in OPERATION, Section 6.1.3.
6.1.4 Inserting a character

Steps:
1) Press to enter PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;
2) Press key to enter the INS mode (the cursor is an underline), the window is as follows:
3) Input the character to be inserted (to insert G98 code before G50 in the above figure,
input , , ); it displays as follows:
230
Operation
Note 1: In the Insert mode, if the cursor is not located at the row head, a space will be
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
automatically
generated when inserting the code address; if the cursor is located at the row head, the space will
not be generated, and it should be inserted manually.
Note 2: In the Insert mode, if the previous bit before the cursor is a decimal point and the cursor is
not
located at the row end, input an address word, the 0 will be added automatically following the
decimal point.
Note 3: In the Insert state, if the previous bit before the cursor is a decimal point and the cursor is
not
located at the row end, the 0 will be added automatically following the decimal point by
pressing
key.
6.1.5 Deleting a character

Steps:
1) Press to enter PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;
2) Press key to delete the character before the cursor; press key to delete the
character where the cursor locates.
6.1.6 Altering a character

There are 2 methods for the character alteration:
Insertion: First delete the character altered by the methods in Section 6.1.5, then insert
the
character required by the methods in Section 6.1.5 of this part.
Direct alteration:
1) Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;
2) Press key to enter the ALT state (the cursor is a backlight rectangle), the display page
is as follows:
231
Operation
3) Input the modified character(as the above figure, alter X300 to X250, input , ,
), it displays as follows:
Note 1: In ALTER state, the current character where the cursor locates is altered for the input one,
and the
cursor moves a byte forward;
Note 2: In ALTER state, if the cursor is located at the ; sign, the input character will substitute
this sign,
and the next block will shift upward a row.
6.1.7 Deleting a single block

Steps:
232
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
1) Press in Edit mode to enter program interface, and press to enter program
content page.
2) Move the cursor to the head of the block to be deleted, then press key.
6.1.8 Copying and pasting a block

Steps:
1) Select Edit mode, and the program content page is displayed;
2) Move the cursor to the required copy block, press , and the current block is
copied;
3) Move the cursor to the required paste position, press , and the copied block is
pasted.
6.1.9 Canceling and recovering a program

Steps:
1) Select Edit mode, the program content page is shown below:
233
Operation
2) Press to enter the next menu, which is shown below:
3) When the current content is changed(after modification, copy or deletion), is
pressed to recover the previous content before the copy;
4) Recover and cancel are matched. Press to cancel the previous
operation.
6.1.10 Program save

In Edit mode, after the program is edited or modified, although the system automatically
save
programs at regular time, the operator can select the operation to save the current
program, which
method is shown below:
Method 1
In the program content page, press to enter the next menu, press to save
the program into the CNC.
Method 2:
Switch the current display page and the CNC will automatically save the current program.
234
Operation
Note: * in the title bar is displayed when the program is not saved.
6.1.11 Macro program edit

Press key repeatedly, it enters MACRO state, as the following window shows:
Then it may input some special characters (, , , , , , ).
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
e.g. To input character , it may press key repeatedly.

Note: The system cannot execute the program search and the scan in macro program edit state.
6.1.12 Creating and modifying a program annotation

TAC-100XT can add annotation to each line, and its steps are shown below:
1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface, press to enter the
program content page;
2) Press and the CNC automatically insert ( ) into the end of line where the cursor
is, and the display page is shown below:
235
Operation
3) Input annotation character into ( ). For example, input KUAI character string, and the
display page is shown below:
4) The modification of annotation is the same that of program content.
Note : The annotation added to the CNC could only be character. Actually, the CNC takes all
content in ()
as annotation, so, adding other annotation can be executed by using PC editing, and then be
transmitted to the CNC.
6.2 Deleting Programs
6.2.1 Deleting a program

Steps:
1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface, press to enter
program content page;
236
Operation
2) Press address key , number key , , , by sequence (taking
example of O0001);
3) Press key, pop-up the dialog box as follows:
4) Press and O0001 program is deleted; press and the deletion is cancelled.
Method 2:
1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface, press to enter the local program
page;
2) Press or to select the required deleted program. For example, select O0001
program and the display is shown below:
237
Operation
3) Press key, pop-up the dialog box as follows:
4) Press and O0001 program is deleted; press and the deletion is cancelled.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
6.2.2 Deleting all programs

Steps:
1) Refer to Section 6.2.1, Method 2 to enter the local program page;
2) Press to enter the next menu and the display is shown below:
238
Operation
3) Press , and then press the all program are deleted.
6.3 Selecting a Program

When there are multiple programs in CNC system, a program can be selected by
searching,
scanning and direct confirmation.
6.3.1 Searching
1) Select Edit or Auto mode;
2) Press , (the short key is ) and the display is shown below:
3) Press input the program number in the pop-up dialogue box. For example,
search O0001 program (the leading zero can be omitted when the program name is input)
and the display is shown below:
239
Operation
4) Press or , , , the searched program will be displayed. If the program
does not exist, the CNC prompts File does not exist.
Note: In Edit mode, press or to search programs. When there is no programs, the CNC
automatically creates programs; press or to execute the search, and the CNC prompts
The file does not exist when there is not the program.
6.3.2 Scanning
1) Select Edit or Auto mode;
2) Press to enter the program display page;
3) Press ;
4) Press or to display the next or previous program;
5) Repeat step 3 and 4 to display the saved programs one by one.
6.3.3 Direct confirmation

1) Select Edit or Auto mode (must be in non-run state);
2) Press to enter the program interface. When the system is not in Local Directory ,
is pressed, which displays is shown below:
240
Operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3) Pressing can enter the subordinate menu, which can be omitted. The display is
shown below:
4) Press to move the cursor to the program name which is to be selected.
5) Refer to the above Step 3) to enter the subordinate menu, at the moment, press directly
to open it. The step can be omitted to execute the Step 6).
6) Press or , and the selected program is opened and the CNC skips to PRG.
CONTENT page.
Note: when the CNC is connected with the U disk, the above similar method is referred to open
the program in
the U disk.
6.4 Executing a Program

After the program to be executed is selected by the method in OPERATION, Section 6.3,
select the
Auto mode, then press key (or external cycle start key), the program will be executed
241
Operation
automatically.
6.5 Renaming a Program

Methods of renaming a program is divided into two:
Method 1:
1) Select Edit mode, press to enter the program interface, and in necessity press
to enter PRG CONTENT page (must be in Insert, Alter state):
2) Press to input a new program name;
3) Press .
Method 2:
to enter the local directory page:
242
Operation
2) Press again to enter the subordinate menu, and press to open it:
3) Move the cursor to the program which is to be modified, press and input a new
program name in the pop-up diaglog box, and at last press .
Note: the method 1 is only used to the current program, and the method 2 is used to any
programs.
6.6 Copying a Program

Methods of copying a program is divided into two:
Method 1:
to enter PRG CONTENT page (must be in Insert, Alter state):
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2) Press to input a new program name;

3) Press .
243
Operation
Method 2:
to enter the local directory page:
2) Press again to enter the subordinate menu, and press to open it:
3) Move the cursor to the program which is to be modified, press and input a new
program name in the pop-up diaglog box, and at last press .
Note: the method 1 is only used to the current program, and the method 2 is used to any
programs.
244
Operation
6.7 Program Management
6.7.1 Program list

Press ,and then press to enter the local program display page. In the page, it
lists the program names saved in CNC system, and it can display up to 18 names in a
page. When
the saved exceed 18 programs, it may press or to display the next page.
Explanations:
1) The area 1 is used to display the saved programs, the total memory capacity, the used
capacity and the left;
2) The area is used to display the current program list;
3) The area 3 is used to preview the content of program where the current cursor is in the
area
2;
4) The area 4 belongs to the soft function menu position. Pressing ,
can display in order programs located at the area 2.
6.8 Other Operations Available in Edit Mode

The operations by thisTAC-1002T machine panel allowed in Edit mode are defined by
ladders,
please refer to the materials by the machine builder.
Please note that the following functions are described based on the 980TDc standard PLC
programs!
1) Spindle override can be adjusted by pressing , ;
2) Feedrate override can be adjusted by pressing , ;
3) CNC can be reset by pressing key;
Area 1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Area 4
Area 2 Area 3
245
Operation
4) The operation mode is switched by pressing any of the keys among , , ,
, or ;
5) The data transmission
6) Refer to II OPERATION, Chapter 12
7) Cooling control
Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.3
8) Lubricating control
9) Chuck control
10) Tailstock control
11) Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.6
12) Hydraulic control
246
Operation
CHAPTER 7 TOOL OFFSET AND SETTING

The actual location of tool can be overlooked in programming for simplifying programming.
Three
methods including positioning toolsetting, trial toolsetting and machine zero toolsetting are
available
in thisTAC-1002T system. The tool offset data are obtained from this toolsetting operation.
7.1 Tool Positioning Setting

Steps:
x
Z
X
Z
Fig. A Fig. B
1. Firstly determine if the offset values are zero in X, Z, if not, clear all the tool number
offset
values;
2. Set the offset No. for 00 (i.e. T0100,T0300), as for the offset value: (method: execute a
move
code or perform the machine zero return in T0100 state, then clear the offset value
automatically as returning to the machine zero);
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3. Select a tool by random (usually the 1st tool, this tool will be used as the reference tool);
4. Position the tool nose of the reference tool to a point (toolsetting point), as shown in Fig.
A;
5. In PRG STATE page of the MDI mode, set up the workpiece coordinate system by the
command G50 X__ Z__;
6. Clear the relative coordinate (U, W), see details in APPENDIX;
7. After the tool is moved to a safety height, select another tool and move it to the setting
point,
as shown in Fig. B;
8. Press key and move the cursor by , key to select the corresponding
offset number of that tool;
9. Press address key , then press key to input the tool offset value of X axis into the
corresponding offset number;
10. Press address key , then press key to input the tool offset value of Z axis into
the corresponding offset number;
11. Repeat the steps from 7 to 10 to perform the toolsetting operation for other tools.
Chapter 7 Tool Offset and Setting
247
Operation
Note: For the fixed toolsetting, the original system tool offset should be cleared, input the new
offset one
time instead of many times by pressing , . Refer to II OPERATION, Section 7.5.4 about the
tool compensation clearing method.
7.2 Trial Toolsetting

Whether the method of trial toolsetting is inactive is defined by the system parameter
No.012
Bit5.
Steps (workpiece coordinate system by part end surface):
Z
X
Surface A
Surface B
1) Select a tool by random and make it cut on Surface A;
2) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle; directly press
, and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the moment, directly
move the tool;
Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET page, then move
3) the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;
4) Key in by sequence the address key , number key and key;
5) Make the tool cut along Surface B;
6) Retract the tool along Z axis without the movement of X axis, and stop the spindle;
directly
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
press , and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the moment,
directly move the tool;
7) Measure the diameter "" (supposing =15) ;
8) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move
the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;
9) Key in the address key by sequence, number key , and key;
10) Move the tool to a safety height to change for another tool;
248
Operation
Z
X

A1
B1

11) Make the tool to cut on Surface A1;
12) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle;
13) Measure the distance "" between the Surface A1 and the workpiece coordinate
origin(supposing =1) ;
14) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET page, then move the
cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;
15) Key in by sequence the address key , sign key , number key , and
key;
16) Make the tool to cut on Surface B1;
18) Measure the distance " " (supposing =10);
the cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;
20) Press orderly the address key , number key , and key;
21) Repeat the execution from Step 10 to Step 20 to perform the toolsetting operation for
other
tools.
Note: The offset value may be large by this toolsetting method, so the tool compensation should
be done by
the coordinate offset by the CNC system. (set the BIT4 of the CNC parameter No.003 to 1).
Moreover,
the tool lengths compensation should be performed by using the T code in the 1st block, or the
1st
move block should contain the T code for the tool length compensation.
7.3 Toolsetting by Machine Zero Return

There is no reference tool in this toolsetting methods, when the tool is worn or to be
adjusted, it
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
only needs to be set again, and a machine zero return should be done before the
toolsetting. The
machining could be continued by performing a machine zero return at power on after
power-off, which
is very convenient for the operation.
Steps (workpiece coordinate system by part end surface):
Surface A1
Surface B1
249
Operation
Z
X
A
B
1) Press key to enter Machine Zero mode, move axes to machine zero;
2) Select a tool by random and set the offset number of the tool to 00 (e.g. T0100,
T0300) ;
3) Make the tool to cut on Surface A;
4) Retract the tool along X axis without the movement of Z axis, and stop the spindle;
directly
press , and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the moment,
directly move the tool;
6) Key in by sequence the address key , number key and key to set the
offset value of Z axis;
7) Make the tool cut along Surface B;
9) Measure the distance ""(supposing =15);
11) Key in by sequence the address key , number key , and key to set
the offset value of X axis;
12) Move the tool to a safety height for tool change;
13) Change for another tool, and set the tool offset number to 00 (i.e. T0100, T0300);
Surface B
Surface A
Z
X
1
A1
B1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1
Surface B1
Surface A1
250
Operation
14) Make the tool to cut on Surface A1;
15) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle; measure the
distance "1" between the Surface A1 and the workpiece coordinate system origin
(supposing 1=1) ;
17) Key in by sequence the address key , sign key , number key , and
key to set Z offset value;
18) Make the tool to cut on Surface B1;
20) Measure the distance "1" (supposing 1=10);
22) Key in by sequence the address key , number key , and key to set
X offset value;
23) Move the tool to a safety position;
24) Repeat the execution from Step 12 to Step 23 to perform the toolsetting operation for
other
tools.
Note 1: Machine zero switch must be fixed for the toolsetting operation by machine zero return.
Note 2: The workpiece coordinate system setting cant be done by G50 code after toolsetting by
machine
zero return.
Note 3: The tool compensation should be done by coordinate offset by the CNC system (the
system
parameter No.003 Bit4 is set to 1), further more, the tool lengths compensation should be
performed
by using the T code in the 1st block, or the 1st move block should contain the T code for the tool
length compensation.
Note 4: The corresponding parameters should be set as follows:
Bit7=0 of the system parameter No.004;
Bit5=1 of the system parameter No.012;
Bit7=1 of the system parameter No.012.
Note 5: The setting values of the system parameter No.047 should be close to the absolute
coordinate
values of machine zero in workpiece coordinate system XOZ, as is shown in the following figure:
As shown below:
Example: After machine zero returning, when the absolute coordinate of the tool in
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
workpiece
251
Operation
coordinate system is (a,b), the setting value of system parameter No.047 should be close
to a,b.
7.4 Coordinates Record

When the trail-cut toolsetting or machine zero return toolsetting is executed, the
coordinates
record function can be used to get the convenient toolsetting operation.
When the toolsetting is executed and after the tool cuts along X (or Z), the following steps
are
executed to directly move the tool to the safety position as follows:
1) Press to enter the tool offset interface, and then press to enter the tool
offset page as follows:
2) Press , absolute corrdinates of X and Zwithout including current tool offset
valuesare recorded in the CNC. After the absolute values are recorded correctly, there is
a
flash Record coordinates in the upper of the screen, and there is a prompt Current
Absolute coordinates have been recorded in the bottom of the screen as follows:
3) Retract the tool to the safety position, and stop the spindle. When the diameter is
measured
for the outer circle and the distance from the reference plane to it is done, the measured
value is input in the tool offset page; the system counts the new tool offset value and sets
it
252
Operation
to the selected tool offset number according to the input value and the previous recorded
absolute coordinates.
Use the following methods to clear the recorded coordinates when the above methods are
used
to execute the toolsetting:
1) In the tool offset page, after the absolute coordinates are input in some tool offset(for
example: Z0 is input in the No.01 tool offset number) and then the axis moves, the
recorded
coordinates are cleared;
2) Press simultaneously, and the recorded coordinates are cleared;
3) Press in the tool offset page and the recorded coordinates are cleared.
7.5 Setting and Altering the Offset Value

Refer to Section 1.3.3 about methods of entering the offset setting page.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
7.5.1 Offset setting

1) Press key to enter the offset setting page, select the desired window by pressing the
,;
2) Move the cursor to the location of the tool offset, wear number to be input.
Scanning: Press , to move the cursor in sequent
Searching: use the following press keys to directly move the cursor to the input position:
Press + offset number + or and input the offset number in
the pop-up dialogue box, press and the cursor directly positions the target
offset number.
3) After pressing the address key or , the numerical number may be keyed in
(decimal point allowed);
4) Press and the CNC calculates the offset value automatically and displays the result
in the window.
7.5.2 Offset alteration

1) Refer to OPERATION, Section 7.5.1, and move the cursor to the location of the offset
number that is to be altered;
2) If the offset value of X axis is to be altered, key in U; as for that of Z axis, key in W;
3) Then key in the incremental value;
4) Press to add the current offset value to the value keyed in, the operation result will be
displayed as a new offset value.
Example: The set X axis offset value is 5.678
253
Operation
The increment keyed in is U 1.5
Then the new offset value is 7.178 (=5.678+1.5)
7.5.3 Offset alteration in communication mode

For the alteration and setting of the offset value in the communication, please see Chapter
12 of
this part for its operations.
Note 1: While changing the offset value, the new offset value takes effect after the T code is
executed.
Note 2: If the actual workpiece dimensions doesnt conforms to that of the part drawing, subtract
the error
from the original offset value for the oversize workpiece, add the error to the original offset value
for
the undersize workpiece.
Example: The external diameter of the workpiece to be machined is 55.382, and the
No.01 offset
value is applied in the machining. Before machining, the values in No.01 are shown as
follows table:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
No. X Z T R
00 0 0 0 0
01 16.380 -24.562 0 0
In machining, the actual external diameter measured of workpiece is 55.561, so the
offset
value of No.01 can be altered as follows table:
No. X Z T R
00 0 0 0 0
01 16.201 -24.562 0 0
Note: To backup and restore the tool offset values, the relevant operations may be performed on
PC via
communication.
7.5.4 Clearing the offset values

1) Move the cursor to the offset number to be cleared;
2) When the offset value of X axis is to be cleared, is pressed, then is done, the
offset will be cleared. Other axis clearing is done like that;
Note: The offset clearing in the tool offset page doesnt mean that the system in under the state
with no
offsetting, if the system is needed to be in this state, the offsetting is required to be executed,
which is
shown as follows:
Execute a positioning command in T0100 state or perform a machine zero return. After the
offsetting is
finished, the in T shown at the right bottom of the screen will not be backlighted.
7.5.5 Setting and altering the tool wear

To prevent the mistaken operation of the setting and alteration of the offset value (decimal
point
missed, mislocated etc.), which may cause the tool collision by oversize offset value, for
the visual
judgement for the tool wear by the operator, the TOOL WEAR window is set in
thisTAC-1002T
system. When the offset value is needed to be altered due to the inaccurate dimensions
by the tool
wear, it may set or alter the wear value. The wear input range is defined by the data
parameter
No.140, and they are saved even at power down.
The setting and alteration methods for the tool wear are approximately identical to that of
the tool
offset, and the wear value is input by U(X axis), W(Z axis), V(Y axis).
16.380-55.561-55.382
254
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
7.5.6 Locking and unlocking the offset value

In order to protect the offset value to be operated by mistaken, the offset values can be
put into
lock, the operation steps are as follows:
1) Move the cursor to the location of the offset number to be locked;
2) Press the key, the current offset value will be backlighted for locking, which is
forbidden to alter, press the key again, the locking may be cancelled. No.1 tool offset
is locked as follows:
Note: The tool wear values cant be locked.
7.5.7 No.0 tool offset moving workpiece coordinate system

When No.012 Bit 6 is set to 1, No. 0 tool offset moving workpiece coordinate system is
valid.
After the value is input in No. 0 tool offset, the workpiece coordinate system executes the
offset
based on the input value.
255
Operation
Before inputting No.0 tool offset
After inputting No.0 tool offset
As the above figure, after X100, Z100 in No.0 tool offset is input, the workpiece coordinate
system offsets X100, Z100.
Note: When No. 0 offset modification is valid real-time, No. 0 tool offset must be set before the
system runs a
program, otherwise, the run path will offset.
256
Operation
CHAPTER 8 AUTO OPERATION
8.1 Automatic Run
8.1.1 Selection of a program running

Refer to Section 6.3.
8.1.2 Start of automatic run

1. Press to select the Auto mode;
2. Press to start the program, and the program automatically runs.
Note: Since the program execution begins from the block where the cursor locates, before
pressing the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
, make a check whether the cursor is located at the block to be executed.
8.1.3 Stop of automatic run

Stop by code (M00)
1. M00
After the block containing M00 is executed, the auto run is stopped. So the modal function
and
state are all reserved. Press the or the external run key, the program execution continues.
2. M01
Press and the optional stop indicator is ON and the function is valid. After the block with
M01 is executed, the system stops the automatic run, the modal function and the state are
saved.
Press or the external run key, and the program continuously runs.
Stop by a relevant key
1. In Auto run, by pressing or external pause key, the machine keeps the following state:
(1) The machine feed slows down to stop;
(2) The modal function and state are reserved;
Note
The key functions ofTAC-1002T machine panel are defined by PLC program
(ladders), please refer to the materials by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the keys function in this chapter
is based onTAC-1002T standard PLC program!
Chapter 8 AUTO Operation
257
Operation
(3) The program execution continues after pressing the key.
2. Stop by Reset key
(1) All axes movement is stopped.
(2) M, S function output is inactive (the automatic cut-off of signals such as spindle
CCW/CW,
lubricating, cooling by pressing key can be set by the parameters)
(3) Modal function and state is held on after the auto run.
3. Stop by Emergency stop button
If the external emergency button (external emergency signal active) is pressed under the
dangerous or emergent situation during the machine running, the CNC system enters into
emergency
state, and the machine moving is stopped immediately, all the output (such as spindle
rotation,
cooling) are all cut off. If the Emergency button is released, the alarm is cancelled and
CNC system
enters into reset mode.
4. Switching operation mode
When Auto mode is switched to the Machine zero, MPG/Step, Manual, Program zero
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
mode, the
current block dwells immediately; when the Auto mode is switched to the Edit, MDI mode
in Auto
mode, the dwell is not displayed till the current block is executed.
Note 1: Ensure that the fault has been resolved before cancelling the emergency alarm.
Note 2: The electric shock to the device may be decreased by pressing the Emergency button
before power
on and off.
Note 3: The Machine zero return operation should be performed again after the emergency alarm
is
cancelled to ensure the correctness of the position coordinates (but this operation is forbidden if
there is no machine zero in the machine).
Note 4: Only the BIT3 (MESP) of the bit parameter No.172 is set to 0, could the external emergency
stop be
active.
8.1.4 Automatic run from an arbitrary block

Press key to enter the Edit mode, press key to enter the program content page;
1) Move the cursor to the block to be executed (for example, move the cursor to the 3rd
row head if
it executes from the 3rd row);
258
Operation
2) If the mode (G, M, T, F code) of the current block where the cursor locates is defaulted
and
inconsistent with the running mode of this block, the corresponding modal function should
be
executed to continue next step.
3) Press key to enter the Auto mode, then press key to start the execution.
8.1.5 Adjustment of the feedrate, rapid rate

In Auto mode, the running speed can be changed by adjusting the feedrate override, rapid
override. It doesnt need to change the settings of the program and parameter.
Adjustment of the feedrate override
Press , , 16-level real time feedrate can be obtained.
Note 1: The actual feedrate value is specified by F in feedrate override adjustment;
Note 2: Actual feedrate= value specified by F feedrate override
Adjustment of rapid override
It can realize the F0, 25, 50, 100 4-level real time rapid override adjustment by
pressing , , , .
Note 1: The rapid traverse speeds of X, Z axis are set by the system parameter No.022, No.023
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.022Xrapid override
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.022Zrapid override
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Note 2: When the rapid override is F0, the min. rapid traverse rate is set by bit parameter No.032.
8.1.6 Spindle speed adjustment

While the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage output in Auto mode, it can be
adjusted by spindle override.
Press , to adjust the spindle override for the spindle speed, it can realize 8-level
real-time override adjustment between 50120.
259
Operation
Note : The actual output analog voltage = analog voltage by parameter spindle override.
8.2 Running State
8.2.1 Single block execution

When a program is executed firstly, the system selects the single block run mode to avoid
the
program error to cause the unexpected.
Press to select the single block run function in Auto mode; in single block mode, after the
current block is executed, the CNC stops run; press to execute the next block. Such
repetition
is executed till the program is done.
Note 1: The single block stops at the mid point of G28 code.
Note 2: For the single block state in the execution of canned cycle codes G90, G92, G94, G70
G76, refer to
the 1st part PROGRAMMING.
Note 3: While the subprogram calling (M98 ), or subprogram calling return (M99)is being
executed, the
single block is inactive. But it is active except for N, O, P addresses in the block that contains M98
or
M99 code.
8.2.2 Dry run

Before the program is to be executed automatically, in order to avoid the programming
errors, it
may select the Dry run mode to check the program.
In Auto mode, press to enter the dry run state; in Dry run state, the machine feed and
miscellaneous functions are both active (as machine lock, MST lock are both OFF), that
means the
dry run switch has nothing to do with the machine feeding, MST functions, so the feedrate
by program
is inactive and the CNC system runs at the speed described in the following table:
Program command
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Rapid traverse switch ON Rapid traverse Max. manual feedrate

Rapid traverse switch OFF
Manual feedrate or rapid
traverse(see note)
Manual feedrate
Note 1: The rate by manual feedrate or rapid rate is set by the BIT6 of the CNC system parameter
No.004.
Note 2: The shift of rapid switch in Dry run mode doesnt affect the rate of the current block being
executed,
but that of the next block.
Note 3: The switch operation of Dry run is inactive if the ladder of thisTAC-1002T is defined to be
in auto
running state (Auto, MDI mode).
8.2.3 Machine lock

In Auto mode, press to enter the machine lock; the machine lock and MST lock are usually
used together to check the program. While the machine is in the lock run state:
1. The machine carriage doesnt move, the MACHINE in the INTEGRATED POS
window of the
260
Operation
Position interface doesnt vary too. The RELATIVE POS and ABSOLUTE POS, DIST TO
GO
are refreshed continuously, which is the same as that the machine lock switch is OFF.
2. M, S, T commands can be executed normally.
8.2.4 MST lock

In Auto mode, press to enter the miscellaneous function lock state; The machine carriage
moves without the M, S, T code being executed. The machine lock and MST lock are
usually used
together to check the program.
Note: When the MST lock is active, it takes no effect to the execution of M00, M29, M30, M98, M99.
8.2.5 Block skip

When a block in program is not needed to be executed and not to be deleted, this block
skip
function can be used. When the block is headed with / sign and Block skip indicator
lights up (panel
key active or external skip input active), this block is skipped without execution in Auto
mode. In Auto
mode, press to enter the state that the program skip is valid.
Note: While the block skip switch is off, the blocks headed with / signs are executed normally in
Auto
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
mode.
8.3 MPG Trial-cut

The user can use MPG trial-cut function after editing part programs, check the run path of
program. In MPG trial-cut function, rotating MPG controls the execution speed of program,
which can
easily check the program error conveniently.
8.3.1 Switching MPG trial-cut mode

Press to enter the MPG trial-cut mode after a machinig program is selected as follows:
261
Operation
At the moment, press and the display is shown below:
At the moment, rotating MPG makes the program start running. When the execution
speed of
program is proportional to MPG speed, execution speed of program fastens as soon as
the MPG
rapidly rotates; the execution speed slows down as soon as the MPG slowly rotates.
Movement
amount of one pulse can be adjusted by rapid override.
When the system is in the MPG trial-cut mode, it returns to Auto mode after is pressed. All
operations in MPG trial-cut mode are the same those of Auto mode.
8.3.2 Command speed in MPG trial-cut mode

1) Cutting feedrate
Cutting command speed in MPG trial-cut mode is determined by No. 241 and rapid
override. The
command speed during actually rotating MPG is executed by the following:
[Command speed][MPG pulse amount per 1 second]([the parameter setting value]
/100)
262
Operation
(8/1000) (mm/min or inch/min)
value is determined by the current rapid override, and their relationship is:
Rapid override value Rapid override value
F0 1 25% 10
50% 100 100% 100
Rapid traverse speed is clamped at 100% speed when it exceeds 100%, i.e.:
[MPG pulse amount per 1 second]([No.241setting value]/100)(8/1000)1
2) Rapid traverse speed
Rapid traverse speed is clamped at the speed set by No.240, i.e.:
[Rapid traverse speed][rapid traverse speed of each axis]([No.240 setting value]/100)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
[MPG
pulse amount per 1 second]([No.241 setting value]/100)(8/1000)
At the moment, when the speed by rapidly rotating MPG exceeds the clamped, the rapid
traverse
speed is clamped at the setting value by parameter, i.e.:
[MPG pulse amount per 1 second]([No.241 setting value]/100)(8/1000) 1
8.3.3 Notes in MPG trial-cut mode

Pay more attention to the followings when the system is in MPG trial-cut mode:
1) Press in Auto mode and the CNC does not switch to MPG trial-cut mode; when the
CNC is in MPG trial-cut mode, it escapes the MPG trial-cut mode from the next block by
pressing the mode switch key;
2) When the system executes the MPG trial-cut control, the single block signal and the
feed
hold signal are valid. When the single block or feed hold stops, the program execution
state
is recovered to the MPG trial-cut control after the cycle start key is pressed.
3) Execution speed of blocks for movement and pause can be controlled by rotating MPG.
Their speed of blocks with M, S, T, F, i.e. without movement or pause cannot be
controlled(except for executing the tool offset in traverse mode) by rotating MPG which
only
controls whether they are executed.
4) The spindle speed is not related to the MPG pulse. The spindle rotates with the
commanded
speed even if the system is in the MPG trial-cut mode. For feed per rotation, reading the
current spindle speed is switched to the execution after feed per minute.
8.3.4 Temporarily invalid in MPG trial-cut mode

1) Executing screw cutting commands
In the course of executing screw cutting blocks (G32, G32.1, G33, G34, G76, G84, G88,
G92), the MPG trial-cut function is temporarily invalid with the speed under the override
100%,
and is valid in the next block again. The MPG control is invalid when the screw cutting is
executed actually, and it is valid in others.
2) Executing from the middle point to machine zero
In the course of executing the block (G28, G30) from the middle point to machine, the
MPG
trial-cut is invalid temporarily and the block is executed with the speed under the override
100%,
and the next block is valid again.
3) Measuring related G commands execution with the override 100%
When the system measures the related G commands, the MPG trial-cut is invalid
temporarily, is executed with the speed under the override 100%, at the moment,
execution of
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

263
Operation
the next block is valid again. The related G commands include:
G31, G36, G37
8.4 Other Operations

1. In Auto mode, press key to switch on/off the cooling;
2. Press any of the , , , , , , keys to switch the
operation modes;
3. Press the key to reset this CNC system.
4. Automatic lubricating operation (Refer to OPERATION, Chapter 3).
264
Operation
CHAPTER 9 ZERO RETURN OPERATION
9.1 Program Zero Return
9.1.1 Program Zero

While the part is fixed on the machine, absolute coordinate of current tool position may be
set by
G50 code according to the relative position between the tool and the part, so a workpiece
coordinate
system is setup. The tool current position is called program zero, and this is the program
zero return
position.
9.1.2 Program zero return steps

1. Press key, it enters the Program zero return mode, the bottom line of the window
displays P. ZERO:
2. Press the direction key of X, Z , Y, 4th, C axis, it returns to the program zero of X, Z , Y,
4th or C
axis;
3. The machine axis moves toward the program zero return, and the axis stops with the
program
zero return completion indicator ON after the axis returns to the program zero.
Note!
significance.
Please note that the following description for the panel key functions in this
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
chapter is based on theTAC-1002T standard PLC program!

Chapter 9 Zero Return Operation
265
Operation
Note 1: The tool offset is not changed for the program zero return operation, if there is offset, the
return
position is the point set by G50.
Note 2: Whether the key is held on at program zero return is defined by the bit parameter No.011
BIT2 (zero
return is locked automatically).
9.2 Machine Zero Return
9.2.1 Machine Zero

The machine coordinate system is a reference coordinate system for CNC coordinate
operation. It is an inherent coordinate system of the machine. The origin of the machine
coordinate
system is called machine zero (or machine reference point). It is defined by the zero or
zero return
switch fixed on the machine. Usually this switch is fixed at the positive stroke point of each
axis.
9.2.2 Machine Zero return steps

1. Press key, it enters the Machine zero mode, the bottom line of the window displays
REF:
2. Press , , , or key to return to the machine zero of X, Z, Y, 4th or C
axis;
3. The machine axis returns to the machine zero via the deceleration signal, zero signal
detection. At the machine zero, the axis stops, and the corresponding machine zero return
completion
indicator lights up.
Note 1: If there is no machine zero on the machine, the machine zero operation is forbidden;
Note 2: The machine zero finish indicator is gone out on condition that: 1)The axis is moved out
from
machine zero; 2) CNC is powered off.
Note 3: After the machine zero operation, the tool length compensation is cancelled by CNC;
Note 4: Parameters related to machine zero return are referred to INSTALLATION and
CONNECTION.
Note 5: After the machine zero return is executed, the original workpiece coordinate system is set
again with
G50.
266
Operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
9.3 Other Operations in Zero Return

1) The spindle rotates (CW, CCW), stops.
2) The cooling is ON or OFF.
3) The lubricating control.
4) Manual relative tool change.
5) The spindle override tuning.
6) Rapid override tuning.
7) Feedrate override tuning.
8) Hydraulic chuck control (be applied to onlyTAC-1002T-V);
9) Hydraulic tailstock control (be applied to onlyTAC-1002T-V).
Chapter 10 Data Setting, Backup and Restore
267
Operation
CHAPTER 10 DATA SETTING
10.1 Data Setting

Press and then to enter the CNC setting page which includes the switch setting,
level setting and parameter operation function as follows:
10.1.1 Switch setting

When the cursor is in the switch set column, the system can set parameters, programs,
automatic sequence number ON/OFF state.
1) Switch explanation:
Parameter switch: parameters can be modified when the parameter switch is ON; they are
forbidden to alter when it is OFF.
Program switch: programs can be edited when the program switch is ON; they are
forbidden to
edit when it is OFF.
Automatic block number: the block number is automatically generated when the automatic
sequence number switch is ON and a program is edited; when the switch is OFF, the
block number is input manually instead of being automatically generated.
2) Switch setting method:
a) Move the cursor to the setting item;
b) Press or to open the switch, press or to close
it;
Note: When the parameter switch is shifted from OFF to ON, an alarm will be issued by CNC
system. The
alarm can be cancelled by pressing . If the PARM SWT is shifted again, no alarm is issued. For
security it should set the PARM SWT for OFF after the parameter alteration is finished.
10.1.2 Level setting

To prevent programs, CNC parameters from being modified at will,TAC-1002T provides
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the
level setting function, and its password grade is divided into five, from high to low grade:
2nd grade
(machine manufacturer), 3rd grade (device management), 4th grade (engineer), 5th grade
(machining
268
Operation
operation), 6th grade(operation limit). The current operation grade is displayed in Current
Level:_ in
the level setting page.
2nd gradeit is for the machine manufacturer, which permits the machine manufacturer to
alter the
state parameters, data parameters, pitch compensation data, tool compensation data, to
edit
programs, to transmit PLC and so on.
3rd grade: it permits to alter state parameters, data parameters, tool compensation data
and to edit
programs.
4th grade: it permits to alter tool compensation data (toolsetting operation), macro
variables, to edit
programs, but not to alter state parameters, data parameters and pitch compensation
data.
5th grade: it permits to alter tool compensation data, not to select and edit programs, and
not to alter
state programs, data programs and pitch compensation data.
6th grade: it has no level to operate only the machine operation panel, not to alter tool
compensation
data, not select and edit programs, not to alter state parameters, data parameter and pitch
compensation data.
1) Operation grade entry
a) Move the cursor to the line INPUT PASSWORD in the CNC setting page;
b) Input the operation password(the system displays one * as soon as a number is input;
c) Press and the operator can enter the corresponding grade operation;
d) After the operator enters the corresponding operation grade page, the prompt column
prompts the systems current grade, and the corresponding operations as follows:
Note 1: The defined password length corresponds to the operation grade, and the user cannot
increase
or reduce the length at will, which is shown below:
Operation
grade Length Initial
password
3rd grade 5 digits 12345
4th grade 4 digits 1234
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
5th grade 3 digits 123

6th grade None None
Note 2: When the operation level is less than or equal to the 3rd grade ( 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th grade) and
the
system is turned on again, the operation level does not change. When the level is the 2 nd grade
and the
system is turned on again, the operation level defaults to the 3 rd grade.
2) Password modification
Steps:
a) The operator enters the grade to alter the password according to the method
Operation
grade entry after the system enters the setting page;
b) Move the cursor to the line ALATER PASSWORD;
269
Operation
c) Input the new password, and then press ;
d) The CNC prompts Input the new password again;
e) Input the new password again and then press . When the two input passwords
are identical, the CNC prompts Password has been altered, please save the new
password. The password alteration is done successfully.
Note: The system prompts The new password is not identical with the confirmation when the
two
input passwords are not identical. At the moment, input the new password again.
3) Operation grade degradation
The degradation is to degrade from the high to the low, and its steps are shown below:
a) Input the password according the method of Operation grade entry after the system
enters the setting page;
b) Move the cursor to the line CURRENT LEVEL and the system pops up
as follows:
c) Press or , and the CNC prompts Password degrades one grade
as follows:
270
Operation
d) Press or again, and the degradation is done successfully as
follows:
Note 1: The degradation operation cannot be executed when the current level is the 6th grade.
Note 2: The current password can be altered after degradation. When the system is in the high
level, the
degradation can be executed to set to the low-level password.
10.1.3 Parameter operation

The parameter data (state parameter, data parameter) can be backup (stored) and
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
recovered
(read). Programs can be stored in the CNC when the backup or recovery is executed. The
display is
shown below:
1) Option explanation:
Backup current parameters (user): the user to backup the CNC data (store)
Resume backup parameters(user): the user resumes the backup data (read)
Resume parameter 1(servo 1u level): the user reads the original parameter data matched
271
Operation
with the servo drive with the precision 1um
Resume parameter 2(stepper 1u level): the user reads the original parameter data
matched
with the stepper drive
Resume parameter 3(servo 0.1u level): the user reads the original parameter data
matched
with the servo drive with the precision 0.1um
Note: When the level is the 2nd grade, the backuping current parameters (user ) and resuming
backup
parameters (user) become backuping current parameters (machine manufacturer) and resuming
backup
parameters (machine manufacturer), which is used to backup and resume the manufacturers
data.
2) Operation methods:
a) Open the parameter switch;
b) Press to enter the MDI mode, move the cursor the required item;
c) Press or simultaneously press , , and the system prompts
whether to confirm the current operation.
d) Press againor , and the system prompts the backup or resume is
done successfully. When the recovery is done, the system prompts power-on again.
Note: Dont turn off the system and execute other operations when the backup or resuming is
executed.
10.2 Clock Setting

Press and then to enter the system clock page. The operator can alter the
current data and time as follows:
Press to enter the alteration mode, press , to move the cursor to the required
modification (Year/Month/Date/Minute/Second), input directly numbers, and press , then
to escape from the alteration mode.
272
Operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
10.3 Graphic Display

Press key to enter the path page as follows:
Press to open the next page menu as follows:
1) The START, STOP and CLEAR of the graphic path
In the path display page, press the (or ) and the system starts the drawing;
press (or ) , it stops drawing; press (or ), it clears the current
graphic path.
When the path exceeds the display range during automatic graph, the system regulate the
graphic center following the tool nose position in real time. Press or and the
display area is locked, the system does not regulate the graphic center on when the path
273
Operation
exceeds the display area. Press or and the system releases the lock.
2) Scaling up and down
In the path display page, press (or ), (or ), the system scales
up/down the path in real time. Press (or ) each time, the graphic path is scaled up
2 fold, press (or ) each time, the graphic path is scaled down 2 fold.
3) Path display moving
In the graph display page, press the cursor movement key to move the graphic path.
Press (or )to adjust mobile intervals.
4) Graphic attribution display
In the path display page, press (or ) to display the graphic attribution window,
including the current coordinate system, translation position, scaling and mobile interval. It
is shown
below:
Press or again to close the graph attribution window.
5) Graphic parameter meaning
Coordinate system setting: 8 types of graphic paths can be displayed in thisTAC-1002T
CNC
system according to the front or rear tool post coordinate system, and there is 4 kinds of
path as
follows: (switch X, Z axis by pressing or )
Bit parameter No.175
Bit1 Bit0
Graphic path coordinate display
274
Operation
Bit1 Bit0
00
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
01
10
275
Operation
Bit1 Bit0
11

Parameter setting can adjust related characteristics of the drive unit and machine.
Press to enter Parameter interface which includes , , ,
as follows:
10.4.1 State parameter

1) Byte alteration:
a) Turn on the parameter switch;
b) Enter the MDI mode;
c) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set:
276
Operation
Method 1: Press or to enter the page containing the parameter to be set, press
or key to move the cursor to the parameter number to be set;
Method 2: Press (or ) , and input the parameter number in the
pop-up dialogue box, at last, press .
4) Key in a new parameter value;
5) Press key, the parameter value is entered and displayed.
6) For security, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF after all parameter settings are
finished.
Example:
Set the bit parameter No.001 Bit 3(STEP/MPG) to 1, and the other bits remain
unchanged.
Move the cursor to No.001, input 00011000 by sequence according to the above steps.
The
display is shown below:
Press to finish the parameter alteration. The page is shown below:
277
Operation
2) Alteration by bit:
a) Turn on the parameter switch;
b) Enter the MDI mode;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
c) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be setthe method is referred to Section
10.4.1 Step c;
d) Press to enter the bit alteration mode, at the moment, some bit of the parameter
is backlighted. Press or to move the cursor to the bit to be altered, then key in 0 or
1;
e) After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for
security.
Note: After the system enters some bit of the parameter, is pressed to escape from the
alteration mode, and the cursor stops the parameter number .
Example:
Set the Bit3 of the bit parameter No.001 to 1, and the other bits remains unchanged.
Move the cursor to No.001 according to the above steps, press to skip to some bit of the
parameter, and move the cursor to Bit3. The display is shown below:
278
Operation
Input 1, and the parameter alteration is done.
10.4.2 Data parameter, pitch compensation

1) Turn on the parameter switch;
2) Enter the MDI mode;
3) Move the cursor to the No. of the parameter to be set;
4) Key in the new parameter value;
5) Press key, the value is entered and displayed;
6) After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for
security.
Explanation: The screw-pitch parameter can only be altered under the 2 level password authority.
Example 1: set the data parameter No.027 to 7600.
279
Operation
Move the cursor to No.027 by the steps above, key in 7600 by sequence as follows:
Press to finish the alteration. The display is shown below:
Example 2: set X value of the screw-pitch parameter No.000 to 12.
Move the cursor to screw-pitch parameter No.000 by the steps above, key in 12 in order
as
follows:
280
Operation
Press key to finish the alteration. The display page is shown below:
10.4.3 Often used parameters

Press to enter parameter interface, and press to enter the often used parameter
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
page. The page is shown below:

281
Operation
The user can add the often used state parameter, data parameters to the often used
parameters
to get the convenient search and alteration.
1) Adding often used parameters
a) In the state parameter page, press to enter the state parameter menu. The
page is shown below:
b) Move the cursor to the required addition parameter number (taking example of No.003),
press , and the current parameter becomes the often used. The added is
automatically sorted in the last line. The page is shown below:
282
Operation
At the moment, pressing , , can adjust the parameter sorting
position.
Note: The addition method of data parameter is similar to that of state parameter.
2) Sorting often used parameters
Pressing , can move the parameter where the current cursor is. Pressing
sorts all often used parameter in sequence number.
3) Removing often used parameters
Move the cursor to the required parameter in the often used parameter page. Press
and the current often used parameter is removed. Press and all often used parameters are removed.
4) Altering often used parameter
Parameters can be altered directly in the often used parameter page. Its alteration
method is the same that of state parameter and data parameter. Its value is also refreshed
in the state parameter or data parameter page.
Chapter 13 Communication
283
Operation
CHAPTER 11 U OPERATION FUNCTION
11.1 File Management Function Introduction

TAC-100XT has the file management function to execute the file copy, data backup, data
resume, the system upgrading (2nd grade) and so on.
In any states, press to select the setting interface, press to enter the file
management page. Insert U disk and the system automatically identifies it. The system
displays the
icon at the lower right bottom of the system after it sucessfully identifies the icon as
follows:
Press the soft key (or ) to select the CNC catalog or the U disk catalog, and
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
press , to move the line where the current cursor is.
11.2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction
11.2.1 File extension and return

1) Move the cursor to the required extension file, press to extend it as follows:
Display the user
parameters, tool
compensation, pitch
compensation, PLC
programs, part
program and so on
in the CNC catalog
window
Display all files
in the U disk
catalog
window
284
Operation
2) Move the cursor to the target file, press to return the previous catalog of the current
file as follow:
11.2.2 File selection and cancellation of file selection

Take an example of U:\TAC-100XT_backup\user\NCPROG\O0010.CNC to introduce the
selection and
cancellation.
1) Press to select setting interface, press to enter the file management
page as follows:
285
Operation
2) Move the cursor to O0101.CNC as follows:
3) Press or to select O0101.CNC as follows:
286
Operation
4) Press (or again ) to cancel the selection of O0101.CNC.
11.2.3 File copy

Refer to Section 11.2.2 to select the file. When the cursor is in the U disk catalog window,
is pressed and the the files in the U disk is copied to the CNC; when the cursor is in the
CNC catalog
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
window, is pressed and the file in the CNC is copied to the U disk.
11.3 Data Copy and Resume

In the file managemetn page, backup, resume the CNC data (including the system
parameters,
part parameter, tool compensation, pitch compensation, ladder parameters, ladder, alarm
log and so
on) via the U disk.
11.3.1 Entering backup/resume page

After the system identifies the U disk, it enters the file management page. Press to
enter the backup/resume page as follows:
287
Operation
11.3.2 Backup/resume operation

1) Press , , , to move the cursor to the required option;
2) Press or to select the required option to be backup/resumed;
3) Press (or ) to cancel the selection when the cursor has been in the
selected option;
4) Press or to select or cancel all selection;
5) Press or to execute the current selected.
Note 1: Data which has been backup or has been done to store in the U disk can be resumed.
Note 2: When the cursor is in the BACKUP OPTION column, all options in the the RESUME
OPTION
column cannot be selected; when the cursor is in the RESUME OPTOIN, all options in the
BACKUP
OPTION column cannot be selected;
Note 3: Pressing executes operations only in the column where the cursor is. When the cursor
is in BACKUP OPTION column, the resume operation is executed. The backup, resume cannot
be executed
simultaneously.
11.3.3 Operation path selection

When the user uses the U disk to execute the CNC data backup, the CNC creates a
backup file
TAC-100XT_backup in the root catalog of the U disk. The backup file includes two
backup data U:\
TAC-100XT_backup\user and U:\TAC-1002T_backup\serial number (it is created by
the systems
serial number). When the user uses one U disk to execute data backup of many CNC
systems, the
data in U:\TAC-1002T_backup\user is replaced by the new but data in
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
U:\TAC-1002T_backup\serial
288
Operation
number remains unchanged.
For the above reason, the user should execute the operation path selection during
resuming
data:
Default path U:\TAC-1002T_backup\user
Serial number pathU:\TAC-1002T_backup\serial number
Example: backup/resume data of many CNC systems
When the user backups the system A (serial number CT0000001), the generated file by
data
backup is U:\TAC-100XT_backup\CT0000001 and U:\TAC-100XT_backup\user; When
the user
backups the system B serial number CT0000002 , the generated file by data backup
is
U:\TAC-100XT_backup\CT0000002. The U:\TAC-100XT_backup\user generated by A
is replaced
automatically by the same name of the system B. At the moment, the user can execute
the operation
path selection when it executes the data resume operation of the system A:
1) When the previous data of the system A is resumed, the operation path is :
U:\TAC-100XT_backup\CT0000001
2) When the backup data of the system B is copied to the system A, the operation path is:
U:\TAC-100XT_backup\CT0000002 or default path;
Press and appear the dialog box of operation path selection, and then select the
operation path by , when the cursor is in the resume column. Taking an example of
selecting the default path, the display is shown below:
11.3.4 Format of data backup/resume file

File Extensio
n name
Content
Parameter file PARAM .PAR State parameters, data
parameters
Tool compensation
data TOFF .CMP Tool offset, tool wear
Pitch compensation WOFF .WMP Pitch compensation
289
Operation
Alarm log Alarm.his .his Alarm log
PLC program No
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
requirements .ld2 PLC programs

PLC parameter plcpar .dat K, D, DT, DC parameters
Part program O0000~O9999 .CNC Part programs
11.3.5 Level explanation of data backup/resume operation

System
parameters More than the 5th grade password
Tool
compensation
data
More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
password
Pitch
compensation
password
Alarm log More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
password
PLC programs More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
password
password
Backup
operation
Part programs More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
password
System
parameters
More than 3rd grade(including the 3rd grade)
password
Tool
compensation
data
password
Pitch
compensation
More than 2nd grade(including the 2nd grade)
password
password
PLC
parameters
More than 2nd grade(including the 2nd grade)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
password
Resume
operation
Part programs More than 4th grade(including the 4th grade)
password
11.4 Notes
The user should pay more attention to the followings during executing the data
backup/resume
operation:
1) Need more than the 2nd grade password(including the 2nd grade) to resume more than
(including be equal to) 9000 part programs;
2) Backup/resume operation must be in MDI mode;
3) When the user executes the data backup operation, the system automatically replaces
all
files in U:\TAC-100XT_backup\user, the user should save them as when they cannot be
replaced;
4) Stop part programs running before data backup/resume;
5) They must not stop unless the data backup/resume operation is completed;
6) The system is turned on again after the data resume is done.
290
Operation
CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATION
12.1TAC-1002T Communication Software TOMATECHComm

TOMATECHComm is an allocated project administrator. It can execute the
upload/download between
PC and CNC, conveniently transmit batch with easy operation, high communication
efficiency and
reliability.
The followings introduce communication transmission and setting betweenTAC-1002T
and
TOMATECHComm. Refer to TOMATECHComm explanations about TOMATECHComm
communication software functions.
12.1.1 TOMATECHComms system (PC) requirements

Hardware: general PC with RS232 serial port, serial communication cable (3-wire)
Operation system: Microsoft Windows 98/2000/XP/2003
12.1.2 Software interface

Interface after TOMATECHComms initial run:
Fig. 12-1 file downloadPCCNCinterface
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
TOMATECHComm software takes an administrator as a unit to complete management.

When it run
firstly, it does not upload project files, at the moment, the user should create an project
program or
upload project to execute the communication operation. The display is shown below after
the an
project is created:
291
Operation
At the mode, the user can receive the files from the CNC to the current project or send
files in the
current project to the CNC.
12.1.3 Receiving files (CNCPC)

Click the option [Receive files from CNC] in [Communication] and TOMATECHComm can
receive files
from the CNC after the current project is selected as follows:
After [Receive Files ] is clicked, a dialog box about receiving files from the CNC, the
required files
from the CNC including part programs, tool compensation (TOFF. CMP), pitch
compensation
(WOFF.WMP), parameters (PARAM.PAR).
292
Operation
After the user selects the required file, [ Start Receiving ] is pressed and the system pops
up a
path selection dialog box to save the received files as follows:
Select the save path, start to receive the file from CNC to PC by pressing [, i.e.
Confirm] as
follows:
293
Operation
After the receiving is done, the system displays below:
12.1.4 Sending files (CNCPC)

After the current project file is selected, the user clicks [Send projects to CNC] in the menu
[Communication], and so the receiving file from CNC is done. A dialog box to send files to
CNC is
popped up as follows:
294
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Operation
Hereby, the user can select the required receiving files from CNC including part programs,
tool
compensation (TOFF.CMP), pitch compensation (WOFF.WMP), parameters (PARA.PAR).
The part
programs which can be altered are saved to the file name of the CNC. Move the cursor to
the part
program required to alter its program name, double-click the left key to pop up a dialog
box as Fig. A,
and the file which can be altered is saved the file name of the CNC (as Fig. B).
Fig. A Fig. B
Select the required file to the CNC and confirm the saved file name, then press [start
sending],
and the file is started to send to the CNC as follows:
When a file name in the CNC is the same that of the transmitting, a dialog box is popped
up to
select the covering, skipping the file or cancelling transmission as follows:
295
Operation
When the part program name which is has the same that of the transmitted file, the
covering
cannot be done, otherwise, the system pops up the wrong prompt as follows:
12.1.5 Part program management

Select the current project file, then click [Manage Part Programs] in the menu
[Communication] ,
and the part programs in the CNC are managed. The system pops up a dialog box to
manage part
programs in the CNC as follows:
296
Operation
Press [Delete File] and the selected part programs are deleted in the CNC after the
required
programs are selected.
Note: The program being used in the CNC cannot be deleted.
12.2 Preparatory before Communication
12.2.1 Communication cable connection

DB9 male plug is inserted into CN51 communication interface of the CNC, DB9 female
plug is
inserted in to DB9-male serial port (COM0 or COM1) of PC. Connect the communication
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
cable when
PC and CNC are turned off.
12.2.2 Communication setting baud rate

Setting the baud rate of communication ensures that the baud rate of PC is the same that
of the
CNC communication.
The communication baud of the serial port is set by No.044; click [Communication Setup]
in the
menu [Communication] and the system pops up a dialog box as follows:
Set the serial port and baud rate. The baud rate should be not less than 4800 when the
data is
transmitted between CNC and PC, the factory setting is :115200.
297
Operation
Note 1:TAC-1002T has no network function, and so it has no network setting in its
communication.
Note 2: Stop machining when the machining is being done to get the stable communication.
Note 3: Must not turn off during the data transmission, otherwise, it causes the mistaken data
transmission.
298
Operation
CHAPTER 13 MACHINING EXAMPLES

Machine a part by a bar stock with dimension 136mm180 mm, as follows:
4
Fig. 13-1
Machine it with 4 tools as follows:
Tool number Tool shape Explanation
No. 1
Outer circle rough turning tool
No. 2
Outer circle finish turning tool
No. 3
Grooving tool, tool width 3mm
Chapter 14 Machining Example
299
Operation
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Tool number Tool shape Explanation

No. 4
Threading tool, tool nose angle 60
13.1 Programming
Set up the workpiece coordinate system as Fig.13-1 according to the machining process
and the
codes introduced in this manual. The programming steps are as follows:
Name of the part program
G0 X150 Z50 Position to the safety height for tool change
M12 Clamp the chuck
M3 S800 Start the spindle with speed 800
M8 Turn on the cooling
___________T0101 Change for the No. 1 tool
G0 X136 Z2 Approach the part
G71 U0.5 R0.5 F200 Cut depth 2mm and retract 1mm
G71 P0060 Q0150 U0.25
W0.5
0.25mm pre-reserved in X axis, 0.5mm
machining allowance in Z axis
G0 X16 Approach to the end face of the part
G1 Z-23 Cut the 16 outer circle
X39.98 Cut the end face
W-33 Cut the 39.98 outer circle
X40 Cut the end face
W-30 Cut the 40 outer circle
G3 X80 W-20 R20 Cut the convex arc
G2 X120 W-20 R20 Cut the concave arc
G1 W-20 Cut the 120 outer circle
G1 X130 W-5 Cut the cone
G1 W-25 Cut the 130 outer circle
G0 X150 Z185
Rough cut end and back to the tool change
point
T0202
Change for the No.2 tool and execute its
offset
G70 P0060 Q0150 Fine cut cycle
300
Operation
G0 X150 Z185
Rough cut end and back to the tool change
point
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
T0303
offset
G0 Z-56 X42 Approach to the part
G1 X30 F100 Cut the 30 groove
G1 X37 F300 Return
G1 X40 W1.5 Chamfering
G0 X42 W30 Keep the width of the grooving
G1 X40
G1 X37 W1.5 Chamfering
G1 X10 Cut the 10 groove
G0 X17 Z-1
G1 X16
G1 X14 Z0 F200 Chamfering
G0 X150 Z50 Return to the tool change point
T0404 S100
Changing for the No. 4 tool and set the
spindle speed for 100
G0 X42 Z-20 Approach the part
G92 X39 W-34 F3 Thread-cutting cycle
X38 Feed 1mm for the 2nd cutting
X37 Feed 1mm for the 3rd cutting
X36.4 Feed 0.6mm for the 4th cutting
X36 Feed 0.4mm for the 5th cutting
G0 X150 Z50 Return to the tool change point
T0100 U0 W0
offset
M5 Turn off the spindle
M9 Turn off cooling
M13 Unclamp the chuck
M30 Program ends
301
Operation
13.2 Program Input
13.2.1 View a saved program

Press to enter program interface , and press to enter the local catalog page as
follows:
In above window the names of the programs saved can be viewed for renaming the new
program.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
13.2.2 Creating a new program

Enter the local catalog page in Edit mode, press address key , choose a name that is not
same with the ones in this window (i.e. 0001), key in the number key , , , and
to create a new program as follows:
302
Operation
Input the characters of the above edit program one by one and the editing program is
done.
13.3 Checkout a Program
13.3.1 Graphic setting

Press to enter graph interface as follows:
13.3.2 Program check

Press to enter graph display page. Press to enter Auto mode, press
to make the auxiliary function lock indicator , machine lock indicator , and dry
run indicator to enter the corresponding state. Press to start the drawing,
press to automatically run programs, check the program accuracy by displaying the tool
motion
path, and the display page is the following after the run is completed:
303
Operation
When there is error in the program path, analysize the error and alter the part program,
make
another checkout for the program by the method above till the error is eliminated..
13.4 Toolsetting and Running

1) Move the tool to a safe position, execute T0100 U0 W0 command in PROGRAM->MDI
page in MDI mode, and cancel the tool offset;
2) Move the tool to cut in the part end surface;
Z axis
X axis
178
135
3) Release the tool along X when Z does not move, and stop the spindle, execute G50 Z0
in
PROGRAM->MDI page in MDI mode to set the coordinate of Z axis;
4) Switch to tool offset page and input Z0 to No.001 offset;
5) Move the tool and make it to cut along the outer circle of the part;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
304
Operation
6) Release the tool along Z when X does not move, and stop the spindle, measure the
dimensions of the outer circle of the part (e.g. The measuring value is 135mm);
7) Execute G50 X135 command in PROGRAM>MDI page in MDI mode to set the
coordinate
of X axis;
8) Switch to tool offset page, and input X135 to No.001 offset;
9) Move the tool to a safe position, and change No. 002 tool;
10) Start the spindle and move the tool to the toolsetting point, as A point in the following
figure;
11) Switch to TOOL OFFSET window, move the cursor to No.002 offset and input X135
Z0;
12) Move the tool to a safe position, and change the No. 003 tool ;
13) Start the spindle and move the tool to the toolsetting point, as A point in the following
figure;
305
Operation
14) Switch to TOOL OFFSET window, move the cursor to No.003 offset and input X135
Z0;
15) Move the tool to a safe position, and to change the No. 004 tool;
16) Move the tool to the toolsetting point, as point A in the following figure;
17) Switch to tool offset, move the cursor to No.004 offset and input X135 Z0;
18) Move the tool to a safe position after the toolsetting is finished;
19) Start the machining in Auto mode;
20) If there is any error between the designed and the actual dimensions, the tool offset
may be
altered till the part dimensions are within the tolerance.
Note: Press key to make the auto running to pause if dwell is needed during the machining. Also
if
emergency occurs, the user presses the key, Emergency stop button to cut off the power to
terminate the program running.
306
Operation
Connection
Connection
Connection
Chapter 1 Installation Layout
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
307
CHAPTER 1 NSTALLATION LAYOUT

1.1 GK980TDc System Connection
1.1.1 GK980TDc,TAC-1002T-V rear cover interface layout
AXIS 5 SPINDLE
+5V
GND
INPUT
CN61
+12V
CN11
AXIS X
OUTPUT
CN62 CN15
CN13 CN12
AXIS Z AXIS Y
COM PORT
CN51
POWER SUPPLY
CN1
CN31
CN14 CN21
AXIS 4 ENCODER
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
-12V
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
+12V
-12V
TOMATECH-PB2
Power Supply
MPG
communication
Fig. 1-1TAC-1002T rear cover interface layout

CN15
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
INPUT
CN61
OUTPUT
CN62
AXIS Y
CN13
AXIS Z
CN12
AXIS X
COM PORT
CN11
CN14
AXIS 4
CN21
ENCODER
MPG
CN51
+24V -12V +12V
CN31
+5V +5V
0V 0V 0V +5V
CN1
Fig.1-2 TOMATECH 980TDc-V rear cover interface layout
308
Connection
1.1.2 Interface explanation
Power box: TOMATECH-PB2, for +5V, +24V, +12V, -12V, GND power supply
Filter(optional): Input terminals for 220V AC power, PE terminal for grounding, output
terminals to L, N terminals of TOMATECH-PB2 power box
CN1: power supply interface
CN11: X axispin15 D female, connect with X drive unit
CN12: Y axispin15 D female, connect with Y drive unit
CN13: Z axispin15 D female, connect with Z drive unit
CN14: 4th axispin15 D female, connect with 4th drive unit
CN15: spindle, pin 25 D female, connect with spindle drive unit
CN21: encoder, pin15 D male, connect with spindle encoder
CN31: MPG, pin26 D male, connect with MPG
CN51: communication, pin9 D female, connect PC RS232 interface
CN61: input, pin44 D male, connect with machine input
CN62: output, pin44 D female, connect with machine output
1.2TAC-1002T Installation
1.2.1TAC-1002T external dimensions
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
See Appendix , .
1.2.2 Preconditions of the cabinet installation
The dust, cooling liquid and organic resolution should be effectively prevented from
entering the
cabinet;
The designed distance between the CNC back cover and the cabinet should be not less
than
20cm, the inside and outside temperature difference of the cabinet should be not more
than 10
when the cabinet inside temperature rises;
Fans can be fixed in the cabinet to ventilate it;
The panel should be installed in a place where the cooling cant splash;
The external electrical interference should be taken into consideration in cabinet design
to
prevent it from interfering the CNC system.
1.2.3 Measures against interference
In order to insure the CNC stable working, the anti-interference technology such as space
electromagnetic radiation shielding, impact current absorbing, power mixed wave filtering
are
employed in CNC design. And the following measures are necessary during CNC
connection:
1. Make CNC far from the interference devices (inverter, AC contactor, static generator,
high-voltage generator and powered sectional devices etc.);
2. To supply the CNC via an isolation transformer, the machine with the CNC system
should be
grounded, the CNC and drive unit should be connected with independent grounding wires
at
the grounding point;
3. To inhibit interference: connect parallel RC circuit at both ends of AC winding (Fig.
1-3a), RC
circuit should approach to inductive loading as close as possible; reversely connect
parallel
freewheeling diode at both ends of DC winding (Fig. 1-3b); connect parallel surge
absorber at
the ends of AC motor winding (Fig. 1-3c);
Chapter 1 Installation Layout
309
Connection
a) b) c)
Fig. 1-3
4. The CNC leadout cables use the twisted shield cable or shield cable, the cable shield
tier is
grounded by an terminal at CNC side, signal cable should be as short as possible;
5. To reduce the mutual interference among the CNC signal cables, and among the strong
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
current, the wiring should follow the following:

Table 1-1 The Wiring requirement
Group Cable type Wiring requirement
AC power cable
A AC coil
AC contactor
Tie up A group cables with a clearance at least 10cm
from that of B, C groups, or shield A group cables from
electromagnetism
DC coil(24VDC)
DC relay(24VDC)
Cables between CNC and
strong-power cabinet
B
machine
Tie up B and A group cables separately or shield B
group cables; and the further B group cables are from
that of C group, the better it is
servo drive unit
Position feedback cable
Position encoder cable
HandwheelMPGcable
C
Other cables for shield
Tie up C and A group cables separately, or shield C
group cables; and the cable distance between C group
and B group is at least 10cm and they are twisted pair
cables.
310
Connection
CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION & CONNECTION OF INTERFACE
SIGNALS
2.1 Connection to Drive Unit

2.1.1 Drive interface definition
2.1.2 Code pulse and direction signals
nCP+, nCP- are code pulse signals, nDIR+, nDIR- are code direction signals. These two
group
signals are both differential output (AM26LS31), it is suggested to receive by AM26LS32
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
externally,
and the interior circuit for them is shown in Fig. 2-2:
Fig. 2-2 Interior circuit of code pulse and direction signals
2.1.3 Drive unit alarm signal nALM
The low or high level of the drive unit alarm is set by the CNC parameter No.009 Bit0, Bit1,
Bit2,
Bit3 and Bit4, its interior circuit is shown in Fig. 2-3:
Fig. 2-3 Interior circuit of drive unit alarm signal
This type of input circuit requires that the drive unit transmits signal by the types in Fig.
2-4:
Signal Explanation
nCP+, nCP- Code pulse signal
nDIR+, nDIR- Code direction signal
nPC Zero signal
nALM Drive unit alarm signal
nEN Axis enable signal
nSET Pulse disable signal
1: nCP+
2: nDIR+
3: nPC
4: +24V
5: nALM
6: nSET
7: nEN
8:
9: nCP-
10: nDIR-
11: 0V
12: +5V
13: +5V
14: 0V
15: 0V
Fig.2-1 CN11, CN12, CN13, CN14 interface
(15-core D type female socket)
+5V
nALM
+24V
INA Out A
Out A
INB Out B
Out B
nDIR +
nDIR
nCP +
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
nCP
nDIR
nCP
Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal
311
Connection
Type 1: Type 2:
Fig. 2-4 Signal types by drive unit
2.1.4 Axis enable signal nEN
nEN signal output is active as CNC works normally (nEN signal to 0V on); when the drive
unit
alarm or emergency alarm occurs, CNC cuts off nEN signal output (nEN signal to 0V off).
The interior
interface circuit is shown in Fig. 2-5:
Fig. 2-5 Interior interface circuit for axis enable signal
2.1.5 Pulse disable signal nSET
nSET signal is used to control servo input disable which can enhance the anti-disturbance
capability between CNC and drive unit. This signal is at low level if there is pulse output
from CNC,
high resistance if not. The interior interface circuit of it is shown in Fig. 2-6:
Fig. 2-6 Pulse disable signal circuit
2.1.6 Zero signal nPC
During machine zero return, the one-turn or proximity switch signal from the motor
encoder is
taken as zero signal. Its interior circuit is shown in Fig.2-7.
Fig. 2-7 Zero signal circuit
Note: nPC signal uses +24V level.
a) The wave of PC signal by user is shown in Fig. 2-8:
EN
ULN2803
nEN
SET
ULN2803
nSET
+5V
PC
nPC
312
Connection
Fig. 2-8 PC signal wave
Note: During the machine zero return, the CNC detects the jumping of the PC signal to judge the
reference
point after the DEC switch is detached, which is active in both rise edge and trailing edge of the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
wave.
b) The wiring of NPN Hall element taken as both DEC signal and zero signal is shown in
Fig. 2-9:
Fig. 2-9 Wiring by a NPN Hall element
c) The wiring of PNP Hall elements taken as both DEC signal and zero signal is shown in
Fig.
2-10:
Fig. 2-10 Wiring by a PNP Hall element
NPN Hall element
DECn
nPC
PNP+24V
PNP Hall element
nDEC
nDEC
nPC
+24V
313
Connection
2.1.7 Connection to a drive unit
TOMATECH 980TDc/TAC-100XT-V is connected with our drive unit, shown in Fig. 2-11:
980TDc side
(CN11,CN12, CN13, CN1 4)
GS2000T-N side CN1
nCP+ 1 2 PULS+
nCP - 9 17 PULS -
nDIR+ 2 1 SIGN+
nDIR - 10 16 SIGN -
n ALM 5 9 ALM+
nPC 3 29 ZOUT -
0V 14 23 SON
0V 11 24 COM-
25 ALM -
+24V 4 39 COM+
13 ZOUT+
Metal she ll
Metal she ll
Connection betweenTAC-1002T and GS2000T-N
economical servo unit
Note: On 980TDc side, interfaces CN11, CN12, CN13, CN14 adapts 2-stripe male plug;
while on
GS2000T-N side, CN1 adapts DB44 3-stripe male plug;
Metal shell
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
TAC-100XT(CN11,
CN12,CN13,CN14)
Connection betweenTAC-1002T and DA98 (A)

+
DA98(A)signal
interface
Metal shell
15
29
30
DA98B signal
interface
PULS+
SIGN+
PULSALM
SON
36
23
5
CZ+
38 COM+
37
32 DG
CZ-
14 SIGNnCPnCP+
nDIR+
nPC
nALM
+24
0V
10 nDIRConnection
betweenTAC-1002T and DA98B
TAC-100XT(CN11,
CN12,CN13,CN14)
Metal shell Metal shell
314
Connection
Connection betweenTAC-1002T and DY3
Metal shell
TAC-100XT(CN11,
CN12,CN13,CN14)
DY3 signal interface
Metal shell
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Connection betweenTAC-1002T and DF3

TAC-100XT(CN11,
CN12,CN13,CN14)
Metal shell
DF3 signal interface
Metal shell
Fig. 2-11 TOMATECH 980TDc/TAC-100XT-V CNC systems are connected with
TOMATECH drive unit
2.2 Being Connected with Spindle Encoder

2.2.1 Spindle encoder interface definition
2.2.2 Signal explanation
*PCS/PCS,*PBS/PBS,*PAS/PAS are the encoder C, B, A phases differential input signals
respectively, which are received by 26LS32; *PAS/PAS,*PBS/PBS are orthogonal square
wave with
phase shift 90and their maximum signal frequency is less than 1MHz; the encoder pulses
for
TAC-100XT are set at will by parameter, the setting range is from 100 to 5000.
Its interior circuit is shown in Fig. 2-13: (n=A, B, C)
Fig. 2-13 Encoder signal circuit
2.2.3 Being connected with spindle encoder interface
TAC-100XT/TAC-100XT-V is connected with spindle encoder shown in Fig. 2-14, and it
uses
twisted pair cables. (exemplified by CHANGCHUN YIGUANG ZLF-12-102.4BM-C05D
encoder):
Fig.2-12 CN21 encoder interface
(15-core D type male socket)
8: PAS
7: *PAS
6: PBS
5: *PBS
4: PCS
3: *PCS
15: 0V
14: 0V
13: +5V
12: 5V
11: 0V
PnS
*PnS
AM26LS32
Name Explanation
*PAS/PAS Encoder A phase pulse
*PBS/PBS Encoder B phase pulse
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
*PCS/PCS Encoder C phase pulse

315
Connection
Fig. 2-14TAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V is connected with the encoder
2.3 Being Connected with MPG (Manual Pulse Generator)

2.3.1 MPG interface definition
Fig. 2-15 CN31 MPG interface
(26-core DB type male socket)
Signal Explanation
HA+,HA- MPG A phase signal
HB+,HB- MPG B phase signal
+24V
+5V,0V DC power supply
Standard PLC Definition
Address Function
X6.0 X MPG axis selection
X6.1 Y MPG axis selection
X6.2 Z MPG axis selection
X6.3 increment1
X6.4 increment10
X6.5 increment100
2.3.2 Signal explanation
HA,HB are the MPG A, B phase input signals respectively. Their interior circuit is shown in
Fig.
2-16:
XHAR93
470R
XHB-
R96 470R
R98
1K
R94
1K
U57
TLP181
21
34
D49
1N4148
D47
1N4148
VCC
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
VCC
GND
GND
U55
TLP181
21
34
XHB+
XHA+
Fig. 2-16 MPG signal circuit

TAC-100XT/TAC-100XT-V is connected with MPG shown in Fig. 2-17:
316
Connection
11
14
3 HB+
HA+
+5V
HAHB-
2
4
Metal shell
TAC-100XT(CN31) MPG
Null
B
-
B
+A-
4
2
HBHANull
3 HB+
14
11
Metal shell
TAC-100XT(CN31)
HA+
A+
MPG
Fig. 2-17TAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V is connected with MPG
2.4 Spindle Interface

2.4.1 Spindle interface definition
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Note 1: It is valid when PC5 is connected with 0V, and it is different with other feed axes(it is valid
when PC
of CN11CN14 axis interface is connected with +24V).
Note 2: They are valid when X5.0X5.3 are connected with 0V, and they are different with other
input
signals( other are valid when they are connected with +24V).
Note 3: The internal circuit of PC5X5.0~X5.3 signals are shown below:
Fig. 2-19 PC5, X5.0X5.3 circuit
CP5+,CP5- Spindle pulse signal
DIR5+,DIR5- Spindle direction signal
ALM5 Spindle alarm signal
RDY5 Spindle ready signal
PC5 Spindle zero signal
SVC-OUT1 Analog voltage output 1
SVC-OUT2 Analog voltage output 2
SET5 Spindle setting signal
EN5 Spindle enabling signal
X5.0~X5.3 PLC addressonly LOW is valid
Y5.0~Y5.3 PLC address
Fig. 2-18 CN15 spindle interfaceDB25 female
1CP5+
2DIR5+
3GND
4ALM5
5X5.0
6X5.1
7RDY5
8X5.2
9GND
10PC5
11+24V
12GND
13SVC-OUT1
14CP5-
15DIR5-
16GND
17+24V
18SET5
19EN5
20Y5.0
21Y5.1
22Y5.2
23Y5.3
24SVC-OUT2
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
25GND
317
Connection
2.4.2 Connection to inverter
The analog spindle interface SVC may output 0~10V voltage, its interior signal circuit is
shown in
Fig. 2-20:
Fig. 2-20 SVC signal circuit
TAC-100XT is connected with the inverter shown in Fig. 2-21:
Fig. 2-21TAC-1002TTAC-100XT-V is connected with the inverter
2.5TAC-1002TTAC-100XT-V being Connected with PC

2.5.1 Communication interface definition
Fig. 2-22 CN51 communication interface (DB9-female)
2.5.2 Communication interface connection
TAC-100XT TAC-1002T-V can perform the communication by CN51 and PC(optional
communication software).TAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V is connected with PC shown in Fig
2-23A:
TAC-100XT(CN51)
Metal shell
RS232 interface on PC
Metal shell
Fig. 2-23ATAC-1002T is connected with PC
Signal Explanation
RXD Receiving data
TXD Transmitting data
GND Signal grounding
6:
7:
8:
9:
1:
2: RXD
3: TXD
4:
5: GND
SVC
318
Connection
2.6 Power Interface Connection

TOMATECH-PB2 power box is applied inTAC-1002T system, which involves 4 groups of
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
voltage:
+5V(3A) ,+12V(1A) ,-12V(0.5A) ,+24V(0.5A) , and its common terminal is COM(0V) . The
connection
of TOMATECH-PB2 power box toTAC-1002T XS2 interface has been done for its delivery
from factory, and
the user only need to connect it to a 220V AC power in using.
+ 5 V
+ 5 V
0 V
+ 5 V
+ 1 2 V
0 V
- 1 2 V
0 V
+ 2 4 V
Fig. 2-24 system power interface CN1
2.7 I/O Interface Definition
Note!
The I/O function significances of the unlabelled fixed addresses of
thisTAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V turning machine CNC system are
defined by PLC programs (ladders), and they are defined by the
machine builder when matching with a machine, please refer to the
manual by the machine builder.
The fixed address I/O function not be marked are described for
TAC-100XT PLC. The described contents without other special
explanation are also applied toTAC-1002T-V.
319
Connec
Subscript Address Function Explanation
21 ~ 24 0V Power interface Controller internal 0V
18 ~ 20
empty empty empty
25 ~ 28
1 X0.0 SAGT Protective door detection signal
2 X0.1 SP External pause
3 X0.2 THAN External tool clamp/unclamp
4 X0.3 DECX X axis homing decelerate signal

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
5 X0.4 DITW Tailstock for/backward
6 X0.5 KYP Emergency stop buttom
7 X0.6 LIMU Overtravel release signal
8 X0.7 T05 Tool signal T05
12 X1.3 DECZ Z axis homing decelerate signal
13 X1.4 ST External cycle start signal
14 X1.5 M41I Spindle the 1st gear on position signal
15 X1.6 M42I Spindle the 2nd gear on position signal
32 X2.3 DECY Y axis homing decelerate signal
33 X2.4 DEC4 The 4th axis homing decelerate signal
34 X2.5 DEC5 The 5th axis homing decelerate signal
35 X2.6 TCP Turret clamp signal
36 X2.7 VP02 The 2nd spindle speed/position control mode
37 X3.0 LMIX X axis overtravel input
38 X3.1 LMIY Y axis overtravel input
39 X3.2 LMIZ Z axis overtravel input
40 X3.3 WQPJ Inner/outer chuck unclamp/clamp on position
41 X3.4 NQPJ Inner/outer chuck clamp/unclamp on position
42 X3.5 SKIP C31 skip signal
43 X3.6 LMI4 4th axis overtravel input

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
44 X3.7 LMI5 5th axis overtravel input
tion
Fig.2-25 input
Connection
Fig.2-26 output interface
(CN62)
2.7.1 Input signal
Input signal means the signal from machine to CNC, when this signal is through on with
+24V,
the input is active; when it is off with +24V, the input is inactive. The contact of input signal
at machine
side should meet the following conditions:
2.7.2 Output signal
The output signal is used for the machine relay and indicator, if it is through on with 0V,
the output function is active; if it is off with 0V, the output function is inactive. There are 36
digital volume outputs that they all have the same structure in I/O interface as shown in
Fig. 2-29:
Subscript Address Function Explanation
17 ~ 19
0V Power interface Controller Internal 0V
26 ~ 28
20 ~ 25 +24V Power interface Controller Internal 24V
1 Y0.0 COOL Coolant output
2 Y 0.1 M32 Lubrication output
3 Y 0.2 Reserve
4 Y 0.3 M03 Spindle anticlockwise rotation (forward)
5 Y 0.4 M04 Spindle clockwise rotation (reversal)
6 Y 0.5 M05 Spindle stop
7 Y 0.6 SCLP Spindle clamp
8 Y 0.7 SPZD Spindle brake

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
9 Y 1.0 S1/M41 Spindle mechanical gear output 1
13 Y 1.4 DOQPJ Chuck clamp output
14 Y 1.5 DOQPS Chuck unclamp output
15 Y 1.6 TL+ Turret cw
16 Y 1.7 TL- Turret ccw
29 Y 2.0 TZD Turret brake
30 Y 2.1 INDXS Turret pre-indexing coil
31 Y 2.2 CLPY Three - color light yellow light
32 Y 2.3 CLPG Three color light green light
33 Y 2.4 CLPR Three color light red light
34 Y 2.5 DOTWJ Tailstock forward
35 Y 2.6 DOTWS Tailstock backward
36 Y 2.7 VP2 Spindle 2nd speed/position control output
37 Y 3.0 SVF Spindle servo enable close
38 Y 3.1 HPST Hydraulic turn on
39 Y 3.2 TAP2 The 2nd spindle speed loop
40 Y 3.3 M63 The 2nd cw
41 Y 3.4 M64 The 2nd ccw
42 Y 3.5 Reserve
43 Y 3.6 Reserve
44 Y 3.7 Reserve
Connection
Fig. 2-29 Circuit for digital volume output module
The logic signal OUTx output from the main board is sent to the input terminal of inverter
(ULN2803) via a connector. And there are 2 types for nOUTx output: 0V, or high
impedance. Its
typical application is as follows:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
To drive LED
A serial resistance is needed to limit the current (usually 10mA) that goes through the LED
by
using ULN2803 output to drive LED, which is shown in Fig. 2-30:
Fig. 2-30
To drive filament indicator
An external preheat resistance is needed to decrease the current impact at power on by
using
ULN2803 output to drive filament indicator, and this resistance value should be within a
range that the
indicator cannot be lighted up as shown in Fig. 2-31:
CNC side Machine +24V
side
ULN2803
output
+24V
Machine
side
CNC side
Relay
ULN2803
output
Fig. 2-31 Fig.2-32

To drive inductive load (such as relay)
To use ULN2803 output to drive an inductive load, it requires to connect a freewheeling
diode
near the coil to protect output circuit and reduce interference as shown in Fig. 2-32:
The significances of the output signal of I/O interface are defined by PLC program, these
signals
include S1S4 (M41M44), M3, M4, M5, M8, M10, M11, M32, TL-, TL+, U00U05,
DOQPJ,
DOQPS, SPZD signals etc.. And their common terminal is +24V.
323
Connection
2.8 I/O Function and Connection

2.8.1 Stroke limit and emergency stop
Relevant signal
ESP: emergency stop signal, alarm issued if the system is not connected with +24V
LMIX: X overtravel limit check input
LMIY: Y overtravel limit check input
LMIZ: Z overtravel limit check input
Diagnosis data
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 0 0 ESP
Pin CN61.6
Signal diagnosis
Signal ESP LMIX LMIY LMIZ
Diagnosis address X0.5 X3.0 X3.1 X3.2
Interface pin CN61.6 CN61.37 CN61.38 CN61.39
Control parameter
Bit parameter
1 7 2 ESP
ESP =0: Check ESP signal
=1: Do not check ESP signal
PLC bit parameter
K 1 0 LMIT LMIS
LMIT =1: Travel limit check function of each axis is valid.
=0: Travel limit check function of each axis is invalid
LMIS =1: The system alarms for overtravel when the travel limit check signal is not
connected
with +24V.
=0: The system alarms for overtravel when the travel limit check signal is connected with
+24V
Signal connection
The ESP signal circuit is shown in Fig.2-33:
Note
The I/O function significance of thisTAC-1002T TAC-100XT-V turning
machine CNC system is defined by PLC programs (ladders), and they are
defined by
the machine builder when matching with a machine, please refer to the manual
by
the machine builder.
The fixed address I/O function not be marked are described forTAC-1002T
PLC. The described contents without other special explanation are also
applied to
TAC-100XT-V.
324
Connection
Fig. 2-33 ESP signal circuit
Machine external connection
(1) The series connection between the emergency stop and travel switch is shown in Fig.
2-34A:
Fig.2-34A Series connection between emergency stop and travel switch
(2) The separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch is shown in
Fig.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2-34B:
Fig. 2-34B Separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch
Control logic
(1) Series connection between the emergency stop and travel switch
When the contact of the emergency stop switch is cut off, the ESP signal is off to +24V,
and CNC
makes an emergency alarm. Meanwhile the CNC turns off the enable (EN) signal to stop
the pulse
output. Except the functions processed by NC, other functions can also be defined by PLC
program
when the emergency alarm is issued. The function defined by standard PLC program is:
when
emergency alarm is issued, it turns off the signal output of M03, M04, M08, and outputs
M05 signal at
the same time.
(2) Separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch
1. Each axis has only one overtravel contact, and the system judges the overtravel alarm
based on the axis movement direction.
2. When the system alarms for the overtravel, the axis moves reversely, the reset key is
pressed to clear the alarm after the axis exceeds the limit position.
Note: Before the overtravel limit function is enabled, the slider must be between the positive and
the negative
limit; otherwise, the prompted alarm will not be consistent with actual situation.
325
Connection
2.8.2 Tool change control
Relevant signals (by standard PLC program)
Signal
type
Code Interface Address Function Remark
T01 CN61.16 X1.7 Tool signal 1Sensor ALiuxin Tool Post
T02 CN61.29 X2.0 Tool signal 2Sensor BLiuxin Tool Post
T03 CN61.30 X2.1 Tool signal 3Sensor CLiuxin Tool Post
T04 CN61.31 X2.2 Tool signal 4Sensor DLiuxin Tool Post
T05 CN61.08 X0.7 Tool signal 5Sensor ELiuxin Tool Post
Also as
OV1 input
T06 CN61.09 X1.0
Tool signal 6/strobe signalYantai AK31
/Sensor FLiuxin Tool Post
Also as
OV2 input
T07 CN61.10 X1.1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Tool signal7/pre-graduation proximity switch

Yantai AK31
Also as
OV3 input
T08 CN61.11 X1.2
Tool signal8/tool post worktable overheat
checkYantai AK31
Also as
OV4 input
Input
signal
TCP CN61.35 X2.6 Tool post locking signal
TL+ CN62.15 Y1.6 Tool post rotation(CW) signal
TL- CN62.16 Y1.7 Tool post rotation(CCW) signal
TZD/TLS CN62.29 Y2.0
Tool post worktabke brakeYantai AK31
tool pot releasingLiuxin Tool Post
Output
signal
INDXS/
TCLP
CN62.30 Y2.1
Tool post worktable pregraduation coil Yantai
AK31tool pot lockLiuxin Tool Post
Control parameter
Bit parameter
K 1 1 CHOT CHET TCPS CTCP TSGN CHTB CHTA
CHTA: tool change mode selection bit 0
CHTB: tool change mode selection bit 1see following table
TSGN =0 : tool signal HIGH(turn on +24V) is valid
=1 : tool signal LOW(turn off +24V) is valid
CTCP =0 : do not check tool post locking signal
=1 : check tool post locking signal
TCPS =0 : tool post locking signal LOW(turn off +24V) is valid
=1 : tool post locking signal HIGH(turn on +24V) is valid
CHET=0 : do not check tool signal after the tool change is completed
CHTB CHTA Tool post type
0 0 Standard tool change mode B
0 1 Standard tool change mode A
1 0 Yantai AK31
1 1 Unused
326
Connection
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
=1 : check tool signal after the tool change is completed

CHOT=0 : do not check tool post overheat
=1 : check tool post worktable overheat
D T 0 4 TLMAXT
The maximum time limit for tool change
D T 0 7 T1TIME
Tool change time T1: Tool post delay time from CCW stop to CW output (ms)
D T 0 8 TCPCKT
Tool post lock signal detection time (ms)
D T 0 9 TCPTIME
Tool change time T2: tool post CW rotation locking time
0 0 8 4 TMAX
Total tools selection
Signal connection
1. The T01T08, TCP signals input are employed with photocoupler, its interior circuit is
shown
in Fig. 2-35:
Fig. 2-35
2. TL+, TL- are tool post CCW/CW output signal, its interior circuit is shown in Fig.2-36:
Fig. 2-36
3. The external circuit of the tool number signal is shown in Fig. 2-37, when the tool
number
signal is low level active, it requires an external pull-up resistor.
+24V
ULN2803
TL+/TLCNC
sCiNdCe
Output signal
Machine side
327
Connection
Fig. 2-37
Function description (defined by standard PLC program)
The control sequence and control logic of the tool change are defined by PLC program.
There
are 4 tool change modes defined as follows by standard PLC program:
1. CHTB (K11.1)=0, CHTA (K11.0)=0: tool change mode B
During the tool change process, CNC outputs TL+ signal until the tool in-position signal
is
detected, then CNC turns off TL+ signal output and outputs TL- signal after a delay time
specified by data parameter No.082. Then CNC detects TCP signal till it is detected, the
CNC
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
turns off TL- signal after a delay time specified by the data parameter No.085. So the tool
change
is over.
When CHET(K0011.5) is set to 1(check tool signal after the tool change ends) and the
tool
post (CCW) rotation time ends to confirm whether the current tool input signal is
consistent with
the current tool No., if not, the system alarms.
The tool change process ends.
After the system outputs the tool post rotation(CCW)signal, if the CNC doesnt receive
the
TCP signal within the time set by DT08, an alarm will be issued and the TL- signal will be
turned
off.
When the tool post has no tool post locking signal, CTCP(K0011.3) is set to 0, at the
time,
the system does not check the tool post locking signal.
DT09
DT08
DT07
TLTCP
T1~T8
TL+
Sequence of tool change mode B
2. CHTB (K11.1)=0CHTA (K11.0)=1: tool change mode A:
After the tool change is executed, the system outputs the tool rotation(CW)signal TL+
and
checks the tool in-position signal, and then after it has checked the tool signal and closes
TL+,
last checks whether the tool signal skips, if done, it outputs the tool rotation (CCW) signal
TL-.
Then, the system checks the locking signal TCP, it delays the time set by DT09 and
closes
CNC side Machine side
Hall switch
328
Connection
TL- after it has received the TCP;
When CHETK0011.5is set to 1check tool signal after the tool change ends
the system
confirms whether the current tool input signal is consistent with the current tool number
after the
tool post (CCW) rotation time ends, if not, the system alarms;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
The tool change process ends.

After the system outputs the too rotation(CCW) signal, when it has not received TCP
signal in
the time set by DT08, it alarms and closes TCP signal.
If the tool post has no locking signal, CTCPK0011.3is set to 0at the time, the
system does
not check the tool post locking signal.
TL+
T1~T8
TCP
TL- DT08
DT09
Sequence of tool change mode A

Note 1: DT07 setting is invalid, the system does not check in the delay time between the tool post
(CW)stop
and the tool post (CCW) rotation locked.
Note 2: Except for DT07, relative parameter setting and function of other tool post control are
valid.
3.CHTB=1CHTA =0 : Yantai AK31 series (6, 8, 10, 12 tools) Chanzhou SBWD-80
a). Tool change process
. Ensure the tool post brake TZD signal is turned on.
.The system executes the shortest path judge based on the target tool no. and the
current tool
no., and selects the rotation direction of the output according to the nearby tool selection,
outputs the
positive signal(TL+) or negative signal (TL-), and the tool post rotates to select the tool.
.During the rotation, the system decodes to identify the current tool no. based on the
tool
encoding signal T1~T4 input. When it rotates to the previous tool before the target tool no,.
it checks
the skip of the tool post strobe signal. The strobe signal of the previous signal before the
target tool no.
executes the falling edge, the system outputs pregraduation electromagnetic signal of the
tool post,
and the electromagnet is turned on.
.When the input signal of the pregraduation proximity input signal of the tool post is
HIGH, the
system closes the tool post rotation output signal (TL+ or TL-), and the motor stops.
.After the system delays 50ms, it outputs the signal(TL- or TL+) which is reverse to the
previous rotation direction and the tool post rotates reversely.
.When the proximity input signal of the tool post locked is HIGH, the system closes the
rotation
signal(TL-, TL+), and the motor stops. Then the system outputs the tool post brake signal
TZD, and
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the motor brake is turned on.

.When the system delays 200msit closes the pregraduation electromagnetic output
signal,
and then the electromagnet is turned off.
.The system checks the current tool no. again and confirms whether the encoding signal
of the
329
Connection
current tool is consistent with the target tool no..
.The system confirms again whether the locked proximity switch signal is HIGH.
.When the above steps are correct, the system closes the tool post brake signal TZD,
and so
the tool change is completed.
.In the course of the tool change, when the system has found the motor overheat signal,
it
alarms and closes output of all signals.
b). Tool change flow
330
Connection
331
Connection
4. CHTB (K11.1)=1CHTA(K11.0)=1: Liuxin hydraulic tool post
4.1 . Corresponding table between position and signal
8-tool:
12345678
A
B
C
D
E
10-tool:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
C
D
E
12-tool:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
B
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
C
D
E
4.2 Signal specification
Sensor A, B, C, D: only check the tool, and are not any start signals
Sensor E: it executes the inductive once when one tool change is executed, which makes
the
tool pot stop and the start signal be locked. When the tool pot rotates to the required
position, Sensor is inductive, i.e. the electromagnet to control the tool pot rotation is
turned off, which makes the tool stop rotation and start the electromagnet to lock the
tool pot to ensure that the tool pot is locked.
Sensor F: releasing/lock confirmation signal. When it is not inductive, the tool pot is
released, at
the time, the tool pot is started to rotate. When it is not inductive, the tool pot is locked,
i.e. the tool change is completed.
Sol A: control the tool pot releasing/locking
Sol B: control the tool pot rotation(CW/CCW)
4.3 Tool change process description
Example: No. 1 tool is changed into No. 4 tool
Step 1: Sol A is turned on(tool pot is released)
Step 2: Ensure Sensor F is not inductive, Sol B is turned and the oil hydraulic motor
rotates
Step 3: check the tool signal(Note: Sensor E is inductive for No. 1, 2, 3 tool, does not
execute the
locking operation when the tool pot does not reach No. 4 tool). When No. 3 tool signal is
confirmed,
Sensor E preparatory operation should be set to make the tool pot rotate to No.4 tool, at
the time,
Sensor E is inductive, i.e. Sol B is turned on, the tool pot stops rotation and Sol A makes
the tool pot
be locked.
332
Connection
2.8.3 Machine zero return
Relative signal
DECX: X deceleration signal
DECY: Y deceleration signal
DECZ: Z deceleration signal
DEC4: 4th deceleration signal
PCX: X zero signal
PCY: Y zero signal
PCZ: Z zero signal
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
PC4: 4th zero signal

PC5: 5th zero signal
Diagnosis data
0 0 0 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX
Interface pin CN61.34 CN61.33 CN61.12 CN61.32 CN61.4
0 0 8 PC5 PC4 PCY PCZ PCX
Controlling parameter
Status parameters
0 0 4 DECI
Bit 5 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal is at high level;
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal is at low level;
0 0 5 PPD
Bit 1: 1: G50 sets relative coordinate system value;
0: G50 does not set relative coordinate system value;
0 0 6 ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX
Bit4 1: 5th axis zero point return method C
0: 5th axis zero point return method B
Bit3 1: 4th axis zero point return method C
0: 4th axis zero point return method B
Bit2 1:Y axis zero point return method C
0:Y axis zero point return method B
Bit1 1:Y axis zero point return method C
0:Y axis zero point return method B
Bit0 1:X axis zero point return method C
0:X axis zero point return method B
0 0 7 ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX
Bit 4 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 5th axis (DEC5) and
one-rotation
signal (PC5) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 5th axis (DEC5) and
one-rotation
signal (PC5) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
and zero-point signal at the same time).
333
Connection
Bit 3 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 4th axis (DEC4) and
one-rotation
signal (PC4) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 4th axis (DEC4) and
one-rotation signal (PC4) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
deceleration signal and zero-point signal at the same time).

Bit 2 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Y axis (DECY) and
one-rotation
signal (PCY) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Y axis (DECY) and
one-rotation
signal (PCY) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
Bit 1 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Z axis (DECZ) and
one-rotation
signal (PCZ) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Z axis (DECZ) and
one-rotation signal (PCZ) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a
deceleration signal and zero-point signal at the same time).
Bit 0 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the X axis (DECX) and
one-rotation
signal (PCX) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the X axis (DECX) and
one-rotation
signal (PCX) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
0 1 1 NORF ZNLK
Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return is invalid;
0: Manual machine zero return is valid;
Bit 2: 1: The direction key is self-locked during machine zero return; press the direction
key once till
the machine zero return is finished;
0: The direction key is not self-locked during machine zero return; press down the
direction key;
0 1 2 APRS ISOT
Bit 7 1: CNC sets the absolute coordinate system automatically after reference point
return;
0: CNC does not set absolute coordinate system automatically after reference point
return;
Bit 0 1: Manual rapid traverse is valid after system power-on and before machine zero
return;
0: Manual rapid traverse is invalid after system power-on and before machine zero return;
0 1 4 ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX
Bit4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0
1: Machine zero point is set on the 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X axes; deceleration signal and zero point
signal are
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
needed to be detected during machine zero return;

0: Machine zero point is not set on the 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X axes; deceleration signal and zero
point signal
are not detected during machine zero return;
1 8 3 MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MZRX
Bit4/Bit3/Bit2/Bit1/Bit0 1: The direction of machine zero return is negative;
0: The direction of machine zero return is positive;
334
Connection
Data parameters
0 3 3 ZRNFLn
The low speed of machine zero return;
1 1 3 REF_SPDn
The high speed of machine zero return;
0 4 7 PRSn
Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return;
Signal connection
The interior circuit of deceleration signal is shown in Fig. 2-38:
Fig. 2-38
Machine zero return by regarding servo motor one-turn signal as the zero signal
Its sketch map is shown below:
Fig. 2-39
The circuit of deceleration signal
Fig. 2-40
Sequence of machine zero return
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 is set to 0, and the BIT5(DECI) of the
bit
parameter No.004 is set to 0, the system chooses the machine zero return mode B, and
the
deceleration signal low level is active.
So the sequence of machine zero return mode B is shown as follows:
335
Connection
Fig. 2-41-a
Return process of machine zero mode B
A: Select Machine zero mode, press the manual positive or negative feed key(machine
zero
return direction set by bit parameter No.183), the corresponding axis moves to the
machine zero by a rapid traverse speed (No.113). As the axis press down the
deceleration switch to cut off deceleration signal, the feeding slows down immediately,
and it continues to run in a fixed low speed(No.33).
B: When the deceleration switch is released, the deceleration signal contact is closed
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
again.
And CNC begins to detect the encoder one-turn signal (PC), if this signal level skips, the
motion will be halted. And the corresponding zero return indicator on the operator panel
lights up for machine zero return completion.
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 are both set to 1, and the BIT5(DECI)
of the
bit parameter No.004 is set to 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode C, and the
deceleration
signal low level is active.
So the sequence of machine zero return mode C is shown as follows:
Reversely
Decelerates
to stop
Time(
t)
Return
finish
Low return
speed
High return speed
Velocity(v)
nPC
Zero return speed
Deceleration switch
Fig. 2-41-b
336
Connection
Return process of machine zero mode C
A: Select Machine zero mode, press the manual positive or negative feed key (return
direction
set by bit parameter No.183), the corresponding axis moves to the machine zero by a
rapid
traverse speed (No.113). As the axis press down the deceleration switch to cut off
deceleration signal, the feeding keeps rapid rate and depart from the deceleration switch,
when the DEC signal contact is closed, the feeding slows down to zero, then run reversely
to
return to machine zero in a low speed.
B: In the reverse running, it presses down the deceleration switch to cut off the DEC signal
contact and continues returning; as it departs from the deceleration switch, the
deceleration
signal contact is closed again. And CNC begins to detect the encoder one-turn signal (PC),
if
this signal level skips, the motion will be halted. And the corresponding axis zero return
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
indicator on the operation panel lights up for zero return completion.

Machine zero return by a proximity switch taken as both deceleration and zero
signals
Its sketch map is as follows:
Sketch map of zero tongue for machine zero return mode B:
Fig. 2-42-a
Sketch map of zero tongue for machine zero return mode C:
Fig. 2-42-b
Circuit of the deceleration signal
337
Connection
Fig. 2-43
Sequence of machine zero return(taking example of X)
When the BIT0(ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 are all set to 0, and the BIT5(DECI) of
the bit
parameter No.004 is 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode B.
The sequence of machine zero return is as follows:
Fig. 2-44-a
B type machine zero return process
A: Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero return direction
set
by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a high
speed(set by parameter No.113).
B: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the first time, the deceleration signal is
active
and speed immediately slows down and it runs in a fixed low speed(set by parameter
No.33 ).
C: As the proximity switch detaches the tongue, the deceleration signal is inactive, it
moves at a
fixed low speed after deceleration and starts to detect zero signal (PC).
D: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the second time, the zero signal is active
and
the movement stops. The zero return indicator on the panel lights up for machine zero
return
completion.
When the BIT0(ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 are all set to 1, and the BIT5(DECI) of
the bit
parameter No.004 is 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode C.
The sequence of machine zero return mode C is shown as follows:
338
Connection
Deceleration switch
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Zero return
speed
Velocity (
v
)
High
return speed
Low return
speed
Return
finish
Time(
t)
Decelerates
to stop
Reversely
Fig. 2-44-b
C type machine zero return process
A: Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero return direction
set
by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a high
speed(set by parameter No.113).
B: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the first time, the deceleration signal is
active.
The speed doesnt slow down and it traverses on.
C: As the proximity switch detaches the deceleration switch, deceleration signal contact is
closed, the feed speed decelerates to zero, then it runs reversely by low return speed.
D: As the proximity switch touches the deceleration switch for the second time in reverse
running, deceleration signal contact is cut off, it still runs by low return speed; as it
detaches
the deceleration switch, deceleration signal contact is closed again, so the movement
stops.
The zero return indicator for the corresponding axis on the panel lights up for zero return
completion.
2.8.4 Spindle control
Relevant signal (by standard PLC program)
Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark
Input SAR CN15.6 X5.1 Spindle speed arrival signal
signal SALM CN15.4 X5.3 Spindle abnormity alarm input
It is valid when 0V
is input
M03 CN62.4 Y0.3 Spindle rotation(CCW)
M04 CN62.5 Y0.4 Spindle rotation(CW)
M05 CN62.6 Y0.5 Spindle stop
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
SCLP CN62.7 Y0.6 Spindle clamped

SPZD CN62.8 Y0.7 Spindle brake
SVF CN62.37 Y3.0 Spindle servo OFF
Output
signal
SFR CN15.22 Y5.2 Spindle rotation(CW)
Its function is
consistent with
that of M03
339
Connection
SRV CN15.23 Y5.3 Spindle rotation(CCW)
Its function is
consistent with
that of M04
M03 Spindle rotation(CCW)
M04 Spindle rotation(CW)
M05 Spindle stop
M20 Spindle clamped
Command
format
M21 Spindle released
They are valid in
analog spindle
Control parameter
Bit parameter
K 1 0 RSJG
RSJG =1: CNC not turn off M03, M04, M08, M32 output signals when pressing key;
=0: CNC turns off M03, M04, M08, M32 output signals when pressing key.
K 1 7 SCLP SALM SSTP SONC
SCLP =1: The spindle clamped command executes clamping the 2nd spindle when the
multi-spindle is valid.
=0: The spindle clamped command executes clamping the 1st spindle when the
multi-spindle is valid.
SALM =1: The system alarms when the spindle abnormal detection input signal is LOW (it
is
turned off with 0V);
=0: The system alarms when the spindle abnormal detection input signal is HIGH (it is
turned on with 0V) .
SSTP =1: The analog voltage is closed when the spindle stops;
=0: The analog voltage is not closed when the spindle stops.
SONC = 1: Spindle is disabled when clamping
= 0: Spindle motor torque decreases to 0 when spindle is clamping;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1 7 5 SAR
Bit6 1: The spindle SAR signal is checked before cutting;
0: The spindle SAR signal is not checked before cutting.
Data parameter
0 7 2 SAR_DELEY
Delay check time (ms) of the spindle speed arrival.
D T 0 5 MTIME
Execution time of M code (ms)
D T 1 0 SPDDLT
Spindle braking delay output time after spindle stop (M05) is output
D T 1 1 SPZDTIME
Spindle braking output time (ms)
340
Connection
D T 2 3 SVF_DELEY
Delay time before spindle motor torque decrease to 0 when spindle starts clamping;
D C 0 0 SPZERO
Spindle zero speed output range (m/min);
Signal connection
M03, M04, M05, SPZD signal output circuit is shown in Fig. 2-45A:
Fig. 2-45A
SAR, SALM signal input circuit is shown in Fig.2-45B:
Fig.2-45B
Operation sequence defined by standard PLC program
Spindle operation sequence is show in Fig 2-46:
Fig. 2-46 spindle rotation(CW/CCW) sequence
Note: T2 is the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to sending the spindle brake
signal; T3 is the
spindle brake hold time.
Function descriptiondefined by standard PLC program
After the CNC is turned on, when M05 output is valid, M03 or M04 is executed, M03 or
M04
output is valid and remains, at the time, M05 output is closed; when M03 or M04 output is
valid, M05
is executed, M03 or M04 is closed, M05 output is valid and remains; the spindle brake
SPZD signal
output delay is set by No.087delay time from the spindle stop signal output to the spindle
brake
SPZD signal output, the hold time of the brake signal is set by No. 089the spindle brake
output
time.
CW/CCW
T2 T3
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Brake
Stop
Stop signal
+5V CNC +24V Machine side
341
Connection
When M03M04output is valid, M04M03is executed, the alarm occurs.
When 175.6 is set to 1, the system checks whether the speed arrival signal SAR is
valid, if
it is valid, the system normally runs, if not, Check speed arrival is displayed.
When the spindle speed command and the cutting feed command are in the same
block, the
system executes the delay check for SAR signal to avoid that the CNC starts the cutting
based on the
last spindle speed arrival signal SAR, the delay time is set by No.072.
DC00 is the spindle zero-speed output range. When the actual spindle speed is not
more
than DC00 setting value, the system defaults the spindle speed to be zero, and can
release the chuck,
close the hydraulic and other operations.
M20 and M21 are separate the spindle clamping and releasing command, used to
clamp the
spindle after positioning, which can avoid that the spindle rotates because of the force in
drilling or
tapping.
When M20 is executed, the spindle is clamped. To avoid that the spindle servo motor
has too
much current, the system delays the time set by DT23 and then controls the spindle to
turn off the
servo, at the time, the spindle servo reduces the motor excitation and the position control
cannot be
executed, but the position check is still enabled and the position is not lost.
When the spindle moves or rotates, M20(spindle clamped) cannot be executed. After
the
spindle is clamped, it cannot be rotated or moved, otherwise, the PLC alarms.
When K17.6 sets the spindle to be clamped, the clamped is the 1st or 2nd spindle, which
is set
based on the actual conditions.
SALMX5.3is the alarm input signal of the spindle abnormality, the signal and the
drive
alarm signal of the 5th axis use the same interface. When the 5th axis is valid, the interface
is used to
the 5th drive alarm; when the 5th axis is invalid, the interface is used to the spindle
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
abnormality alarm.
Note 1: In the emergency stop, it turns off M03, M04, M08 signals, and outputs M05 signal;
Note 2: Whether M03, M04 is cancelled is set by BIT3 of the bit parameter No.009 when CNC is
reset.
If Bit 1=0, CNC turns off M03, M04 at reset;
If Bit 1=1, M03, M04 is kept at reset.
2.8.5 Spindle switching volume control
Relevant signal(defined by standard PLC program)
S01S04: Control signal for spindle speed switching volume, they are compound
interfaces
defined by standard PLC program, and they share common interfaces with M41M44,
U00U03.
Signal diagnosis
Signal S4 S3 S2 S1
Diagnosis address Y1.3 Y1.2 Y1.1 Y1.0
Interface pin CN62.12 CN62.11 CN62.10 CN62.09
Control parameters
Bit parameter
0 0 1 ACS
Bit4 =1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed
=0: Switching volume control of spindle speed
Control logic (defined by standard PLC program)
342
Connection
S1S4 output are inactive at power on. If any code of them is executed, the
corresponding S
signal output is active and held on, and the other S signal outputs are cancelled. S1S4
outputs are
cancelled when executing S00 code, and only one of them is active at a time.
2.8.6 Spindle automatic gearing control
Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
M41M44: spindle automatic gear shifting output signals. It supports 4-gear spindle
automatic
gear shifting control when the system selects the spindle analog value control(0
10V analog voltage output)
M41I,M42I: spindle automatic gear shifting No.1, 2 gear in-position signals to support gear
shifting in-position check function
Signal diagnosis
Signal M42I M41I M44 M43 M42 M41
Diagnosis address X1.6 X1.5 Y1.3 Y1.2 Y1.1 Y1.0
Interface pin CN61.15 CN61.14 CN62.12 CN62.11 CN62.10 CN62.09
Signal connection
The circuit for M41~M44 is shown in Fig.2-47:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Fig. 2-47
Control parameter
Bit parameter
0 0 1 ACS
Bit4 =1: Spindle analog volume control, set to 1 if using spindle automatic gearing
=0: Spindle switching volume control
K 1 5 SHT AGIM AGIN AGER
AGER =1: Spindle automatic gearing active
=0: Spindle automatic gearing inactive
AGIN =1: Detect M41I, M42I signal when shifting to gear 1, 2
=0: Not detect M41I, M42I signal when shifting to gear 1, 2
AGIM =1: Active when M41I, M42I signals disconnecting to +24V
=0: Active when M41I, M42I signals connecting to +24V
SHT =1: spindle gear power-down executes the memory
=0: spindle gear power-down does not execute the memory
Data parameter
0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
0 4 0 GRMAX4
343
Connection
GRMAX1,GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: The respective max. speeds of spindle gear 1,
2, 3, 4
when analog voltage output is 10V. Spindle speeds for M41, M42, M43, M44 when
spindle automatic
gearing is active.
0 6 7 SFTREV
The output voltage during spindle gear shift010000, Unit: mV
D T 0 0 SFT1TME
Time for original gear disable during spindle gear shift (ms)refer to function description
for
details.
D T 0 1 SFT2TME
Delay time after spindle gear shift (ms), refer to function description for details.
The spindle automatic gearing is active only under the spindle analog voltage control
(BIT4 of the
bit parameter No.001 set to 1) and the BIT 7 of the bit parameter No.164 is set to 1; if the
spindle auto
gearing is inactive, alarm will be issued when M41M44 is being executed and only one
of them is
active at a time.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
When spindle auto gearing is used to control automatic spindle mechanical gear switching,
as
CNC executes S code, it calculates the analog voltage output to spindle servo or
frequency
inverter based on the parameter of the current gear by M4n (M41M44 to data
parameters
No.037~No.040 respectively) to make the actual speed to be consistent with the S code.
When CNC is powered on, the spindle gear memorizing is set by the BIT1 of bit parameter
No.168.
If the BIT4 of bit parameter No.001 is 0, the spindle gear is not memorized at repowering
after
power down, and the gear 1 will be defaulted, M41~M44 are not output. If BIT4 of bit
parameter
No.001 is 1, the spindle gear is memorized at repowering after power down.
No gearing is done if the specified gear is consistent with the current gear. If not, gearing
will be
performed, and the process defined by standard ladders is shown in the following:
Execute any of M41, M42, M43, M44 codes, output analog voltage to spindle servo or
frequency inverter according to a value set by data parameter No.067 (Unit: mV);
After a delay (gearing time 1) by the DT00, turn off the original gear output signal and
output
the new gearing signal;
If the gear is 1 or 2, and the BIT6 of the bit parameter No.164 is 1, it jumps to , or else
it
jumps to ;
Check the gear in-position input signal M41I, M42I, it jumps to if the gear in-position
is done;
if not, the CNC waits the gear in-position signal;
After a delay (gearing time 2) by DT01, output spindle analog voltage by the current
gear
according to a value set by data parameter No.037~No.040 (gear 1~4 ) and finish the
gearing.
Note: The output of M41M44 is held on when CNC is reset or i emergency stop, which is defined
by
standard PLC ladder.
2.8.7 Spindle eight-point orientation function
Related signalsdefined by standard PLC program
344
Connection
COIN CN15.8 X5.2 Orientation completion signal
Input
signal SALM CN15.4 X5.3
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Spindle abnormality alarm

signal
It is valid when
0V is input
STAO CN62.41 Y3.4 Spindle orientation start signal
SP0 CN62.42 Y3.5 Orientation position 0
SFR CN15.22 Y5.2 Spindle rotation (CW)
Output
signal
SRV CN15.23 Y5.3 Spindle rotation (CCW)
Note 1: STAO signal and the rotation CCW signal of the 2nd spindle M64 are multiplexed by the
interface, so,
eight-point orientation function is invalid when the multiple spindle function is valid.
Note 2: STAO, SP0, SP1, SP2 signal and macro output #1102#1105 are multiplexed by the
interface, so,
#1102#1105 is invalid when the eight-point orientation function is valid.
Command format
M51M58: spindle orientation command
M50 : cancel spindle orientation command
M50~M58 corresponding to the orientation output are shown below:
Output signal
Programming command
SP2
(Y3.7)
SP1
(Y3.6)
SP0
(Y3.5)
STAO
Y3.4
M50 * * * 0
M51 0 0 0 1
M52 0 0 1 1
M53 0 1 0 1
M54 0 1 1 1
M55 1 0 0 1
M56 1 0 1 1
M57 1 1 0 1
M58 1 1 1 1
Note: When the system is matched with DAP03 Spindle Servo Unit, it can realize 8-point
orientation; when it
matched with GS3000 Series Spindle Servo Unit, the system defaults one-point orientation, up to
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
4-point orientation.
Control parameter
K 1 5 SPOR
SPOR =1: The spindle eight-orientation function is valid.
=0: The spindle eight-orientation function is invalid.
K 1 7 SALM
SALM =1: The system alarms when the spindle abnormality check input signal is LOWit
is not
connected with 0V.
=0: The system alarms when the spindle abnormality check input signal is HIGHit is
345
Connection
connected with 0V.
Functional description(standard PLC program definition)
1. After the positioning function commands M51~M58 are executed, PLCDrive executes
the
orientation selection signal SP0, SP1, SP2 to confirm the orientation position.
2. Delay 40ms, PLCDrive executes the spindle orientation start signal STAO after the
system
delays 100ms, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) is disabled, at the same time, the system
starts to
check the orientation completion signal (COIN.
3. Drive unit starts the orientation.
4. After the drive unit orientation is completed, Drive PLC outputs the spindle
completion signal
COIN;
5. After PLC receives the spindle orientation completion signal COIN, the spindle
orientation is
completed, but the spindle orientation signal STAO keeps the output.
6. When M51~M58 is input again, the spindle oriented to another position.
7. After the orientation is completed and when M50 is executed or the spindle orientation
is
operated, PLC closes the spindle orientation signal STAO output and the drive unit
cancels the
positioning function.
8. When the system has not received the orientation completion signal after the PLC
sends the
orientation completion signal for 10000ms, it alarms the spindle orientation time being
long.
9. Before the orientation, the spindle can rotate or stop; the spindle stops after the
orientation.
Note 1: The drive is for the spindle servo drive unit.
Note 2: When the function is selected, the spindle servo drive unit is matched and is valid in the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
external
speed control mode.
Orientation sequence drawing
Orientation function wiring diagram betweenTAC-1002T and DAP03
TAC-100XT signal interface DAP03 signal interface
346
Connection
CN1
SRV
SFR
23
CN15 22
0V
+24
4
ALM5 7
ALM
COMCOM+
24 SON
SVC
SVC-GND
13
12
14 VCMD+
9 SFR
SRV
15 VCMD-
25
16 PAO+
1 PAO-
17 PBO+
2 PBO-
18 PZO+
3 PZOCN21
8 PAS
7 *PAS
6 PBS
5 *PBS
4 PZS
3 *PZS
6 SAR 5 SAR
41 STAO
42 SP0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
44 SP2
43 SP1
11
10
40
26
STAO
SP0
SP1
SP2
CN62
8 COIN 21 COIN
19 EN
37,38
23,35
3,16
11,17
Orientation function wiring diagram betweenTAC-1002T and GS3000Y-N
TAC-100XT signal interface GS3000Y-N signal interface
Note 1: When the system is matched with GS3000Y-N, the single-point orientation is defaulted; up
to 4
points orientation can be realized.
Note 2: GS3000 Series signal interface CN1 adopts DB44 3-stripe male plug.
347
Connection
2.8.8 Spindle Cs axis control function
Related signalsdefined by standard PLC program
VPO CN15.5 X5.0
Spindle speed/position control
Input state
signal
ALM5 CN15.4 X5.3
Alarm signal of the 5th drive
unit
It is valid when
0V is input
VP CN15.20 Y5.0
Spindle speed/position control
switch output
TAP CN15.21 Y5.1
The 2nd gain selection signal
of the spindle speed(used to
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
the rigid tapping

SFR CN15.22 Y5.2 Spindle rotation CW
Output
signal
SRV CN15.23 Y5.3 Spindle rotation CCW
Command format
M14: The spindle is switched from the speed control mode into the position
M15: The spindle is switched from the position control mode into the speed
Note: When the spindle is rotary, Cs function is valid and the corresponding spindle servo drive
unit is
speed/position switch working mode, the spindle speed/position control switch is valid.
Control parameters
State parameters
0 0 1 Analog
spindle
Bit4 =1: Spindle speed analog control. When the spindle automatic gear change function
is
used, it must be set to 1;
=0: Spindle speed switch control.
1 8 7 RCS ROS ROT
Bit5 =1: Cs function of the additional axis is valid (power-on again);
=0: Cs function of the additional axis is invalid (power-on again).
Bit 1, Bit0: 00 sets Y to be the linear axis; 01 sets Y to be the rotary axis(A type); 11 sets Y
to be
the rotary axis(B type); 10 sets Y to be invalid.
Bit1, Bit0 : 00: set the additional axis to the linear axis; 01: set the additional axis to the
rotary
axis (A-type); 11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B-type); 10: set the
additional to be invalid.
K 1 5 RCS RSCS
RCS =1: Cs function of the spindle is valid.
=0: Cs function of the spindle is invalid.
RSCS =1: The spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset.
=0: The spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.
348
Connection
Note: K15.7 sets whether all Cs functions are valid, o187.5, o189.5, o191.5 set whether Cs
functions of
the special axis is valid. When the multiple spindle function is valid, Cs function of only one axis
is valid.
Function descriptiondefined by standard PLC program
1. Control logic
1) After M14 is executed, PLCDrive outputs the spindle speed/position control mode
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
switch
signal;
2) Drive unit starts the switch control mode. After the switch is completed, DrivePLC
outputs
the speed/position switch state signal VPO;
3) After the PLC receives the spindle speed/position switch state signal VPO, the spindle
contour
control switch signal CON is set to 1. After the system has checked CNC spindle contour
control
switch end signal FSCSL, M14 execution is ended. The spindle control mode switch is
ended.
2. M15 execute processes are the same those of M14.
3. on the panel is equal to the spindle speed/position control mode switch in Manual
mode.
In Manual/MPG mode, press and the CNC starts the spindle speed/position control mode
switch. After the CNC is switched into the spindle position control mode, the spindle
orientation
indicator is ON, at the time, Cs position movement is performed. Press again and the CNC
is
switched into the spindle speed control mode and the spindle orientation indicator is OFF.
4. Before switch, the spindle can rotate or stop. After switch, the spindle stops.
5. When the spindle is in Cs contour control mode, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) output
is
invalid.
6. When the spindle is in the external speed control mode, the manual operation of Cs
axis is
invalid.
7. When the alarm occurs in the servo or because of the too long switch time or the reset
or
emergency stop appears in switch, PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
8. When PLC K15.6 is set to 1, the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop,
reset.
PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
349
Connection
Connection diagram betweenTAC-1002T and DAP03 (taking example of Cs of the
5th axis)
CN1
SRV
SFR
23
22
CN15
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
VPO
VP
5
20
ZOUT-
15 DIR5-
0V
11
+24
10
4
ALM5
PC5
DIR5
CP5+
1
14
2
CP5-
34 SIGNZOUT+
24
7
19
ALM
PULSSIGN+
PULS+
42
33
28
COMCOM+
SON
4
SVC
SVC-GND
13
12
14 VCMD+
9 SFR
SRV
12 VP
44 VPO
15 VCMD-
25
16 PAO+
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1 PAO-
17 PBO+
2 PBO-
18 PZO+
3 PZOCN21
8 PAS
7 *PAS
6 PBS
5 *PBS
4 PZS
3 *PZS
19 EN5
21 TAP 41 TAP
6 SAR 5 SAR
3/9
23/35
37/38
Wiring diagram betweenTAC-1002T and GS3000Y-N spindle servo unit (the 5th
axis is
Cs axis in the following example)
350
Connection
Note 1: CN15 signal interface onTAC-1002T side adopts DB25 2-stripe male plug, CN21 adopts
DB15
2-stripe female plug.
Note 2: GS3000 Series signal interface CN1 adopts DB44 3-stripe male plug.
2.8.9 Multiple spindle function
When the multiple spindle function is valid, related signals, parameters and commands
are
consistent with related explanations of the spindle control, the 1st, the 2nd spindle
explanations are
shown below.
Related signalsdefined by PLC program
VPO2 CN61.40 X3.3
The 2nd spindle speed/position control
Input state
signal
SALM2 CN61.41 X3.4 The 2nd spindle abnormality alarm signal
Multiplex with
the chuck
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
in-position
signal
Output
signal
VP2 CN62.36 Y2.7
The 2nd spindle speed/ position control
switch output
351
Connection
TAP2 CN62.39 Y3.2
The 2nd gain selection signal of the 2nd
spindle speed loop (used to rigid
tapping)
M63 CN62.40 Y3.3 The 2nd spindle rotation(CW)
M64 CN62.41 Y3.4 The 2nd spindle rotation(CCW)
Note 1: TAP2, M63, M64 and macro output #1100#1102 are multiplexed by the interface, so
#1100#1102
are invalid when the multiple spindle function is valid.
Note 2: SALM2, VPO2 and the chuck in-position signals NQPJ, WQPJ are multiplexed by the
interface, so,
the system does not check the chuck in-position signal.
Command format
M63 the 2nd spindle rotates (CW)
M64 the 2nd spindle rotates (CCW)
M65 the 2nd spindle stops
M24 the 2nd spindle is switched from the speed control mode into the position control
mode
M25 the 2nd spindle is switched from the position control mode into the speed control
mode. The
speed control mode is defaulted after the system is turned on.
Note: Only the 4th is rotary axis and Cs function of the 4th is valid, at the same time, the
corresponding spindle
servo drive unit is in speed/position switch working mode, the switch between the speed control
and the
position control of the 2nd spindle is valid.
Control parameters
1 8 7 RCS ROS ROT
Bit5 =1: Cs function of the additional axis is valid (power-on again);
=0: Cs function of the additional axis is invalid(power-on again).
Bit 1, Bit0: 00 sets Y to be the linear axis; 01 sets Y to be the rotary axis (A type); 11 sets
Y to be
the rotary axis(B type); 10 sets Y to be invalid.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
rotary
axis (A-type); 11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B-type); 10: set the
additional to be invalid.
1 9 6 MSI CSS MSEN
Bit7 1: The multiple spindle control B type;
0: The multiple spindle control A type.
Bit6 1: In the multiple spindle control, the system separately controls Cs contour of each
spindle;
0: In the multiple spindle control, the system controls the Cs contour of only the 1st
spindle.
Bit4 1: The multiple spindle control function is valid;
0: The multiple spindle control function is invalid;
K 1 5 RCS RSCS
RCS =1: The spindle Cs function is valid;
=0: The spindle Cs function is invalid.
RSCS =1: The spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset;
=0: The spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.
352
Connection
K 1 7 MSEN SALM2
MSEN =1: The multiple spindle control function is valid;
=0: The multiple spindle control function is invalid.
SALM2 =1: The system alarms when the check input signal of the 2nd spindle abnormality
is
LOW;
=0: The system alarms when the check input signal of the 2nd spindle abnormality is
HIGH;
Function description(defined by the standard PLC program
1.1. After the multiple spindle control function setting is valid, the system defaults to the 1st
spindle control after power-on;
1.2. When M03, M04, M05 is executed, the corresponding signal of the 1st spindle outputs,
at
that time, the system sets the 1st spindle control, hereafter, the S command being
executed
will change the 1st spindle speed. In a similar way, M63, M64, M65 is executed, the
corresponding signal of the 2nd spindle outputs, at the time, the corresponding signal of
the
2nd spindle outputs, and is switched into the 2nd spindle control, after that, the executed S
command will change the 2nd spindle speed.
1.3. The spindle switch is invalid in rigid tapping.
1.4. The manual CW, CCW, STOP, SPINDLE OVRRRIDE keys on the panel are valid
only to the
1st spindle. When the current system is controlled by the 2nd spindle, the manual control
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
key
of the spindle on the panel still controls the 1st spindle.
1.5. The spindle override of the 2nd spindle is fixed to 100%.
1.6. Cs axis control of two spindles can be separately switched and the current used
spindle has
no requirements, that is, when the current is the 1st(2nd) spindle, the 2nd (1st) spindle
executes the Cs switch.
Cs control logic of the 2nd spindle
1.1. After M24 is execute, PLCDrive sends the 2nd spindle speed/position control mode
switch
signal VP2;
1.2 Drive unit starts the switch control mode. After the switch is completed, DrivePLC
outputs
the speed/position switch state signal VPO2;
1.3. After the PLC receives the spindle speed/position switch state signal VPO2, the 2nd
spindle
contour control switch signal CON(G127.7) is set to 1. After the system has checked the
2nd
spindle contour control switch end signal FSCSL(F144.1), M24 execution is ended. The
spindle control mode switch is ended.
2. M25 execute processes are the same those of M24.
3. M25 only cancels M24 executing the speed/position switch. Executing M25 cannot
switch the
system into the speed control mode when executing M29 switches the spindle into Cs
contour
control.
4. on the panel is only used to Cs switch of the 1st spindle.
5. Before switch, the spindle can rotate or stop. After switch, the spindle stops.
6. When the spindle is in Cs contour control mode, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) output
is
invalid.
7. When the spindle is in the external speed control mode, the manual operation of Cs
axis is
invalid.
8. When the alarm occurs in the servo or because of the too long switch time or the reset
or
353
Connection
emergency stop appears in switch, PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
9. When PLC K15.6 is set to 1, the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop,
reset.
PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
10. When PLC K17.7 is set to 1, the multiple spindle function is enabled, and the system
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
does
not check the chuck in-position signal.
Connection diagram between the 2nd spindle and DAP03
CN1
M64
M63
41
40
CN14
VPO2
TAP2
40
39
ZOUT+
10 DIR-
4 +24V
10
5
ALM
PC
DIR
CP+
1
9
2
CP34
SIGNZOUT-
19
7
4
ALM
PULSSIGN+
PULS+
42
33
28
COM+
24 SON
SVC-OUT2
SVC-GND
24
25
14 VCMD+
9 SFR
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
SRV
41 TAP
44 VPO
15 VCMD-
25
COM-
0V
17
20 +24V
CN62
CN15
CN61
Pull-up resistor
2K
36 VP2 12 VP
7 EN
23/35
37/38
Connection diagram between the 2nd spindle and GS3000Y-N spindle servo unit
354
Connection
Note: CN1 on GS3000Y-N Series adopts DB44 3-stripe male plug;
2.8.10 Rigid tapping function
Related commands
M20 spindle clamped output
M21 spindle clamped/released output
M29 entering rigid tapping state
Note: When only the selected spindle used to the rigid tapping interpolation is the rotary axis, the
rigid
tapping function can be executed.
Function descriptiondefined by the standard PLC program
When the Cs function of the tapping spindle is invalid, the system is switched into the
rigid
tapping state instead of switching the spindle servo speed/position in executing M29,
defaults the
spindle servo to be the position control state.
When Cs function of the tapping spindle is enabled, the spindle servo for the tapping is
switched
into the position control state and the system is switched into Cs contour control state.
Before M29 switch, the tapping spindle is permitted to the spindle mode or Cs contour
control
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
mode. After the rigid tapping return, the tapping spindle returns to the previous control
mode.
When the system is in the rigid tapping state, the manual movement tapping spindle
cannot be
performed.
The rigid tapping state is cancelled in reset or emergency stop.
In M29, when the 1st or the 2nd spindle is currently used, it is switched into the rigid
tapping state.
In rigid tapping, a spindle should be selected firstly to execute the rigid tapping
interpolation. After
the spindle is switched into the rigid tapping state, the spindle switch is invalid.
After M29 is execute, M20 and the tapping command in the same block are executed
to clamp
the spindle before drilling or tapping.
355
Connection
2.8.11 External cycle start and feed hold
ST: External cycle start signal, whose function is the same with the CYCLE START key on
the
machine panel;
SP: External feed hold signal, whose function is the same with the FEED HOLD key on
the
machine panel, and it shares an interface with SAGT(safety door detect) signal.
Signal diagnosis
Signal SP ST
Diagnosis address X0.1 X1.4
Interface pin CN61.2 CN61.13
Signal connection
The interior circuit of SP/ST signal is shown in Fig. 2-48:
Fig. 2-48
Control parameter
Bit parameter
1 7 2 MST MSP
Bit 6 =1: External cycle start signal (ST) is invalid;
=0: External cycle start signal (ST) is valid;
Bit 5 =1: External stop signal (SP) is invalid;
=0: External stop signal (ST) is valid; the external feed hold switch is needed,
otherwise, Feed hold is displayed.
External connection circuit
The external connection circuit of SP, ST signals is shown in Fig. 2-49:
Fig. 2-49
CN61 socket
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
TAC-100XT
SP
+24V
S T
Normal-close contact without lock
356
Connection
2.8.12 Cooling control
Output signal M08 CN62.1 Y0.0 Cooling control output
M08 Cooing ON
Command format
M09 Cooling OFF
Signal connection
Its internal circuit is shown in Fig. 2-50:
Fig. 2-50 M08 internal circuit
M09 is active, i.e. M08 is inactive, after CNC power on. To execute M08, M08 output is
active and
cooling is turned on; to execute M09, M08 output is cancelled and cooling is turned off.
Note 1: M08 output is cancelled at CNC emergency stop.
Note 2: Whether M08 is cancelled is set by BIT3 of the bit parameter No.009 when CNC is reset.
When Bit1=0, M08 output is cancelled as CNC is reset;
When Bit1=1, M08 output is not cancelled as CNC is reset;
Note 3: There is no corresponding output signal for M09, and M08 output is cancelled if M09 is
executed.
Note 4: The cooling can be controlled by the key on operation panel, see details in OPERATION.
2.8.13 Lubricating control
Output signal M32 CN62.2 Y0.1 Lubricating control output
Command M32 Lubricating ON
format M33 Lubricating OFF
Signal connection
The internal circuit is shown in Fig. 2-51:
Fig. 2-51 M32 circuit
357
Connection
Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 0 RSJG
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
RSJG =1: when is pressed, CNC does not close M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal.
=0: when is pressed, CNC closes M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal.
K 1 6 M32A
M32A =1: output lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is valid
=0: do not output lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is valid
PLC value
D T 1 3 MANLUBT
Time for manual lubricating ON (ms) (0: lubricating time is not limited);
D T 1 6 AUTOLUBMT
Automatic lubricating time (02147483647ms)
D T 1 7 AUTOLUBT
Automatic lubricating interval time (02147483647ms)
Function description
The lubricating defined by standard PLC program for thisTAC-1002T system has two
types:
Non-automatic and automatic lubricating, which are set by parameter:
DT17 =0: Non-automatic lubricating (same as version before)
DT17>0: Automatic lubricating, lubricating time DT17 and lubricating interval time DT16
available
1. Manual lubricating function
Press on the machine operator panel and the system executes the lubricating output,
pressing it again and the system cancels the output. Execute M32 and the system
executes the
output; execute M33 and the system stops it.
DT13>1: the system executes the timed lubricating output, and the output is executed by
pressing , and is cancelled when the output exceeds the one set by DT13. After the
system
executes M32, the lubricating output is executed within the time set by DT13 and it is
cancelled.
Execute M33 in the time set by No. 112 and the output is cancelled.
2. Automatic lubricating
When K16.2 is set to 1, the system executes the lubricating in the time set by DT17, and
then
stops the output. After it keeps the stop in the time set by DT16, it executes the lubricating
again
repetitively, and executes the cycle in turn. In automatic lubricating, M32, M33, on the
machine panel are valid, and the lubricating time is the one set by DT17.
Note 1: The lubricating output is disabled in emergency stop;
Note 2: K No.0.10 Bit1 sets whether the lubricating output is cancelled in reset:
Bit10: the lubricating output is disabled in reset;
Bit11: the lubricating output remains unchanged in reset.
358
Connection
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.8.14 Chuck control

DIQP: Chuck control input signal
DOQPJ: Inner chuck clamping output/outer chuck releasing output signal
DOQPS: Inner chuck releasing output/outer chuck clamping output signal
NQPJ: Inner chuck clamping in-position/outer chuck releasing in-position signal, sharing a
common interface with T08, M42I
WQPJ: Inner chuck releasing in-position/outer chuck clamping in-position signal, sharing
a
common interface with T07, M41I
Note 1: The key on the operation panel ofTAC-1002T-V can replace DIQP input signal, and the
diagnosis address is X0026.6.
Note 2: NQPJ, WQPJ with the 2nd spindle signals SALM2, VPO2 multiplex interface, so, the system
does not
check the chuck in-position signal when the multi-spindle function is valid.
Signal diagnosis
Signal DIQP NQPJ WQPJ DOQPJ DOQPS
Diagnosis address X0.2 X3.4 X3.3 Y1.4 Y1.5
Control parameter
K 1 2 RCKC CCHU NYQP SLSP SLQP
SLQP =1: Chuck control function is active;
= 0: Chuck control function is inactive;
SLSP =1: Check chuck clamping when the chuck function is active;
0: Does not check chuck clamping when the chuck function is active; if chuck is not
clamping, the spindle is disabled and an alarm is issued.
NYQP =1: Outer chuck mode; NQPJ is outer chuck releasing signal, WQPJ is outer chuck
clamping signal
=0: Inner chuck mode; NQPJ is inner chuck clamping signal, WQPJ is inner chuck
releasing signal
CCHU =1: Check chuck in-position signal.
=0: Does not check chuck in-position signal.
RCKC =1: External chuck control is active during program running;
=0: External chuck control is inactive during program running;
DT14
Chuck clamping command (M12) execution time (ms)
DT15
Chuck released command (M13) execution time (ms)
DT0018
DT18 >0: Chuck clamping and releasing signals are pulse output, the pulse width is set by
359
Connection
DT18
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
=0: Chuck clamping and releasing signals are level output

Signal connection
The circuit of DOQPJ/DOQPS is shown in Fig. 2-52:
Fig. 2-52
Sequence
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, NYQP=0, CCHU=1, CNC chooses inner chuck mode, and
chuck
in-position signal detecting is active:
DOQPS: chuck releasing output; WQPJ: releasing in-position signal
DOQPJ: chuck clamping output; NQPJ: clamping in-position signal.
DOQPJ and DOQPS output high resistance at power on, when CNC detects that the
chuck input
signal DIQP is active for the 1st time, DOQPJ is connected to 0V and chuck is clamped.
After M12 is executed, DOQPS (pin 14 of CN62) outputs high resistance, DOQPJ(pin 13
of
CN62) outputs 0V, chuck is clamped and CNC waits for NQPJ signal to be in-position.
After M13 is executed, DOQPJ (pin 13 of CN62) outputs high resistance, DOQPS(pin 14
of
CN62) outputs 0V, chuck is released and CNC waits for WQPJ signal to be in-position.
Input signal:
Output signal:
Input signal:
Input signal:
Output signal:
Fig. 2-53 (Chuck clamping, releasing signals are level output)
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, NYQP=1, CCHU=1, CNC chooses outer chuck mode, and
chuck
in-position signal detecting is active:
DOQPS: chuck clamping output; WQPJ: clamping in-position signal;
DOQPJ: chuck releasing output; NQPJ: releasing in-position signal.
DOQPJ and DOQPS output high resistance at power on, when CNC detects that the
chuck input
signal DIQP is active for the 1st time, DOQPS is connected to 0V and chuck is clamped.
After M12 is executed, DOQPS (CN62.14) outputs 0V, DOQPJ(CN62.13) outputs high
360
Connection
resistance, chuck is clamped and CNC waits for WQPJ signal to be in-position.
After M13 is executed, DOQPJ (CN62.13) outputs 0V, DOQPS(CN62.14) outputs high
resistance, chuck is released and CNC waits for NQPJ signal to be in-position.
Fig. 2-54 Chuck clamping, releasing signals are level output
As the 2nd chuck input is active, DOQPS outputs 0V, chuck is released. The chuck
clamping/releasing signal is output alternatively, i.e. the output is changed each chuck
input signal is
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
active.
The interlock between the chuck and the spindle
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, M3 or M4 is active, the alarm is issued if M13 is executed and
the
output is unchanged.
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, CCHU=1, if M12 is executed in MDI or Auto mode, CNC does
not
execute next code till it detects the chuck clamping in-position signal is active. When the
chuck
input signal DIQP is active in Manual mode, the panel spindle CW, CCW key are inactive
till it
detects the chuck clamping in-position signal is active. In spindle running or auto cycle
processing,
DIQP input signal is inactive. And DOQPS, DOQPJ is held on at CNC reset and
emergency stop.
2.8.15 Tailstock control
DOTWJ: Tailstock forward output signal
DOTWS: Tailstock backward output signal
DITW: Tailstock input signal, DITW and BDT share a common interface.
Note: ForTAC-1002T-V, can replace DITW input signal, and the diagnosis address is X0026.5.
Signal diagnosis
Signal DITW DOTWJ DOTWS
Diagnosis address X0.4 Y2.5 Y2.6
Interface pin CN61.5 CN61.34 CN61.35
Control parameter
State parameter
361
Connection
K 1 3 RTSC SPTW SLTW
SLTW =1: Tailstock function active.
=0: Tailstock function inactive.
SPTW =1: No interlock between spindle rotation and tailstock advancing and retracting,
tailstock
may be moved regardless of the spindle, or spindle may run regardless of tailstock;
=0: Interlock between spindle rotation and tailstock advancing and retracting, tailstock
retraction disabled as spindle is running, spindle disabled if tailstock does not
advance.
RTSC =1: External tailstock control is active when a program runs.
=0: External tailstock control is inactive when a program runs
Signal connection
The tailstock circuit is shown in Fig. 2-55:
Fig. 2-55
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Sequence (defined by standard PLC program)

The sequence of tailstock is shown in Fig. 2-56:
Tailstock advancing (DOTWJ) and retracting(DOTWS) are both inactive when power on;
when
the tailstock input (DITW) is active for the 1st time, tailstock advancing is active; when it is
active for
the 2nd time, tailstock retracting is active, so the DOTWJ/ DOTWS signal interlock is
output
alternatively, i.e. The output changes each time the DITW signal is active. If M10 is
executed, DOTWJ
(CN62.34) outputs 0V and tailstock advances; if M11 is executed, DOTWS (CN62.35)
outputs 0V and
tailstock retracts.
DITW signal is inactive as spindle is running. If M11 is executed, alarm will be issued, and
its
output are held on. And DOTWS, DOTWJ outputs are held on at CNC reset or emergency
stop.
2.8.16 Low pressure detection
PRES: Low pressure alarm detection signal, sharing a common interface with TCP.
Input signal DITW
Output signal DOTWJ
Output signal DOTWS
Fig. 2-56 Tailstock sequence
362
Connection
Signal diagnosis
Signal PRES
Diagnosis address X0.6
Interface pin CN61.7
Control parameters
State parameter
K 1 4 SPB3 PB3
PB3 =0: Low pressure detection inactive.
=1: Low pressure detection active.
SPB3 =0: Low pressure alarm issued when PRES is connected with +24V.
=1: Low pressure alarm issued when PRES is connected with 0V.
PLC data parameter
D T 0 2 PEALMTIM
PEALMTIM: Waiting time before low pressure alarm(0~60000ms)
When PB3=1 and SPB3=0, PRES is connected to +24V, which is confirmed to be low
pressure
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
alarm by CNC;
When PB3=1 and SPB3=1, PRES is connected to 0V, which is confirmed to be low
pressure
alarm by CNC;
When low pressure alarm detection function is selected, once CNC detects the low
pressure
alarm signal PRES to be active, and the signal holding time is over the setting by the data
parameter
No.069 alarm is issued by CNC. And the axis feed is held, spindle is stopped, cycle start is
disabled,
the alarm may be cancelled by pressing key or cutting off power;
2.8.17 Hydraulic control (only applied to 980TDc-V)
Related signaldefined by the standard PLC program
EXHP: external hydraulic control input signal
HPST: hydraulic control output signal
Note: The EXHP input signal can be replaced by key on the operation panel; the
diagnosis
address is X0026.4;
Signal diagnosis
Signal HPST
Diagnosis address Y3.1
Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 4 HPST
PB3 =0: the hydraulic control function is disabled.
=1: the hydraulic control function is enabled.
363
Connection
When the hydraulic control function is enabled, pressing can control HPST output to
start the hydraulic motor.
In non-run, the spindle stop with the speed 0, pressing can disable HPST output.
When the hydraulic control function enables and the hydraulic motor is started, the
system
alarm, at the time, the spindle cannot rotate.
2.8.18 Safety door detection
Relevant signal
SAGT: For safety door detection, sharing a common interface with SP signal
Signal diagnosis
Signal SAGT
Diagnosis address X0.0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Control parameter
PLC status parameters
K 1 4 SGSP SPB4 PB4
PB4 =0: Protection door detection function is invalid;
=1: Protection door detection function is valid;
SPB4 =0: When SAGT is at low level (disconnect with +24V), the protection door is
closed;
=1: When SAGT is at high level (connected with +24V), the protection door is closed;
SGSP =0: Spindle is disabled when the protection door is open;
=1: Spindle is not disabled when the protection door is open;
When PB41, SPB40, CNC confirms that the safety door is closed as SAGT is
connected
to 0V;
When PB41, SPB41, CNC confirms that the safety door is closed as SAGT is
connected
to +24V;
In Auto mode, if CNC detects the safety door is open, alarm is issued as cycle starts;
In auto running, if CNC detects the safety door is open, the axis feed is held, and alarm
is
issued by CNC;
The safety door detection function is only active in Auto mode;
2.8.19 CNC macro variables
Relevant signal
Macro output signal: standard PLC defines 5 macro output interfaces #1100#1105
Macro input signal: standard PLC defines 16 macro output interfaces #1000#1015
Signal diagnosis
Macro variable number #1105 #1104 #1103 #1102 #1101 #1100
Diagnosis address Y3.7 Y3.6 Y3.5 Y3.4 Y3.3 Y3.2
364
Connection
Macro variable number #1007 #1006 #1005 #1004 #1003 #1002 #1001 #1000
Diagnosis address X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1 X0.0
Macro variable number #1015 #1014 #1013 #1012 #1011 #1010 #1009 #1008
Diagnosis address X1.7 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.3 X1.2 X1.1 X1.0
U00U05 signal output may be changed if macro variable 11001105 are
assigned. If
they are assigned for 1, it outputs 0V, if they are assigned for 0, it turns off their output
signals.
Detect the macro variable 10001015 values (input signal state), they may be used
for
various processing if combined with other transfer judgment macro code.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
2.8.20 External override

Related signals
OV1 CN61.8 X0.7 External override 1
Input
signal
The external
feedrate override
switch and the tool
signals T5T8
are multiplexed
Related parameters
PLC state parameter
K 1 6 ROVI SOVI
ROVI =0: External feedrate override does not inverse.
=1: External feedrate override inverses.
SOVI =0: External feedrate override switch is disabled.
=1: External feedrate override switch is enabled.
1. When the external feedrate override switch is selected, the button on the panel is
disabled.
2. When the external feedrate override switch and the tool signal T5T8 are multiplexed,
and
Yantai, Liuxin Tool Post is selected or the total tool count is more than 4, the external
feedrate
override cannot be selected.
3. When the external feedrate override inverses, the system changes the direction of the
override regulation.
2.8.21 External MPG
Related signals
CN31(MPG)
PLC
address
Address
character
Function Remark
5 X6.0 EHDX X MPG
6 X6.1 EHDY Y MPG
8 X6.2 EHDZ Z MPG
Applied
toPSG-100-05E/L,
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
ZSSY2080 MPG
365
Connection
9 X6.3 EMP0 Increment 1
11, 12, 13 GND
14,15 +5V
17,18 +24V
Related parameters
State parameter
0 0 1 MPG
Bit3 =0: Step working mode.
=1: MPG working mode.
PLC status parameters
K 1 6 SINC SINC2
SINC =0: When the system increment is 0.1, gear 1000 in MPG and STEP mode is
valid;
=1: When the system increment is 0.1, gear 1000 in MPG and STEP mode is invalid;
SINC2 =0: When the system increment is 1, gear 1000 in MPG and STEP mode is
valid;
=1: When the system increment is 1, gear 1000 in MPG and STEP mode is invalid;
When SINC is set to 0.1, MPG/STEP mode 1000-gear selection is disabled. When
x1000-gearis selected before modifying the parameter, the system automatically changes
into
100-gear;
When SINC is set to 1, MPG/STEP mode 1000-gear selection is disabled. When
x1000-gearis
selected before modifying the parameter, the system automatically changes into
100-gear;
When the external MPG, its axis selection does not lock, that is, the axis selection of
MPG is
disabled, the system changes to the non-axis selection state.
When the external MPG axis selection and gear selection input are enabled, the axis
selection
on the panel and the gear selection keys are disabled; when the external MPG axis
selection and
gear selection input are disabled, the axis selection on the panel and the gear selection
keys are
enabled and self-locked.
2.8.22 Tri-color Lamp
Relevant signals and function definition (standard PLC program)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Signal
type Sign Signal
interface Address Function
CLPY CN62.31 Y2.2 Yellow normal state (non-running,
non-alarm state)
CLPG CN62.32 Y2.3 Greenrunning state
Output
signal
CLPR CN62.33 Y2.4 Redalarm state
2.8.23 Extended M Function
Relevant signalsstandard PLC program
366
Connection
Signal interface Address Address characters Function
CN62.36 Y2.7 EMOT1 Extended M function signal 1
CN62.40 Y3.3 EMOT2 Extended M function signal 2
Relevant commands
M34 Extended M function signal 1EMOT1outputs
M35 Extended M function signal 1EMOT1closes output
M36 Extended M function signal 2EMOT2outputs
M37 Extended M function signal 2EMOT2closes output
Control parameters
PLC parameters
K 1 8 EXTM RSTM
EXTM =0extended M function is invalid.
=1extended M function is valid.
RSTM =0extended M function closes output when emergency stop, reset.
=1extended M function remains output when emergency stop, reset.
Note: Extended M function is invalid when the multi-spindle function is valid because of address
multiplexing.
Function explanation
1. When M34 is executed, extended M function 1 (EMOT1) outputs; when M35 is done, its
output is
closed.
2. When M36 is executed, extended M function 2 (EMOT2) outputs; when M37 is done, its
output is
closed.
3. Whether extended M function output is closed is set by K18.6 when emergency stop,
reset.
2.8.24 HOLD Control
Relevant signalsstandard PLC program
Signal
interface
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Address Address
characters
Function
CN62.03 Y0.2 HOLD HOLD release output
Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 8 HOLD
HOLD =0HOLD release control is invalid.
=1HOLD release control is valid.
Function
367
Connection
1. After power-on, there is no emergency stop alarm or servo spindle alarm and the
system delays 4S,
HOLD signal is output to release HOLD.
2. HOLD signal is closed when an emergency stop alarm or servo spindle alarm occurs.
2.8.25 Gear/tool number display
Signal diagnosis
Y0025 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Corresponding
BCD code
LED1
23
LED1
22
LED1
21
LED1
20
LED0
23
LED0
22
LED0
21
LED0
20
LED 0 displays the current tool number, BIT0~BIT3 of PLC diagnosis number Y25 are
BCD code
of the current tool number; LED 1 displays the gear of the current spindle, BIT4~BIT7 of
PLC
diagnosis number Y25 are BCD code of the current spindle gear and is shown below:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
When the tool count is less than 10, the gear and the tool number separately use one
LED to
display.
When the tool count is more than 10, LED 1 displays 10-digit numbers and the LED 0
displays the single digits.
When the gear and the tool number are displayed in time-division, that is, the gear
instead of
the tool number is firstly display, the tool number instead of the gear is displayed after
1.5S, and the
system executes them like the above cycle.
2.9 Commonly Use Sign of Electricity Drawing

TAC-100XT DC24V power supply and the electromagnetic valve with power working
current
separately use DC24V, and the electronic component explanations are as follows:
Name Sign Graph Name Sign Graph
Air breaker QF
Contactor coil
contact and auxiliary
contact
KM
transformer TC
Heat relay and
contact
FR
Rectifier VC
Capacity C
Motor M
Resistant R
Diode VD Hall switch
368
Connection
Electromagnetic
coil
YV
Travel switch SQ
Veneer socket
Pedal switch SA
Relay coil and
contact
KA
Fuse FU
Chapter 3 Parameters
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
369
Volume Connection
CHAPTER 3 PARAMETERS
The CNC bit and data parameters are described in this chapter, various functions can be
set by
these parameters. The major parameter data type are listed as follows:
Data type Range
(1) Bit
(2) Bit axis
(3) Bit spindle
8 bit, 0 or 1
(4) Word
(5) Word axis
(6) Word spindle
See relevant
parameters for
details
Note: if the data type is not specified, the type is bit or word.
3.1 Parameter Description (by sequence)

3.1.1 Bit parameter
The state parameter is expressed as follows:
Parameter No. BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
0 0 1 *** *** *** ACS MPG PROG ISC INI
Bit4 1: Spindle analog voltage control
0: Spindle switching volume control
Bit3 1: MPG mode
0: Step mode
Bit2 1: Programming by radius
0: Programming by diameter
Bit1 1: IS-C incremental system
0: IS-B incremental system
Increment system Least input increment,
least command increment
Abbreviation
0 0.001mm,0.0001inch IS-B
1 0.0001mm, 0.00001inch IS-C
Bit0 1: Inch input
0: Metric input
0 0 2 CLK *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC TNRC TLIF
Bit7 1: Show clock
370
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Volume Connection
0: Conceal clock
Bit4 1: Tool life management group skip active
0: Tool life management group skip inactive
Bit3 1: Tool life management active in MDI mode
0: Tool life management inactive in MDI mode
Bit2 1: Tool life counting type 2, by times
0: Tool life counting type 1, by times
Bit1 1: Tool nose radius offset active
0: Tool nose radius offset inactive
Bit0 1: Tool life management active
0: Tool life management inactive
0 0 3 *** *** PCOMP TCOMP *** *** *** OIM
Bit5 1: Pitch error offset active
0: Pitch error offset inactive
Bit4 1: Tool offset by coordinate offset
0: Tool offset by move
Bit0 1: Offset automatically change in metric and inch conversion
0: Offset not change in metric and inch conversion
0 0 4 ABOT RDRN DECI ORC *** *** PROD SCW
Bit7 1: do not memorize absolute coordinate in power-down
0: memorize the absolute coordinate in power-down
Bit6 1: G00 is rapid traverse speed in dry run mode
0: G00 is manual feedrate in dry run mode
Bit5 1: DEC signal is high level for machine zero return
0: DEC signal is low level for machine zero return
Bit4 1: Tool offset by radius
0: Tool offset by diameter
Bit1 1: Relative position for programming in POSITION page
0: Relative position involving offset in POSITION page
Bit0 1: Inch system for min. code unit, active after repowering
0: Metric system for min. code unit, active after repowering
0 0 5 *** *** SMAL M30 *** POSRE PPD PCMD
Bit 5 1: Manual spindle gear change during the execution of S code;
0: Automatic spindle gear change during the execution of S code;
Bit 4 1: Cursor returns to the head of the program after the execution of M30;
0: Cursor does not return to the head of the program after the execution of M30;
Bit 2: 1: Position recording signal PRC is used during tool setting;
0: Position recording signal PRC is not used during tool setting;
Bit 1: 1: G50 sets relative coordinate value;
0: G50 does not set relative coordinate value;
Bit 0: 1: Axial output wave is pulse;
371
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Volume Connection
0: Axial output wave is square;
0 0 6 *** *** *** ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX
Bit4 1: 5th zero return mode C
0: 5th zero return mode B
Bit3 1: 4th zero return mode C
0: 4th zero return mode B
Bit2 1: Y zero return type C
0: Y zero return type B
Bit1 1: Z zero return type C
0: Z zero return type B
Bit0 1: X zero return type C
0: X zero return type B
0 0 7 DISP *** SMZ ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX
Bit7 1: Enter ABSOLUTE POS page after power on
0: Enter RELATIVE POS page after power on
Bit5 1: Execute the next block after all motion block exactly are executed to the in-position
0: Smooth transition between two blocks
Bit4 1: In machine zero return, 5th deceleration signal (DEC5) and one-revolution signal
(PC5) are
parallel(use one proximity switch as the deceleration signal and zero signal)
0: In machine zero return, 5th deceleration (DEC5) and one-revolution signal (PC5) is
separately connected (need the separate deceleration signal and zero signal)
Bit3 1: In machine zero return, 4th deceleration signal (DEC4) and one-revolution signal
(PC4) are
parallel(use one proximity switch as the deceleration signal and zero signal)
0: In machine zero return, 4th deceleration (DEC4) and one-revolution signal (PC4) is
separately connected (need the separate deceleration signal and zero signal)
Bit2 1: DECY and PCY signals are in parallel (a proximity switch taken as both DECY and
zero
signals) during machine zero return
0: DECY and PCY signals are separate (separate DECY and zero signals needed) during
machine zero return
Bit1 1: DECZ and PCZ signals are in parallel (a proximity switch taken as both DECZ and
zero
0: DECZ and PCZ signals are separate (separate DECZ and zero signals needed) during
machine zero return
Bit0 1: DECX and PCX signals are in parallel (a proximity switch taken as both DECX and
zero
0: DECX and PCX signals are separate (separate DECX and zero signals needed) during
machine zero return
0 0 8 *** *** *** DIR5 DIR4 DIRY DIRZ DIRX
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit4 1: Direction signal (DIR) in 5th positive movement is HIGH

0: Direction signal (DIR) in 5th negative movement is HIGH
Bit3 1: Direction signal (DIR) in 4th positive movement is HIGH
0: Direction signal (DIR) in 4th negative movement is HIGH
Bit2 1: Direction signal (DIR) is high level as Y axis moves positively
372
Volume Connection
0: Direction signal (DIR) is low level as Y axis moves negatively
Bit1 1: Direction signal (DIR) is high level as Z axis moves positively
0: Direction signal (DIR) is high level as Z axis moves negatively
Bit0 1: Direction signal (DIR) is high level as X axis moves positively
0: Direction signal (DIR) is high level as X axis moves negatively
0 0 9 *** *** *** 5ALM 4ALM YALM ZALM XALM
Bit4 1: 5th alarm signal (ALM5) is LOW alarm
0: 5th alarm signal (ALM5) is HIGH alarm
Bit3 1: 4th alarm signal (ALM5) is LOW alarm
0: 4th alarm signal (ALM5) is HIGH alarm
Bit2 1: Y alarm signal (YALM) is low level alarm
0: Y alarm signal (YALM) is high level alarm
Bit1 1: Z alarm signal (ZALM) is low level alarm
0: Z alarm signal (ZALM) is high level alarm
Bit0 1: X alarm signal (XALM) signal is low level alarm
0: X alarm signal (XALM) signal is high level alarm
0 1 0 *** *** *** CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1
Bit0~ Bit4: Pulse frequency setting values of backlash offset (by BCD code)
The set frequency =(setting value+1) Kpps
CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1
Set frequency
(Kpps)
000001
000012
000103
000114
001005
001016
001107
001118
010009
0 1 0 0 1 10
0 1 0 1 0 11
0 1 0 1 1 12
0 1 1 0 0 13
0 1 1 0 1 14
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 1 1 1 0 15
0 1 1 1 1 16
1 0 0 0 0 17
1 0 0 0 1 18
1 0 0 1 0 19
1 0 0 1 1 20
1 0 1 0 0 21
1 0 1 0 1 22
373
Volume Connection
1 0 1 1 0 23
1 0 1 1 1 24
1 1 0 0 0 25
1 1 0 0 1 26
1 1 0 1 0 27
1 1 0 1 1 28
1 1 1 0 0 29
1 1 1 0 1 30
1 1 1 1 0 31
1 1 1 1 1 32
0 1 1 BDEC BD8 *** *** NORF ZNIK *** ***
Bit7 1: Backlash offset type B, the offset data are output by ascending or descending type
and the
set frequency is inactive;
0: Backlash offset type A, the offset data are output by the set frequency (by bit parameter
No.010) or 1/8 of it.
Bit6 1: Backlash offset is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency
0: Backlash offset is done by the set frequency
Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return inactive
0: Manual machine zero return active
Bit2 1: Direction key locked during zero return, homing continues to end by pressing
direction key
once;
0: Direction key unlocked, which is held on during zero return
0 1 2 APRS WSFT DOFSI *** EAL *** EBCL ISOT
Bit7 1: Automatic ABSOLUTE set after reference return,;
0: ABSOLUTE not automatically set after reference return
Bit6 1: Workpiece coordinate offset active, defined by offset No.000
0: Workpiece coordinate offset inactive
Bit5 1: Trial tool setting active
0: Trial tool setting inactive
Bit3 1: Program editing allowed during CNC alarming
0: Program editing unallowed during CNC alarming
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit1 1: Program end sign EOB displayed for ;

0: Program end sign EOB displayed for *
Bit0 1: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse active
0: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse inactive
0 1 2 APRS WSFT DOFSI *** EAL *** *** ISOT
Bit7 1: Automatic ABSOLUTE set after reference return,;
Bit6 1: Workpiece coordinate offset active, defined by offset No.000
0: Workpiece coordinate offset inactive
Bit5 1: Trial tool setting active
374
Volume Connection
Bit0 1: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse active
0: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse inactive
0 1 3 *** *** *** HW5 HW4 HWY HWZ HWX
Bit4 1: Coordinates increase in 5th MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in 5th MPG (CW) rotation
Bit3 1: Coordinates increase in 4th MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in 4th MPG (CW) rotation
Bit2 1: Coordinates increase in Y MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in Y MPG (CW) rotation
Bit1 1: Coordinates increase in Z MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in Z MPG (CW) rotation
Bit0 1: Coordinates increase in X MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in X MPG (CW) rotation
0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX
Bit 4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0
1: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X have the machine zeroes. The system needs to check the deceleration
signal
and zero signal in executing the machine zero return
0: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X have no machine zeroes. The system does not check the deceleration
signal
and zero signal till it returns to the zero of machine coordinate in executing the machine
zero return
0 1 7 SCRD *** RSCD *** TSD QNI TSL TS1
Bit7 1:Coordinate system is stored before power-off;
0: Coordinate system is not stored before power-off; the default system is set by G54 after
power-on;
Bit5 1: Coordinate system is set by G54 after reset;
0: Coordinate system is not changed after reset;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit3 1: Movement direction discrimination is valid during offset measurement 4 point input;
0: Movement direction discrimination is invalid during offset measurement 4 point input;
Bit2 1: Tool offset number is set through G signal;
0: Tool offset number is set through the current cursor;
Bit1 1 Tool offset measurement detection signal is valid at low level;
0: Tool offset measurement detection signal is valid at high level;
Bit0 1:Tool offset automatic measurement detection signal 1 point input;
0: Tool offset automatic measurement detection signal 4-point input;
1 7 2 *** MST MSP MOT ESP *** LZR ***
Bit6 1: External cycle start signal (ST) inactive, it is not the cycle start switch and can be
defined
by macro code (#1014)
0: External cycle start signal (ST) active
Bit5 1: External SP signal inactive, and it is not the stop switch and can be defined by
macro
code.( #1015)
375
Volume Connection
0: External SP signal active with external dwell switch needed, otherwise CNC shows
Stop.mailto:M@SP=1
Bit4 1: Not detect software stroke limit
0: Detect software stroke limit
Bit3 1: Emergency stop inactive
0: Emergency stop active
Bit1 1: Software limit is inactive after power-on and before machine zero return;
0: Software limit is active after power-on and before machine zero return;
1 7 4 *** *** *** *** KEY1 *** *** ***
Bit3 1: Program switch ON at power on
0: Program switch OFF at power on
1 7 5 SPFD SAR THDA VAL5 VAL4 VALY VALZ VALX
Bit7 1: In cutting feed, do not permit the spindle stopping rotation; the spindle stops, the
feed also
stops when the system appears No.404 alarm cutting
0: In cutting feed, permit the spindle stops rotation; the spindle stops rotation, but the feed
does not stop
Bit6 1: Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting
0: Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting
Bit5 1: Thread machining is the exponential acceleration/deceleration
0: Thread machining is the linear acceleration/deceleration
Bit4 1: 5th movement key is positive, is negative
0: 5th movement key is positive, is negative
Bit3 1: 4th movement key is positive, is negative
0: 4th movement key is positive is negative
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit2 1: Y movement key is positive is negative

0: Y movement key is positive is negative
Bit1 1: Z movement key is positive is negative
0: Z movement key is positive is negative
Bit0 1: X movement key is positive is negative
0: X movement key is positive is negative
1 8 0 NAT *** *** *** *** *** *** SPOS
Bit7 1: Function ATAN, ASIN range is 90.0270.0;
0: Function ATAN, ASIN range is -90.090.0
Bit0 1: DIS TO GO displayed in POS&PRG page
0: RELATIVE POS displayed in POS&PRG page
376
Volume Connection
1 8 1 RLC MRC ZCL *** MCL *** *** LCNMD
Bit7 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after reset;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after reset;
Bit6 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after the execution of M30, M02;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after the execution of M30, M02;
Bit5 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after reference point return;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after reference point return;
Bit3 1: Blocks edited in MDI mode are deleted after reset;
0: Block edited in MDI mode are not deleted after reset;
Bit0 1: In linear chamfering, L means the length between chamfering point and cross
point;
0: In linear chamfering, L means the length of chamfering;
1 8 3 *** *** *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MARX
Bit4 1: for 5th, press key to execute the machine zero return
0:for 5th, press key to execute the machine zero return
Bit3 1: for 4th, press to execute the machine zero return
0: for 4th, press to execute the machine zero return
Bit2 1: for Y, press to execute the machine zero return
0: for Y, press to execute the machine zero return
Bit1 1:for Z, press to execute the machine zero return
0: for Z, press to execute the machine zero return
Bit0 1: for X, press to execute the machine zero return
0: for X, press to execute the machine zero return
1 8 4 *** *** *** *** *** L2 L1 L0
Bit0, Bit1, Bit2: Language selection:
Language Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1
Portuguese 0 1 0
Spanish 0 1 1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Russian 1 1 0
1 8 5 SK0 SKF AEO *** *** *** PRPD PLA
Bit7 1: Skip input active as G31 signal is 0
377
Volume Connection
0: Skip input active as G31 signal is 1
Bit6 1: Feedrate override per minute or dry run active for G31
0: Feedrate override per minute or dry run inactive for G31
Bit5 1: Input active if G36, G37 (XAE, ZAE) signal is 0
0: Input active if G36, G37 (XAE, ZAE) signal is 1
Bit1 1: Axis rapid traverse rate of PLC by input value
0: Axis rapid traverse rate of PLC by parameter value (X axis: No.022Z axis:No.023Y
axis:No.134)
Bit0 1: PLC axis control active, active after repowering
0: PLC axis control inactive, active after repowering
1 8 6 RTORI SRS *** *** *** RTCRG *** ***
Bit7 1: In executing M29, the spindle executes the machine zero return
0: In executing M29, the spindle does not execute the machine zero return
Bit6 1: The spindle selection signal is RGTSPn in the multiple spindle rigid tapping
0: The spindle selection signal is SWSn in the multiple spindle rigid tapping
Bit2 1: In rigid tapping cancel, do not wait for G61.0 to be 0 in executing the next block
0: In rigid tapping cancel, wait for G61.0 to be 0 in executing the next block
1 8 7 IS1 IS0 RCS *** *** *** ROS ROT
[Data type]Bit axis
BIT7, BIT6set increment system of each axis.00accordance with increment system of
the system.
01IS-A10IS-B11IS-C
Bit5 1Cs axis function of the additional axis is valid (power-on again);
0Cs axis function of the additional axis is invalid (power-on again).
rotary axis
A type;11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B type); 10: set the additional
axis to be invalid.
Note: The parameter is invalid to setting of X, Z axis.
1 8 8 *** RRT *** *** *** RRL RAB ROA
[Data type]bit axis
Bit6 1Zero return D mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis;
0Zero return A, B, C mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis (power-on
again).
Bit2 1The relative coordinate cycle function is valid when the additional axis is rotary;
0The relative coordinate cycle function is invalid when the additional axis is
rotary(power-on
again).
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit1 1The rotation direction is based on that of sign when the additional axis is rotary;
0The rotation direction is based on the nearby principle when the additional axis is rotary.
Bit0 1The absolute coordinate cycle function is valid when the additional axis is rotary;
0The absolute coordinate cycle function is invalid when the additional axis is rotary
(power-on again).
378
Volume Connection
Note: The parameter is invalid to setting of X, Z axis.
1 9 6 MSI CSS *** MSEN *** *** *** ***
Bit7 1: The multiple spindle control B
0: The multiple spindle control A
Bit6 1: Cs control of each axis is executed in the multiple spindle control
0: Cs control of only the 1st spindle is executed in the multiple spindle control
Bit4 1: The multiple spindle control is enabled
0: The multiple spindle control is disabled
2 0 3 *** *** *** ABP5 ABP4 ABPY ABPZ ABPX
Bit4 1: 5th pulse outputs based on the two-phase quadrature
0: 5th pulse outputs based on (pulse+direction)
Bit3 1: 4th pulse outputs based on the two-phase quadrature
0: 4th pulse outputs based on (pulse+direction)
Bit2 1: Y pulse outputs based on the two-phase quadrature
0: Y pulse outputs based on (pulse+direction)
Bit1 1: Z pulse outputs based on the two-phase quadrature
0: Z pulse outputs based on (pulse+direction)
Bit0 1: X pulse outputs based on the two-phase quadrature
0: X pulse outputs based on (pulse+direction)
3.1.2 Data parameter
0 1 5 CMRn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Pulse frequency multiplication coefficient
Data range 132767
0 1 6 CMDn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Pulse frequency division coefficient;
Data range 132767
Explanation: Formula of electric gear ratio::
D
Z
Z
L
C
CMD
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CMR 4* * *
=
: Least command increment;
ZM: Teeth number of pulley on leading screw side;
C: Motor encoder line number;
ZD Teeth number of pulley on motor side;
L: Screw lead
0 1 9 THDCH
Data meaning Run-out length in threading
Data range 0225
Thread run-out width= THDCH0.1screw lead
0 2 1 PSANGNT
Data type Word spindle
379
Volume Connection
Data meaning Voltage offset value when spindle max. speed analog voltage output is
10V
Data unit mV
Data range -20002000(Unit: mV)
0 2 2 RPDFn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Maximum rapid traverse rate of all axes
Data unit
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
Data range 1099999999
0 2 3 LINTn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Acceleration/deceleration time constant of each axis during rapid
traverse
Data unit ms
Data range 0~4000
0 2 6 THRDT
Data meaning ACC&DEC time constant of short axis in thread run-out
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
0 2 7 FEDMX
Data meaning Upper limits of axis cutting feed
Data unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1015000 1015000
Inch machine 55800 105800
0 2 8 THDFL
Data meaning X, Z initial speed in threading (mm/min)
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
380
Volume Connection
Metric
machine 68000 68000
0 2 9 FEEDT
Data meaning Exponential ACC&DEC time constant of cutting and manual feed
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
0 3 0 FEDFL
Data meaning Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in
cutting
feed
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 3 1 JOGSPEED
Data meaning the set speed when the manual feedrate override is 100%
Data unit
Data range 1030000
0 3 2 RPDFLn
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data type Word axis

Data meaning Rapid traverse rate as axis rapid override is F0
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 3 3 ZRNFLn
381
Volume Connection
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Low rate as axes return to machine zero
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 3 4 BKLn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning backlash compensation of each axis
Data unit
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Data range
Note : X is the diameter value.
0 3 6 SPDLC
Data meaning Voltage offset for 0V analog voltage output of spindle min. speed code
Data unit mV
Data range -10001000
0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 4 0 GRMAX4
Data meaning GRMAX1, GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: Max. speeds of gear 1, 2, 3,
4
respectively when spindle analog voltage output is 10V (the function defined
byTAC-1002T PLC is: if the spindle automatic gearing is active, it uses the
speeds of M41, M42, M43, M44; if the automatic gearing is inactive or CNC is
powered on, the gear is memorized by parameter or the gear 1 is defaulted.)
Data unit r/min
Data range 109999
382
Volume Connection
0 4 1 JOGFL
Data meaning Exponential ac-deceleration start speed and deceleration final speed in
manual feed
Data unit
Data range 08000
0 4 2 SEQINC
Data meaning Block No. increment for auto block No. insertion
Data range 1100
0 4 3 LOWSP
Data meaning (G96) Spindle min. speed under the constant surface speed control
Data unit r/min
Data range 09999
0 4 4 BRATE0
Data meaning Serial communication baud rate,
Data unit bit/s
Data range 1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400 57600 115200
0 4 5 LT1X1
0 4 6 LT1Z1
Data type Word axis
Data meaning LT1X1X,LT1Z1Zpositive max. travelLT1X2X,LT1Z2Z
negative
max. travel
Data unit
Data range -9999999999999999
Note: If the BIT2 of the parameter No.001 is set for diameter, the X axis value is specified by
diameter; if for
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
radius, the X axis value is specified by radius.

0 4 7 PRSn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return
Data unit
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Data range -9999999999999999
383
Volume Connection
0 5 1 MRCCD
Data meaning Each feeding for G71, G72 rough turning cycle, which may also be
changed by
program code in auto running.
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 199999 1999999
Inch input 199999 1999999
0 5 2 MRCDT
Data meaning Each retraction for G71, G72 rough turning cycle, which may also be
changed
by program code in auto running.
Data unit
Data range 099999
0 5 3 PECSCX
Data meaning X retraction amount in G73, which may be also changed by program
code in
auto running.
Data unit
Data range -99999999999999
0 5 4 PECSCZ
Data meaning Z axis rough turning retraction in G73, which may also be changed by
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
program
code in auto running
Data unit
Data range -99999999999999
0 5 5 PATIM
Data meaning Cycle times of G73, which may also be changed by program code in
auto
running
384
Volume Connection
Data unit times
Data range 19999
0 5 6 GROVE
Data meaning Retraction value of Z axis in G74; retraction value of X axis in G75; a
specified
value in program during automatic running can also change the setting of this
parameter;
Data unit
Data range 099999
0 5 7 THRPT
Data meaning Repetitions of G76 finish machining, which may also be changed by
program
code in auto running
Data unit times
Data range 199
0 5 8 THANG
Data meaning Tool nose angle of G76 cycle, which may also be changed by program
code in
auto running
Data unit deg
Data range 099
0 5 9 THCLM
Data meaning Min. cut depth of G76 cycle, which may also be changed by program
code in
auto running
Data unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

Data range
IS-B IS-C
Inch input 099999 0999999
0 6 0 THDFN
Data meaning Finish allowance of G76, which may also be changed by program code
in auto
running
Data unit
385
Volume Connection
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Inch input 099999 0999999
0 6 7 SFTREV
Data meaning Output voltage of spindle gearing
Data unit mV
Data range 010000
0 6 8 SJOGREV
Data meaning spindle speed in manual (MPG) mode
Data unit r/min
Data range 03000
0 7 0 ENCODER_CNT
Data meaning Spindle encoder pulses
Data unit line/revolution
Data range 1005000
0 7 1 RESET_TIME
Data meaning Output time of reset signal
Data unit ms
Data range 164080
0 7 2 SAR_DELEY
Data meaning Delay detecting time of SAR signal
Data unit ms
Data range 04080
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 7 3 SPMOTORMAX
Data meaning Max. spindle motor clamping speed, setting value=(max. spindle motor
clamping speed/max. spindle motor speed) 4095
Data unit r/min
Data range 04095
Setting value =max. clamp speed of spindle/max. speed of spindle motor4095.
386
Volume Connection
0 7 4 SPMOTORMIN
Data meaning Min. spindle motor clamping speed, setting value=(min. spindle motor
clamping speed/max. spindle motor speed) 4095
Data unit r/min
Data range 04095
min. clamping speed of spindle motor/max. speed of spindle motor4095
Setting value =
0 7 5 SPSPEEDLIMIT
Data meaning Maximum spindle rev speed(0~6000r/min)[0:unlimited]
Data unit r/min
Data range 06000
0 8 4 TMAX
Data meaning Total tools number selection
Data unit piece
Data range 132
0 9 6 PECMINn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Minimum pitch error compensation position number
Data range 01023
0 9 7 PECMAXn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Maximum pitch error compensation position number
Data range 01023
0 9 8 PECORGn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Pitch error compensation position numbers corresponding to machine
zero
points
387
Volume Connection
Data range 01023
0 9 9 PECINTn
Data type Word axis
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data meaning Pitch error compensation intervals

Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000999999 100009999999
Inch machine 400999999 40009999999
1 0 6 THD_SPD_VAR
Data meaning Spindle fluctuation alarm limit in threading (not detect spindle
fluctuation alarm
if set to 0)
Data unit %
Data range 0100
Formula=|current speed previous period speed|200/(current speedprevious period
speed)
1 0 7 THD_TAIL_SPD
Data meaning Short axis speed in threading run-out (run-out by threading feedrate if
set to 0)
Data unit
Data range 08000
1 0 9 SPL_REV_SPD
Data meaning Spindle jog speed (r/min)
Data unit r/min
Data range 18000
1 1 0 MGR
Data meaning Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: spindle gear teeth number
Data range 1255
1 1 1 SGR
Data type Word axis
388
Volume Connection
Data meaning Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: encoder gear teeth number
Data range 1255
1 1 3 REF_SPDn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Axes rapid traverse rates in machine zero return
Data unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

1 1 4 REF_OFFSETn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Offset of each axis machine zero
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric input -9999999999 -999999
999999
Inch input -9999999999 -999999
999999
1 1 9 KEY_P_NUM
Data meaning Number of active keys at a time
Data unit piece
Data range 25
1 2 0 REF1_COORDn
c1 2 1 REF1_COORDn
1 2 2 REF2_COORDn
1 2 3 REF2_COORDn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning REF1_COORDn 1st reference point machine coordinates
REF2_COORDn 2nd reference point machine coordinates
REF3_COORDn 3rd reference point machine coordinates
REF4_COORDn 4th reference point machine coordinates
Data unit
389
Volume Connection
Data range -9999999999999999
1 4 0 TWEAR_MAX
Data meaning + or limit of each input wear in TOOL OFFSET&WEAR interface
Data unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Inch input 199999 1999999
1 4 1 AUTO_OFFSET_FEED
Data meaning Feedrate in automatic tool offset measure
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
1 4 2 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X
1 4 3 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z
Data meaning XAUTO_OFFSET_Y_X,ZAUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z values in
automatic tool
offset
Data unit
Data range 19999999
Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter or radius programming
1 4 4 AUTO_OFFSET_E_X
1 4 5 AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z
Data meaning AUTO_OFFSET_E_XX,AUTO_OFFSET_E_ZZ values in
automatic tool
offset
Data unit
390
Volume Connection
Data range 19999999
Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter or radius programming
1 5 4 RADIUS_ERR_RANGE
Data meaning Max. arc radius error
Data unit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

Data range
IS-B IS-C
1 6 2 CSACCFL
Data meaning initial speed of CS acceleration/deceleration
Data unit deg/min
Data range 04000
1 6 3 CSACCTIME
Data meaning acceleration/deceleration time constant of CS
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
1 6 6 CAACCFL
Data meaning initial speed of linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping
Data unit
Data range 04000
1 6 7 CAACCTIME
Data meaning linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool
in-feed
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
391
Volume Connection
1 6 9 RTAPBACKRATE
Data meaning override value in rigid tapping tool retraction (override is 100% when it
is set to
0)
Data unit
Data range 0200
1 7 0 CMCODE
Data meaning M code used for spindle clamping during rigid tapping
Data unit
Data range 397
1 7 1 CAMAX_S
Data meaning max. spindle speed in rigid tapping
Data unit r/min
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data range 06000

2 1 6 ROT_REVn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning movement pre rev when the additional axis is rotary
Data unit
Rotary axis 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Data range 100099999999
2 1 9 PLCDIDOn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Select DI/DO according to PLC controlled axes (0 means PLC axis
control is
not applied)
Data unit
Data range 04
2 2 4 AXISNUM
Data meaning Axis number displayed on the screen
Data unit
Data range 25
2 2 5 NAME_n
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Axis name definition of each axis
Data range 65, 66, 67, 88, 89, 90
Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value
X 88 A 65 C 67
392
Volume Connection
Z 90 B 66 Y 89
2 3 0 ATTRIB_n
Data meaning ATTRIB_n is the additional attribution setting
Data range 0~7
Setting value Meaning
0 It is neither the three basic axes and an axis parallel to them
1 X axis of the three basic axes
2 Y axis of the three basic axes
3 Z axis of the three basic axes
5 An axis parallel to X
6 An axis parallel to Y
7 An axis parallel to Z
2 3 5 POLARLINEAXIS
Data meaning Linear axis setting of the polar coordinate interpolation
Data range 0~4
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 X axis
1 Z axis
2 Y axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
2 3 6 POLARTOSAXIS
Data meaning Rotary axis setting of the polar coordinate interpolation
Data range 2~4
2 Y axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
2 3 7 ACCEPTANGLEERR
Data meaning Maximum fluctuating value when the angle is 0or 180for C tool offset
C
Data range
IS-B IS-C
01000 010000
2 4 0 HWRPDFRATE
Data meaning Rapid traverse override of MPG trial cut function
Data range 0100
393
Volume Connection
2 4 1 HWPULSEINC
Data meaning Movement amount per pulse during trial cut function
Data range 0100
3.1.3 PLC parametersstandard PLC definition
3.1.3.1 K parameters
K 1 0 LMIT LMIS *** JSPD OVRI *** RSJG RRW
Bit7 1: overtravel of each axis is enabled;
0: overtravel of each axis is disabled.
Bit6 1: alarm for overtravel signal LOW of each axis;
0: alarm for overtravel signal LOW of each axis
Bit4 1: spindle JOG is enabled in any modes;
0: spindle JOG is enabled in Manual, MPG, Zero Return mode.
Bit3 1: feedrate override is fixed to 100%;
0: feedrate override can be adjusted.
Bit1 1: spindle lubricating, cooling output remain in reset;
0: spindle lubricating, cooling output are disabled in reset.
Bit0 1: the cursor returning to the beginning of the program is enabled in any working
mode in
reset;
0: the cursor returning to the beginning of the program is enabled in Edit working mode.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
K 1 1 CHOT CHET TCPS CTCP TSGN CHTB CHTA

Bit7 1: checks the tool post worktable overheating;
0: does not check the tool post worktable overheating.
Bit5 1: checks the tool signal when the tool change is completed;
0: does not check the tool signal when the tool change is completed.
Bit4 1: tool post locking signal HIGH(be connected with +24V) is enabled;
0: tool post locking signal LOW(not be connected with +24V) is enabled
Bit3 1: checks the tool post locking signal;
0: does not check the tool post locking signal.
Bit2 1: tool signal LOW(not be connected with +24V) is enabled;
0: tool signal HIGH(be connected with +24V)is enabled.
Bit1 Bit0 : tool change mode selects Bit1 tool change mode selects Bit 0
K 1 2 RCKC CCHU NYQP SLSP SLQP
Bit4 1: External chuck control is enabled during program running;
0: External chuck control is disabled during program running
Bit3 1: the system checks the chuck in-position signal;
0: the system does not check the chuck in-position signal.
1 0 Yantai AK31 series(6, 8, 10, 12 tools)
1 1 Liuxin hydraulic tool post8, 10, 12 tools
394
Volume Connection
Bit2 1: in outer mode, NQPJ is the outer chuck released signal, and WQPJ is the outer
chuck
clamped signal;
0: in inner mode, NQPJ is the inner chuck clamped signal, and WQPJ is the inner chuck
released signal.
Bit1 1: the system does not check whether the chuck is clamped when the chuck function
is
enabled;
0: the system checks whether the chuck is clamped when the chuck function is enabled;
when the chuck is not clamped, the system cannot start the spindle and alarms.
Bit0 1: the chuck control function is enabled;
0: the chuck control function is disabled.
K 1 3 RTSC SPTW SLTW
Bit2 1: External tailstock control is enabled during program running;
0: External tailstock control is disabled during program running;
Bit1 1: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward does not interlock, the
tailstock
executes the forward no matter what the spindle is in any states; the spindle rotates no
matter what the tailstock is in any states;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward interlock, the tailstock cannot
execute the forward when the spindle rotates; the spindle cannot be started when the
tailstock does not execute the forward.
Bit0 1: the tailstock control function is enabled;
0: the tailstock control function is disabled.
K 1 4 HPST SGSP SPB4 PB4 SPB3 PB3
Bit7 1: the hydraulic control function is enabled;
0: the hydraulic control function is disabled.
Bit4 1: Spindle is enabled when the protection door is open
0: Spindle is disabled when the protection door is open;
Bit3 1: when SAGT is connected with +24V, the safety door is disabled;
0: when SAGT is not connected with +24V, the safety door is disabled.
Bit2 1: the safety door check function is enabled;
0: the safety door check function is disabled.
Bit1 1: when PRES is not connected with +24Vthe system alarms for pressure LOW;
0: when PRES is connected with +24Vthe system alarms for pressure LOW.
Bit0 1: the pressure LOW check function is enabled;
0: the pressure LOW check function is disabled.
K 1 5 RCS RSCS SPOR SHT AGIM AGIN AGER
Bit7 1: Cs function is enabled;
0: Cs function is disabled.
Bit6 1: the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset;
0: the spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.
Bit5 1: the spindle eight-point orientation function is enabled;
0: the spindle eight-point orientation function is disabled.
Bit3 1: the spindle gear power-down memory;
0: the spindle gear power-down does not execute the memory.
395
Volume Connection
Bit2 1: the gear in-position signal M41I, M42I which are not connected with +24V is
enabled;
0: the gear in-position signal M41I, M42I which are connected with +24V is enabled.
Bit1 1: when the spindle automatic gear change is to Gear 1, 2, the system checks the
gear
change in-position signal M41I, M42I;
0: when the spindle automatic gear change is to Gear 1, 2, the system does not check the
gear change in-position signal M41I, M42I.
Bit0 1: the spindle automatic gear change function is enabled;
0: the spindle automatic gear change function is disabled
K 1 6 SINC SINC2 SPWM CLWM M32A ROVI SOVI
Bit7 1: When StepMPGmode1000-gear is disabled,1, 10, 100 gear is enabled;
0: When StepMPGmode1000-gear is disabled,1, 10, 100, x1000 gear is enabled.
Bit6 1: When the increment is 1u, gear 1000 in STEP (MPG) mode is disabled;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0: When the increment is 1u, gear 1000 in STEP (MPG) mode is enabled;
Bit5 1: When spindle stop command is in the same block with movement command, these
commands are executed at the same time;
0: When spindle stop command is in the same block with movement command,
movement
command comes first to spindle stop command;
Bit4 1: When cooling OFF command and movement command are in the same block, they
are
executed at the same time;
0: When cooling OFF command and movement command are in the same block,
movement
command comes first to the cooling OFF command;
Bit2 1: the lubricating outputs in power-on when the automatic lubricating is enabled;
0: the lubricating does not output in power-on when the automatic lubricating is enabled.
Bit1 1: the external feedrate override inverses;
0: the external feedrate override does not inverse.
Bit0 1: the external feedrate override switch is enabled
0: the external feedrate override switch is disabled.
K 1 7 MSEN SCLP SALM2 SALM SSTP SONC
Bit7 1: the multiple spindle control function is enabled;
0: the multiple spindle control function is disabled.
Bit6 1: the spindle clamped command clamps the 2nd spindle when the multiple spindle is
enabled;
0: the spindle clamped command clamps the 1st spindle when the multiple spindle is
enabled
Bit5 1: the system alarms when the 2nd spindle is LOW;
0: the system alarms when the 2nd spindle is HIGH.
Bit4 1: the system alarms when the spindle is LOW;
0: the system alarms when the spindle is HIGH.
Bit3 1: the analog voltage is disabled when the spindle stops;
0: the analog voltage is enabled when the spindle stops.
Bit2 1: Spindle is disabled when clamping;
0: Spindle motor torque decreases to 0 when spindle is clamping;
K 1 8 EXTM RSTM HOLD *** MDOK MD4 MD2 MD1
396
Volume Connection
Bit7 1: extended M function is valid;
0: extended M function is invalid
Bit6 1: extended M function remains output when emergency stop, reset;
0: extended M function output closes when emergency stop, reset.
Bit5 1: HOLD release control is valid;
0: HOLD release control is invalid.
Bit3 1: the operation mode is specified by MD4, MD2, MD1 state when the system is
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
turned on;
0: the operation mode is the state which is that of power-off when the system is turned on.
MD4 MD2 MD1 Operation mode in power-on
0 0 0 MDI mode
0 0 1 Auto mode
0 1 0 Program zero return
0 1 1 Edit mode
1 0 0 MPG mode
1 0 1 Manual mode
1 1 0 Machine zero return
3.1.3.2 DT parameter
Address Meaning
DT000 Time for original gear disabling during spindle automatic
gear changing (ms)
DT001 Delay time after the changed spindle gear is in position (ms)
DT002 Detection time for low pressure alarm (ms)
DT004 Permit time for tool changing (ms)
DT005 M command execution time (ms)
DT006 S command execution time (ms)
DT007 Delay time for tool post from CW to CCW output (ms)
DT008 Tool post lock signal detection time (ms)
DT009 Tool post CCW rotation lock time (ms)
DT010 Spindle braking delay output time (ms)
DT011 Spindle braking output time (ms)
DT012 Spindle JOG time (ms)
DT013 Time for manual lubricating ON (0: time is not limited) (ms)
DT014 Chuck clamping command execution time (ms)
DT015 Chuck unclamping command execution time (ms)
DT016 Interval of automatic lubricating (ms) (can be modified
directly)
DT017 Time for automatic lubrication output (ms) (can be modified
directly)
DT018 Chuck pulse output width (ms) (can be modified directly)
DT020 Spindle clamping/unclamping time (ms)
DT021 Spindle stop, chuck enable delay time (ms)
DT023 Delay time before spindle motor torque decreases to 0 after
spindle starts clamping
397
Volume Connection
3.1.3.3 DC parameters
Address Meaning
DC000 Spindle zero speed output range (r/min)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
3.2 Parameter Description (by function sequence)

3.2.1 X, Z, Y, 4th,5th axis control logic
0 0 1 *** *** *** ISC
Bit1 1: IS-C incremental system
0: IS-B incremental system.
ISC Least input increment, least command increment Abbreviation
0 0.001mm,0.0001inch IS-B
1 0.0001mm,0.00001inch IS-C
0 0 5 PCMD
PCMD =1: CNC output wave is pulse
=0: CNC output wave is square
0 0 8 DIR5 DIR4 DIRY DIRZ DIRX
Bit4 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 5th positively moves
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 5th negatively moves.
Bit3 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 4th positively moves
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 4th negatively moves.
Bit2 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when Y positively moves
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when Y negatively moves.
Bit1 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when Z positively moves
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when Z negatively moves.
Bit0 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when X positively moves
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when X negatively moves.
If machine moving direction is inconsistent with the actually required direction, it
may be
adjusted by this parameter.
0 0 9 5ALM 4ALM YALM ZALM XALM
Bit4 1: 5th alarm signal (ALM5) is LOW alarm;
0: 5th alarm signal (ALM5) is HIGH alarm.
Bit3 1: 4th alarm signal (ALM4) is LOW alarm;
0: 4th alarm signal (ALM4) is HIGH alarm.
Bit2 1: Y alarm signal (ALMY) is LOW alarm;
0: Y alarm signal (ALMY) is HIGH alarm.
Bit1 1: Z alarm signal (ZALM) is LOW alarm;
0: Z alarm signal (ZALM) is HIGH alarm.
398
Volume Connection
Bit0 1: X alarm signal (XALM) is LOW alarm;
0: X alarm signal (XALM) is HIGH alarm.
This parameter may be adjusted based on the drive unit alarm signal level output.
1 7 5 SPFD
SPFD =1: Feeding stops if spindle stops in cutting
=0: Feeding not stop if spindle stops in cutting
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
1 8 7 IS1 IS0
[Data type]: Bit axis
BIT7, BIT6set increment system of each axis. 00accordance with increment system of
the
system; 01IS-A10IS-B11IS-C.
2 0 3 *** *** *** ABP5 ABP4 ABPY ABPZ ABPX
Bit4 1: 5th pulse outputs according to the two-phase quadradure (need to power-on again);
0: 5th pulse outputs according to (pulse + direction) (need to power-on again).
Bit3 1: 4th pulse outputs according to the two-phase quadradure (need to power-on again);
0: 4th pulse outputs according to (pulse + direction) (need to power-on again).
Bit2 1: Y pulse outputs according to the two-phase quadradure (need to power-on again);
0: Y pulse outputs according to (pulse + direction) (need to power-on again).
Bit1 1: Z pulse outputs according to the two-phase quadradure (need to power-on again);
0: Z pulse outputs according to (pulse + direction) (need to power-on again).
Bit0 1: X pulse outputs according to the two-phase quadradure (need to power-on again);
0: X pulse outputs according to (pulse + direction) (need to power-on again).
3.2.2 Acceleration & deceleration control
0 2 2 RPDFn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning max. speed of X rapid traverse (radius value)
Data unit
0 2 3 LINTn
Data type Word axis
Data meaningAcceleration/deceleration time constant value
Data unit ms
Data range 104000
0 2 7 FEDM
Data meaning Upper limit of cutting feedrate
Data unit
399
Volume Connection
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 2 9 FEEDT
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data meaning Acceleration/deceleration time constant during cutting feed and manual
feed
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
0 3 0 FEDFL
Data meaning The starting speed of cutting feed
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 3 1 JOGSPEED
Data meaning Set speed when manual feedrate override is 100%
Data unit
Data range 1030000
0 3 2 RPDFLn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning The rapid traverse rate when the override is F0
Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
400
Volume Connection
3.2.3 Precision compensation
0 0 3 PEC
Bit5 1: Pitch error offset active
0: Pitch error offset inactive
0 1 0 *** *** *** CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1
CPF4~CPF1: Setting values of backlash offset pulse frequency (by BCD code)
The set frequency =(setting value+1) Kpps
CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1 Set frequency(Kpps)
000001
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
000012
000103
000114
001005
001016
001107
001118
010009
0 1 0 0 1 10
0 1 0 1 0 11
0 1 0 1 1 12
0 1 1 0 0 13
0 1 1 0 1 14
0 1 1 1 0 15
0 1 1 1 1 16
1 0 0 0 0 17
1 0 0 0 1 18
1 0 0 1 0 19
1 0 0 1 1 20
1 0 1 0 0 21
1 0 1 0 1 22
1 0 1 1 0 23
1 0 1 1 1 24
1 1 0 0 0 25
1 1 0 0 1 26
1 1 0 1 0 27
1 1 0 1 1 28
1 1 1 0 0 29
1 1 1 0 1 30
1 1 1 1 0 31
401
Volume Connection
1 1 1 1 1 32
0 1 1 BDEC BD8
BDEC 1: Backlash offset type B, the offset data are output by ascending or
descending type and the set frequency is inactive;
0: Backlash offset type A, the offset data are output by the set frequency (by bit parameter
No.010) or 1/8 of it;
BD8 1: Backlash offset is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency
0: Backlash offset is done by the set frequency
0 3 4 BKLn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning BKLXX axis,BKLZZ axisbacklash compensation.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data unit
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Data range 2000 20000
Data range 02000
Note: X is diameter value.
0 9 6 PECMINn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Minimum pitch error compensation number
Data range 01023
0 9 7 PECMAXn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Maximum pitch error compensation number
Data range 01023
0 9 8 PECORGn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Pitch error compensation number corresponding to machine zero
Data range 01023
0 9 9 PECINTn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Pitch error compensation intervals
Data unit
402
Volume Connection
Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000999999 100009999999
Inch machine 400999999 40009999999
3.2.4 Machine protection
1 7 2 *** MST MSP MOT ESP *** LZR ***
Bit6 1: External cycle start signal (ST) inactive, it is not the cycle start switch and can be
defined by
macro code (#1014)
0: External cycle start signal (ST) active.
Bit5 1: External SP signal inactive, and it is not the dwell switch and can be defined by
macro code.
( #1015)
0: External SP signal active with external dwell switch connected, otherwise CNC shows
stop.mailto:M@SP=1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Bit4 1: Do not detect software stroke limit

0: Detect software stroke limit.
Bit3 1: Emergency stop inactive
0: Emergency stop active
Bit1 1: The software limit is valid after system is energized and before machine zero return
is
performed;
0: The software limit is invalid after system is energized and before machine zero return is
performed;
0 4 5 LT1n1
0 4 6 LT1n2
Data type Word axis
Data meaning LT1n1: Maximum stroke on positive direction; LT1n2: Maximum stroke
on
negative direction
Data Unit
Inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Data range -9999999999999999
Note: When bit 2 of parameter No. 001 set diameter programming, X axis is set by diameter system;
when bit 2 set
radius programming, X axis is set by radius system.
PLC parameter
D T 0 2 PEALMTIM
Data meaning Under-pressure alarm detection time
Data unit ms
403
Volume Connection
D T 2 1 PSANGNT
Data meaning Chuck operation delay time after spindle stop;
Data unit ms
3.2.5 Machine zero return
0 0 4 *** DECI ***
Bit5 1: Deceleration begins as DEC signal is connected to +24V in machine zero return
0: Deceleration begins as DEC signal is disconnected to +24V in machine zero return
0 0 5 PPD
Bit1 1: Relative and absolute coordinate set together for absolute setting and reference
return by
G50
0: Only absolute coordinate set for absolute setting and reference point by G50
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 0 6 ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX

ZMX, ZMZ, ZMY, ZM4, ZM5: Return and initial backlash direction of X, Y, Z axes machine
zeroes
at power on
0: Zero return type C, machine zero return and backlash direction is positive;
1: Zero return type B, machine zero return and backlash direction is negative.
0 0 7 ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX
ZCX, ZCZ, ZCY, ZC4, ZC5 =0: Separate DEC and zero signals needed during machine
zero
return
=1: DEC and zero signals together by a proximity switch during
machine zero return
Note: This parameter should be set to 1 if a proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and
zero signal.
0 1 1 *** *** NORF ZNIK *** ***
Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return inactivity
0: Manual machine zero return active
Bit2 1: Stop at zero by pressing direction key once in zero return with direction key locked;
0: Direction key should be held on in zero return with direction key unlocked.
0 1 2 APRS *** *** ISOT
Bit7 1: ABSOLUTE automatically set after reference return, the coordinate set by
parameter
No.049 and No.050;
Bit 6 1: Prior to machine zero return after power-on or E-stop, manual rapid traverse active
0: Prior to machine zero return after power-on or E-stop, manual rapid traverse inactive
0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX
Bit4~0 1: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X has machine zero, the system detects DEC signal and zero
signal in
executing machine zero return.
404
Volume Connection
0: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X has no machine zero, the system does not detect DEC signal and zero
signal and directly executes machine zero return
1 8 3 *** *** *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MZRX
Bit4 1: For the 5th axis, press to execute machine zero return
0: For the 5th axis, press to execute machine zero returnhas not defined the press key
in the standard PLC
Bit3 1: For the 4th axis, press to execute the machine zero return
0: For the 4th axis, press to execute the machine zero return.
Bit2 1: For Y axis, press to execute the machine zero return
0: For Y axis, press to execute the machine zero return.
Bit1 1: For Z axis, press to execute the machine zero return
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0: For Z axis, press to execute the machine zero return.

Bit0 1: For X axis, press to execute the machine zero return
0: For X axis, press to execute the machine zero return.
1 8 8 *** RRTn *** *** ***
Data type Bit axis
RRTn 1: when Y, 4th, 5th are rotary axis, the zero return use D mode;
0: when Y, 4th, 5th are rotary axis, the zero return use A, B,C mode( need to power-on
again).
0 3 3 ZRNFLn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Lowest speed rate of X,Z machine zero return.
Data unit
Set unit Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
0 4 7 PRSn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return is
performed
405
Volume Connection
Data unit
Data range -9999999999999999
1 1 3 REF_SPDn
Data meaning high-speed of each axis machine zero return.
Data unit
Set unit Data unit
1 1 4 REF_OFFSETn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Offset value of each axis machine zero point
Data unit
Set unit IS-B IS-C
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

Data range
IS-B IS-C
Metric input -9999999999 -999999999999
Inch input -9999999999 -999999999999
1 2 0 REF1_COORDn
1 2 1 REF2_COORDn
1 2 2 REF3_COORDn
1 2 3 REF4_COORDn
Data type Word axis
Data meaningREF1_COORDn machine coordinates of 1st reference point of each
axis;
REF2_COORDn machine coordinates of 2nd reference point of each axis;
REF3_COORDn machine coordinates of 3rd reference point of each axis;
REF4_COORDn machine coordinates of 4th reference point of each axis.
Data unit
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Data range -9999999999999999
406
Volume Connection
3.2.6 Threading function
1 7 5 THDA
THDA 1: Exponential ACC&DEC for threading
0: Linear ACC&DEC for threading
0 1 9 THDCH
Data meaning thread run-out length in thread cutting.
Data range 0225
Thread run-out width=THDCH0.1thread lead
0 2 6 THRDT
Data meaning short acceleration/deceleration time constant in thread run-out.
Data unit ms
Data range 04000
0 2 8 THDFL
Data meaning X, Z initial speed in thread cutting.
Data unit
Set unit Data unit
Data range 68000
0 7 0 ENCODER_CNT
Data meaning spindle encoder lines.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data unit Line/r

Data range 1005000
1 1 0 MGR
Data meaning ratio parameter between encoder and spindle gear: spindle gear
quantity.
Data range 1255
1 1 1 SGR
Data meaning ratio parameter between encoder and spindle gear: spindle gear
quantity.
Data range 1255
3.2.7 Spindle control
0 0 1 SPIN
Bit4 1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed
0: Switching volume control of spindle speed
K 1 0 RSJG
407
Volume Connection
RSJG 1: when the reset is pressed, CNC does not close M03,M04,M08,M32 output
signal
0: when the reset is pressed, CNC closes M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal
0 2 1 PSANGNT
Data meaning voltage offset offset value when the analog voltage outputs 10V.
Data unit mV
0 3 6 SPDLC
Data meaning voltage offset offset value when the analog voltage outputs 10V.
Data unit mV
0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
0 4 0 GRMAX4
Data meaning GRMAX1, GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: Max. speeds of spindle
gear 1, 2,
3, 4 respectively when analog voltage output is 10V (function defined by
TAC-100XT PLC: if the spindle automatic gearing is active, they are the
speeds of M41, M42, M43, M44; if the automatic gearing is inactive or CNC is
powered on, the gears are memorized by parameter setting or the gear 1 is
defaulted.)
Data unit r/min
Data range 109999
0 6 7 SFTREV
Data meaning output voltage in spindle gear shifting.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data unit mV
Data range 010000
0 6 8 SJOGREV
Data meaning spindle rotary axis speed in Manual (MPG) mode.
Data unit r/min
Data range 03000
0 6 9 PEALMTIM
Data meaning pressure low alarm time width.
Data unit ms
Data range 060000
0 7 0 ENCODER_CNT
Data meaning spindle encoder lines.
Data unit line/r
408
Volume Connection
Data range 1005000
0 7 1 RESET_TIME
Data meaning reset signal output time.
Data unit ms
Data range 164080
0 7 2 SAR_DELEY
Data meaning spindle speed arrival signal delay check time.
Data unit ms
Data range 04080
0 7 3 SPMOTORMAX
Data meaning max. clamp speed of spindle motor speed.
Data unit r/min
Data range 04095
Setting value=max. clamp speed of spindle motor/its max. speed4095.
0 7 4 SPMOTORMIN
Data meaning min. clamp speed of spindle motor speed.
Data unit r/min
Data range 04095
Setting value=min. clamp speed of spindle motor/its min. speed4095.
0 7 5 SPSPEEDLIMIT
Data meaning max. spindle speed 0: not limit speed.
Data unit r/min
Data range 06000
1 0 9 SPL_REV_SPD
Data meaning rotary speed in spindle jog.
409
Volume Connection
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data unit r/min

Data range 18000
3.2.8 Tool compensation
0 0 2 NRC
Bit1 1: Tool nose radius offset active
0: Tool nose radius offset inactive
0 0 3 TCOMP
Bit4 1: Tool offset by coordinate offset
0: Tool offset by move
0 0 4 ORC PROD
ORC 1: Tool offset by radius
0: Tool offset by diameter
PROD 1: Programming position for RELATIVE display
0: Position involving offset for RELATIVE display
0 1 2 DOFSI
DOFSI 1: Trial tool setting active
3.2.9 Tool life management function
0 0 2 *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC TLIF
LIFJ 1: Tool life management group skip active
0: Tool life management group skip inactive
MDITL 1: Tool life management active in MDI mode
0: Tool life management inactive in MDI mode
LIFC 1: Tool life counting type 2, by times
0: Tool life counting type 1, by times
TLIF 1: Tool life management active
0: Tool life management inactive
3.2.10 Tool wear parameter
1 4 0 TWEAR_MAX
Data meaning positive/negative limit of tool wear value in tool offset & wear window.
Data unit
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Data range
IS-B IS-C
410
Volume Connection
Inch input 199999 1999999
3.2.11 Edit and display
0 0 5 M30
M30 1: Cursor to beginning after M30
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0: Cursor to beginning by pressing CYCLE START key after M30

0 1 2 ALM&
PRG
1 8 0 SPOS
Bit0 =1: DIS TO GO displayed in POS&PRG page
=0: RELATIVE POS displayed in POS&PRG page
1 8 4 *** PTEST *** *** *** L2 L1 L0
Bit0, Bit1, Bit2: Interface language selection
Language Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1
Portugal 0 1 0
Spanish 0 1 1
Russian 1 1 0
3.2.12 Communication setting
0 4 4 BRATE0
Data meaning baud rate of serial communication.
Data unit bit/s
Data range 1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600 ,115200
3.2.13 MPG Parameters
0 0 1 *** *** MPG
Bit3 1: MPG mode
0: Step mode
0 1 3 *** *** *** HW5 HW4 HWY HWZ HWX
Bit4 1: coordinates increase when 5th MPG rotates CCW;
0: coordinates increase when 5th MPG rotates CW.
Bit3 1: coordinates increase when 4th MPG rotates CCW
0: coordinates increase when 4th MPG rotates CW.
Bit2 1: coordinates increase when Y MPG rotates CCW
0: coordinates increase when Y MPG rotates CW.
411
Volume Connection
Bit1 1: coordinates increase when Z MPG rotates CCW
0: coordinates increase when Z MPG rotates CW.
Bit0 1: coordinates increase when X MPG rotates CCW
0: coordinates increase when X MPG rotates CW.
K 1 6 SINC SINC2 *** *** *** *** *** ***
Bit7 1: In STEP(MPG) mode and when the system increment is 0.1u, 1000 gear is
invalid
0: In STEP(MPG) mode and when the system increment is 0.1u, 1000 gear is valid
Bit6 1: In STEP(MPG) mode and when the system increment is 1u, 1000 gear is invalid
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0: In STEP(MPG) mode and when the system increment is 1u, 1000 gear is valid
Note: to avoid the step-out, the parameter should be set to 1 when the system is matched with the
stepper
drive unit.
3.2.14 PLC axis control function
1 8 5 *** *** *** PRPD PLA
PRPD 1: Rapid traverse rate of PLC axis by input value
0: Rapid traverse rate of PLC axis by parameter value (X axis: No.022 Z axis:No.023
Y
axis:No.155;)
PLA 1: PLC axis control active, and active after repowering
0: PLC axis control inactive, and active after repowering
Note: The PLC axis control function is only provided by machine builder.
2 1 9 PLCDIDOn
Data type Word axis
Data meaning Select DI/DO in PLC axis control PLC
Data unit
Data range 04
3.2.15 Skip function
1 8 5 SK0 SKF *** *** ***
SK0 1: Skip input active as G31 signal is 0
0: Skip input active as G31 signal is 1
SKF 1: Feedrate override per minute or dry run active for G31
0: Feedrate override per minute or dry run inactive for G31
Note: The skip function is only provided by machine builder.
3.2.16 Automatic tool setting function
1 8 5 AEO *** *** ***
AWO 1: when G36, G37 signalXAEZAEis 0, the input is valid;
0: G36, G37 signalXAEZAEis 1, the input is valid.
1 4 1 AUTO_OFFSET_FEED
Data meaning feedrate in automatic tool compensation measure.
412
Volume Connection
Data unit
Set unit Data unit
Data range
IS-B IS-C
1 4 2 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X
1 4 3 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data meaning XAUTO_OFFSET_Y_X,ZAUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z value in

automatic tool
offset.
Data unit
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Data range 19999999
Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter programming and radius programming.
1 4 4 AUTO_OFFSET_E_X
1 4 5 AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z
Data meaning AUTO_OFFSET_E_XX,AUTO_OFFSET_E_ZZ value in
automatic tool
offset.
Note: The function needs the automatic tool setting device.
3.2.17 Input and output function in metric and inch system
0 0 1 *** *** INI
INI 1: Inch input
0: Metric input
0 0 3 *** *** *** *** *** OIM
OIM 1: Offset automatically change in metric and inch conversion
0: Offset not change in metric and inch conversion
0 0 4 *** SCW
SCW 1: Inch system for min. code unit, active after repowering
0: Metric system for min. code unit, active after repowering
3.2.18 Parameters related to arc turning
1 5 4 RADIUS_ERR_RANGE
Data meaning max. value of arc radius error.
Data unit
413
Volume Connection
Data range
IS-B IS-C
3.2.19 Parameters related to the additional
1 8 7 IS1 IS0 RCS *** *** *** ROS ROT
BIT7,BIT6: set incremental system of each axis00: consistent with the incremental
system of the
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
system01: IS-A10: IS-B11: IS-C.

Bit5 1: Cs function of additional axis is valid/invalid (power-on again);
0: Cs function of additional axis is valid/invalid (power-on again).
Bit1,Bit0: 00 sets the additional axis to be the linear, 01 sets the additional axis to be the
rotary(A
type)11 sets the additional axis to be the rotary (B type)10 sets the additional axis to
be invalid.
Note: This parameter is invalid to axes X and Z.
1 8 8 *** RRT *** *** *** RRL RAB ROA
Bit6 1: When the additional axis is rotary, the zero return uses D mode;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, the zero return uses A, B, C (power-on again).
Bit2 1: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the relative coordinate is valid;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the relative coordinate is invalid
(power-on again).
Bit1 1: When the additional axis is rotary, its rotation direction is based on the sign
direction;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, its rotation direction is contiguous.
Bit0 1: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the absolute coordinate is valid;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the absolute coordinate is invalid
(power-on again).
Note: This parameter is invalid to axes X and Z.
2 1 6 ROT_REVn
Data type Word axis
Data meaningAxis movement per rotation (when the auxiliary axes are rotary axes)
Data unit
Setting Unit IS-B IS-C
Rotary axis 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Data range 100099999999
2 2 4 AXISNUM
Data meaning The displayed axis number
Data range 25
414
Volume Connection
2 2 5 NAME_n
Data type Word axis
Data meaningaxis name definitions
Data range 65, 66, 67, 88, 89, 90
Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value
X 88 A 65 C 67
Z 90 B 66 Y 89
2 3 0 ATTRIB_n
Data type Word axis
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Data meaning The properties of each axis in coordinate system

Data range 07
0 Neither the basic three axes nor the parallel axis
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Parallel axis of X axis
6 Parallel axis of Y axis
7 Parallel axis of Z axis
Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes
415
Connection
CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND

MODES
The trial run methods and steps at initial power on for thisTAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V are
described in this chapter. The corresponding operation can be performed after the
debugging by the
following steps.
4.1 Emergency Stop and Limit

ThisTAC-1002T/TAC-100XT-V system has software limit function, it is suggested that
hardware limit is employed by fixing the stroke limit switches in the positive or negative
axes. The
connection is as follows (2 axes):
Fig. 4-1
So the BIT3 (ESP) of bit parameter No.172 should be set to 0.
The diagnostic message DGN000.7 monitors the emergency stop input signal.
In Manual or MPG mode, slowly move the axes to testify the validity of stroke limit switch,
correctness of alarm display, validity of overtravel release button. When the overtravel
occurs or
Emergency Stop button is pressed, emergency stop alarm will be issued by CNC system.
The alarm
can be cancelled by pressing down the OVERTRAVEL key for reverse moving.
4.2 Drive Unit Configuration

BIT4, BIT3, BIT2, BIT1, BIT0 (5ALM, 4ALM, YALM, ZALM, XALM separately corresponds
to 5th,
4th, Y, Z, X) of bit parameter No.009 for TOMATECH drive unit are all set to 1 according
to the alarm logic
level of the drive unit.
If the machine moving direction is not consistent with the move code, modify BIT4, BIT3,
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
BIT2,
BIT1 and BIT0 (DIR5, DIR4, DIRY, DIRZ, DIRX separately corresponds to 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X)
of bit
parameter No.008.
The manual move direction can be set by BIT4,BIT3,BIT2,BIT1, BIT0 (5VAL, 4VAL, YVAL,
ZVAL,
XVAL separately corresponds to 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X movement key) of bit parameter No.175.
4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment

015016 can be modified for electronic gear ratio adjustment to meet the various
mechanical transmission ratios when the machine travel distance is not consistent with
the
displacement distance displayed by the CNC.
Formula:
D
Z
Z
L
C
CMD
CMR 4* * *
416
Connection
CMR: Code multiplier coefficient (data parameter No.015)
CMD: Code frequency division coefficient (data parameter No.016)
C: Motor s encoder lines
: Pulse volume, motor rotation angle for a pulse

L: Screw lead
: Current min. input code unit of CNC
ZM : gear teeth number of lead screw
ZD: gear teeth number of motor
Example: if gear teeth number of lead is 50, gear teeth number of motor is 30, motor
encoder
lines C=5000 lines, screw lead is 4mm, CNCs current increment is 0.1.
The electronic gear ratio of X axis is:
12
5
30
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
* 50
4
= 4 * * * = 4 *5000 * 0.00005 =
D
Z
Z
L
C
CMD
CMR
The electronic gear ratio of Z axis is:
6
5
30
* 50
4
= 4 * * * = 4 *5000 * 0.0001 =
D
Z
Z
L
C
CMD
CMR
Then data parameter No.015X (CMRX) =5, No.016X (CMDX) =12; No.015Z(CMRZ) =5,
No.016Z
(CMDZ) =6.
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is more than the denominator, the allowed CNC max.
speed
will decrease. For example: the data parameter No.015Z (CMRZ) =2, No.016Z (CMDZ)
=1, so the
allowed Z axis max. speed is 12000mm/min.
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is not equal to the denominator, the allowed CNC
positioning precision may decrease. For example: the data parameter No.015Z(CMRZ)
=1,
No.016Z(CMDZ) =5, so the pulse is not output as the input increment is 0.0004, but a
pulse is output
when the input increment is 0.0005.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
In order to ensure the CNC positioning precision and speed index, it is suggested that the
CNC
electronic gear ratio is set to 1:1 and the electronic gear ratio calculated is set to the digital
servo
when matching with digital servo.
When matching with the step drive, choose the drive unit with step division function as
possible
as it can, and properly select mechanical transmission ratio. The 1:1 electronic gear ratio
should be
ensured to avoid the excessive difference between the numerator and the denominator of
this CNC
electronic gear ratio.
4.4 ACC&DEC Characteristic Adjustment

Adjust the relative CNC parameters according to the factors such as the drive unit, motor
characteristics and machine load:
Data parameter No.022: rapid traverse rate of each axis;
Data parameter No.023: linear ACC&DEC time constant of each axis rapid traverse rate;
Data parameter No.026: X axis exponential ACC&DEC time constant in threading;
Data parameter No.028: exponential ACC&DEC start/termination speed in threading;
Data parameter No.029: exponential ACC&DEC time constant in cutting and manual
feeding;
Data parameter No.030: exponential ACC&DEC start/end speed in cutting feeding;
Data parameter No.041: ACC&DEC start/termination speed in manual feeding;
BIT5 (SMZ) of bit parameter No.007: for smooth transition between cutting feedrates of
adjacent
blocks
The larger the ACC&DEC time constant is, the slower the ACC&DEC is, the smaller the
machine
movement impact and the lower the machining efficiency is, and vice versa.
417
Connection
If ACC&DEC time constants are equal, the higher the ACC&DEC start/end speed is, the
faster
the ACC&DEC is, the bigger the machine movement impact and the higher the machining
efficiency
is, and vice versa.
The principle for ACC&DEC characteristic adjustment is to properly reduce the ACC&DEC
time
constant and increase the ACC&DEC start/end speed to improve the machining efficiency
on the
condition that there is no alarm, motor out-of-step and obvious machine impact. If the
ACC&DEC time
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
constant is set too small, and the start/end speed is set too large, it is easily to cause
faults such as
drive unit alarm, motor out-of-step or machine vibration.
When the bit parameter No.007 BIT5(SMZ) =1, the feedrate drops to the start speed of
the
ACC&DEC at the cutting path intersection, then it accelerates to the specified speed of
the next block
to obtain an accurate positioning at the path intersection, but this will reduce the
machining efficiency.
When BIT5=0, the adjacent cutting path transits smoothly by the ACC&DEC. The feedrate
does not
always drop to the start speed when the previous path is finished and a circular transition
(non-accurate positioning) will be formed at the path intersection. The machining surface
by this path
transition has a good finish and a higher machining efficiency. When the stepper motor
drive unit is
applied, the BIT5 of the bit parameter No.007 should be set to 1 to avoid the out-of-step.
When the stepper motor drive unit is applied, the out-of-step may occur on the condition
that
rapid traverse speed is too big, ACC&DEC time constant is too small, ACC&DEC
start/end speed is
too big. The suggested parameter setting is as follows (the electronic gear ratio 1:1):
Data parameter No.022 X2500 Data parameter No.022 Z5000
Data parameter No.029150 Data parameter No.028100
If AC servo drive unit is applied to this system, the machining efficiency can be improved
by a
larger start speed and a smaller ACC&DEC time constant setting. If optimum acc/dec
characteristics
are required, the ACC&DEC time constant may be set to 0 which can be gotten by
adjusting the AC
servo acc/dec parameters. The suggested settings for these parameters are as
follows(electronic
gear ratio is 1:1):
The parameter settings above are recommended for use, please refer to the actual
conditions of
the drive unit, motor characteristic and motor load for their proper setting.
4.5 Mechanical (Machine) Zero Adjustment

TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Adjust the relevant parameters based on the active level of the connection signal, zero
return
type and direction applied:
BIT5 (DECI) of the bit parameter No.004: active level of deceleration signal in machine
zero
return.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2BIT3BIT4 (ZMX, ZMZ, ZMYZM4, ZM5) of the bit parameter No.006:
X, Z,
Y, 4th, 5th axis machine zero return mode B or C selection.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4 (ZCX, ZCZ, ZCY, ZC4, ZC5) of the bit parameter No.007:
whether a
proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals.
BIT2(ZNLK) of the bit parameter No.011: whether the direction key in zero return is
self-locked.
418
Connection
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4(ZRSCX, ZRSCZ, ZRSCY, ZRSC4, ZRSC5) of the bit
parameter
No.014: have/not the machine zero(zero turn mode BC/A)setting bit.
Data parameter No.033: low deceleration speeds of each axis in machine zero return.
Data parameter No.113: high speed of each axis in machine zero return.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4(MZRX, MZRZ, MZRY, MZR4, MZR5) of the bit parameter
No.183:
each axis zero return direction: negative or positive.
Only the stroke limit switch validity is confirmed, can the machine zero return be
performed.
The machine zero is usually fixed at the max. travel point, and the effective stroke of the
zero
return touch block should be more than 25mm to ensure a sufficient deceleration distance
for
accurate zero return. The more rapid the machine zero return is, the longer the zero return
touch
block should be. Or the moving carriage will rush over the block and it may affect the zero
return
precision because of the insufficient deceleration distance.
Usually there are 2 types of machine zero return connection:
The connection to AC servo motor: using a travel switch and servo motor one-turn
signal
separately
Fig. 4-2
By this connection, when the deceleration switch is released in machine zero return, the
one-turn
signal of encoder should be avoided to be at a critical point after the travel switch is
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
released. In order
to improve the zero return precision, and it should ensure the motor reaches the one-turn
signal of
encoder after it rotates half circle.
The parameter setting is as follows:
Bit parameter No.004 BIT5(DECI) =0
Bit parameter No.006 BIT0(ZMX) , BIT1(ZMZ) , BIT2(ZMY), BIT3(ZM4), BIT4(ZM5) =0
Bit parameter No.007 BIT0(ZCX) , BIT1(ZCZ) , BIT2(ZCY) , BIT3(ZC4), BIT4(ZC5)=0
Bit parameter No.011 BIT2(ZNLK) =1
Bit parameter No.014 BIT0(ZRSCX) , BIT1(ZRSCZ) , BIT2(ZRSCY), BIT3(ZRSC4),
BIT4(ZRSC5) =1
Data parameter No.033=200
Data parameter No.183 BIT0(MZRX) , BIT1(MZRZ) , BIT2(MZRY), BIT3(MZR4) ,
BIT4(MZR5)
=0
The connection to stepper motor: schematic diagram of using a proximity switch taken
as both
deceleration signal and zero signal
419
Connection Fig. 4-3
When matching the stepper motor, it is better to adjust the rapid override to 50% to avoid
the
out-of-step during rapid traversing of zero return, so the parameter settings are as follows:
Bit parameter No.004 BIT5(DECI) =0
Bit parameter No.006 BIT0(ZMX) , BIT1(ZMZ) , BIT2(ZMY), BIT3(ZM4), BIT4(ZM5) =0
Bit parameter No.007 BIT0(ZCX) , BIT1(ZCZ) , BIT2(ZCY), BIT3(ZC4), BIT4(ZC5) =1
Bit parameter No.011 BIT2(ZNLK) =0
Bit parameter No.014 BIT0(ZRSCX) , BIT1(ZRSCZ) , BIT2(ZRSCY), BIT3(ZRSC4),
BIT4(ZRSC5)
=1
Data parameter No.033=200
Data parameter No.183 BIT0(MZRX), BIT1(MZRZ), BIT2(MZRY), BIT3(MZR4),
BIT4(MZR5) =0
BITBITof diagnosis message DGN.000 are used to check the validity of zero
deceleration
signal.
4.6 Spindle Adjustment

4.6.1 Spindle encoder
Encoder with the pulses 100~5000p/r is needed to be installed on the machine for
threading. The
pulses are set by data parameter No.70. The transmission ratio(spindle gear
teeth/encoder gear teeth)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
between encoder and spindle is 1/255255. The spindle gear teeth are set by CNC data
parameter
No.110, and the encoder gear teeth are set by data parameter No.111.
Synchronous belt transmission should be applied for it (no sliding transmission).
The BIT3 of diagnosis message DGN.008 are used to check the validity of threads
number
signal of the spindle encoder.
The DGN.011 and DNG.012 of diagnosis message are used to check the validity of thread
signal
of the spindle encoder.
4.6.2 Spindle brake
After M05 code is executed, proper spindle brake time should be set to stop the spindle
promptly
in order to enhance the machining efficiency. If the brake is employed with energy
consumption type,
too long braking time may burn out the motor.
Data parameter No.087: delay from spindle stop(M05) to spindle brake output
420
Connection
Data parameter No.089: spindle braking time
4.6.3 Switch volume control of spindle speed
When the machine is controlled by a multi-speed motor, the motor speed codes are S01
S04.
The relevant parameters are as follows:
State parameter No.001 Bit4=0: select spindle speed switch control;
4.6.4 Analog voltage control of spindle speed
This function can be obtained by the parameter setting of CNC. By interface outputting
0V10V
analog voltage to control frequency inverter, the stepless shift can be obtained. And the
related
parameters needed to be adjusted are:
Bit parameter No.001 Bit4=1: for spindle speed analog voltage control;
Data parameter No.021: offset value as spindle speed code voltage is 10V;
Data parameter No.036: offset value as spindle speed code voltage is 0V;
Data parameter No.037 ___________No.040: for max. speed clamping of spindle gear
14; it defaults the
spindle gear 1 when CNC power on.
Basic parameters are needed to adjust the inverter:
CW or CCW code mode selection: it is determined by terminal VF;
Frequency setting mode selection: it is determined by terminal FR;
If the speed by programming is not consistent with that detected by the encoder, it can be
adjusted to be consistent with the actual one by adjusting the data parameter No.037
No.040.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Speed adjustment method: select the corresponding spindle gear, determine the data
parameter
is 9999 as for this system gear, set the spindle override for 100%. Input spindle run
command in MDI
mode to run the spindle: M03/M04 S9999, view the spindle speed shown on the right
bottom of the
screen, then input the speed value displayed into the corresponding system parameter.
When entering S9999 code, the voltage should be 10V, S0 for 0V. If there is a voltage
error,
adjust bit parameter No.021 and No.036 to correct the voltage offset value (corrected by
manufacturer, usually not needed).
For the current max. speed gear, if the analog voltage output by CNC is not 10V, set it for
10V by
adjusting the data parameter No.021; when the input speed is 0, if the spindle still slowly
rotates, it
means the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than 0V, so set a smaller value for data
parameter
No.036.
If the machine is not fixed with an encoder, the spindle speed can be detected by a speed
sensing instrument, input S9999 in MDI mode to set the speed value displayed by the
instrument into
the data parameter No.037 No.040.
4.7 Backlash Offset

The X axis backlash offset value is input by diameter, Z axis backlash offset value is input
by the
actual backlash which can be measured by a dial-indicator, a micrometer or a laser
detector. Because
the backlash offset can improve the machining precision only by accurate compensation,
it is not
recommended to measure it in MPG or Step mode, but the following method is suggested:
Program editing (taking example of Z):
O0001
N10 G01 W10 F800
N20 W15
421
Connection
N30 W1
N40 W-1
N50 M30.
Set the backlash error offset to 0 before measuring:
Run the program by single blocks, search the measuring benchmark after 2 positioning
operations, record the current data, move 1mm in the same direction, then move 1mm to
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
point B reversely, read the current data.

Fig. 4-4 Schematic map of backlash measuring method
Backlash error offset value= | data of point A data of point B |; then input its outcome to
the
data parameter No.034BKLn (for X axis, multiply 2 and then input the outcome to data
parameter No.034).
Data A: dial-indicator data at point A
Data B: dial-indicator data at point B
Note 1: The backlash offset mode can be set by Bit7 of CNC parameter No.011; the backlash
frequency can
be set by Bit6 of parameter No.011 and Bit4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0 of bit parameter No.010.
Note 2: Check the machine backlash every 3 months.
4.8 Tool Post Debugging

TAC-100XT supports various kinds of tool post, and the parameter settings are based on
the
machine manual. The parameter settings for the tool post running are as follows:
BIT2(TSGN) of K parameter No.011: high/low level selection of tool post in-position signal,
when
the signal is low level active, a parallel pull-up resistor is needed.
Bit3 (CTCP) of K parameter No.011: check/do not check tool post lock signal in tool
change;
Bit4 (TCPS)of K parameter No.011: tool post lock signal HIGH/LOW selection;
Bit5 (CHET) of K parameter No.11: check/do not check tool signal;
Combinations and functions of tool change mode selection Bit1(CHTB), Bit0(CHTA) of K
parameter No.11 are referred to Tool Change Control.
Data parameter No.076: Duration for moving a tool in tool changing
Data parameter No.078: Upper limit time for changing one tool
Data parameter No.082: Delay time from tool post CCW stop to CW clamping start
Data parameter No.084: Total tools number
Data parameter No.085: Delay of tool post CW clamping
If the tool post doesnt rotate at first power on for tool change, the phase connection of the
3-phase power of the tool post motor may be incorrect, it needs to press the RESET key
immediately
and cutoff the power, then check the wiring; if the fault is caused by this, exchange two
phases of the
3-phase power.
The CW clamping duration setting should be proper, it should be neither longer nor
shorter,
Data reading
position
A
B
Reverse
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
position
422
Connection
longer delay may damage the motor, shorter delay may cause the tool post not to be
completely
clamped. The method to check the tool post clamping is: approach the dial-indicator to the
tool post,
turn the tool post manually, and the pointer floating of the dial-indicator should not be over
0.01mm.
The BIT7(TL-) and BIT6(TL+) of diagnosis message DGN.005 are used to check the
validity of
tool post CCW/CW output signal.
The BIT0BIT3 (T01T04) of diagnosis message DGN.000 are used to check the
validity of
tool number T01T04 signal.
During debugging, every tool, max. tools change should be performed to check the
correctness
of the tool change, time parameter setting.
4.9 Step/MPG Adjustment

The key on the panel can be used to select the Step mode or MPG mode, which is set by
the BIT3 of bit parameter No.001.
Bit3 =1: MPG mode active, Step mode inactive;
=0: Step mode active, MPG mode inactive;
Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message
423
Connection
CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE

Diagnosis messages forTAC-1002T system are described in this chapter.
5.1 CNC Diagnosis

The part is used to check the CNC interface signals and internal running and it cant be
modified.
5.1.1 I/O status and data diagnosis message
0 0 0 ESP *** *** DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX
Pin CN61.6 CN61.34 CN61.33 CN61.12 CN61.32 CN61.4
PLC fixed
address
X0.5 X2.5 X2.4 X1.3 X2.3 X0.3
DECX, DECY, DECZ, DEC4, DEC5: machine zero return signal of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th
ESP: emergency stop signal
0 0 1 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SKIP
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Pin CN61.42
PLC fixed
address
X3.5
SKIP: skip signal
5.1.2 CNC motion state and data diagnosis message
0 0 3 *** *** *** RDY5 RDY4 RDYZ RDYY RDYX
RDY5RDYX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th ready signal
0 0 4 *** *** *** EN5 EN4 ENZ ENY ENX
EN5ENX: enabling signal
0 0 5 *** *** *** SET5 SET4 SETZ SETY SETX
SET5SETX: pulse prohibit signal
0 0 6 *** *** *** DRO5 DRO4 DROZ DROY DROX
DRO5DROX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th motion direction output
0 0 8 *** *** *** PC5 PC4 PCZ PCY PCX
PC5PCX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th zero signal
0 0 9 *** *** *** ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX
ALM5ALMX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th alarm signal
0 1 0 MPG rotation data
424
Connection
0 1 1 Spindle speed feedback data
0 1 2 Spindle speed maximum feedback data
0 1 3 Spindle 1 analog output value
0 1 4 Spindle 2 analog output value
0 4 8 X axis output pulse number
0 4 9 X axis actual output pulse number (FPGA actual output)
0 5 0 Y axis output pulse number
0 5 1 Y axis actual output pulse number (FPGA actual output)
0 5 2 Z axis output pulse number
0 5 3 Z axis actual output pulse number (FPGA actual output)
0 5 4 4th axis output pulse number
0 5 5 4th axis actual output pulse number (FPGA actual output)
0 5 6 5th axis output pulse number
0 5 7 5th axis actual output pulse number (FPGA actual output)
0 6 7 Spindle encoder counting
0 6 8 MPG counting
0 6 9 The pulse number from the time that X axis starts detecting PC signal to
PC signal is detected
0 7 0 The pulse number from the time that Y axis starts detecting PC signal to
0 7 1 The pulse number from the time that Z axis starts detecting PC signal to
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
0 7 2 The pulse number from the time that 4th axis starts detecting PC signal
to PC signal is detected
0 7 3 The pulse number from the time that 5th axis starts detecting PC signal
to PC signal is detected
0 7 4 The times of system powering off
0 7 5 The times of system undervoltage (when the power is not off)
0 7 6 The times of insufficient time for data saving when the system is
undervoltage
5.1.3 Diagnosis keys
DGN.016DGN.022 are the diagnosis messages of edit keypad keys; DGN.024
DGN.029 are
the diagnosis messages of machine operation panel keys. When pressing a key in the
operation
panel, the corresponding bit displays 1, and 0 after releasing this key. If it displays
reversely, it
means there is a fault in the keypad circuit.
0 1 6 RST O N G P/Q 7 8 9
Key
0 1 7 PGU X Z U W 4 5 6
Key
0 1 8 PGD H/Y F/E R/V D/L 1 2 3
Key
0 1 9 CRU RIGHT I/A J/B K/C - 0 .
425
Connection
Key
0 2 0 CRD LEFT M S T EOB INS/ALT DEL
Key
0 2 1 IN OUT CHG /,# CAN
Key
0 2 2 POS RPG OFT ALM SET PAR DGN GRA
Key
0 2 3 FLEFT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 FRIGHT PLC
Key
5.1.4 Others
0 7 1 BOOT version No.
1 1 8 PLC execution time(ms)
1 1 9 Execution all time (h)
0 2 1 IN OUT CHG /,# CAN
Key
0 2 2 POS RPG OFT ALM SET PAR DGN GRA
Key
0 2 3 FLEFT F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 FRIGHT PLC
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Key
5.2 PLC State

This part of diagnosis is used to detect the signal state of machinePLC(X),
PLCmachine(Y),
CNCPLC (F), PLCCNC (G) and alarm address A, and internal relay (R, K) states.
5.2.1 X address (machinePLC , defined by standard PLC ladders)
X0000 T05 PRES ESP DITW DECX DIQP SP SAGT
T05: tool signal T05
PRES: pressure check input signal
ESP: emergency stop signal
DITW: tailstock control input
426
Connection
DECX: X deceleration signal
DIQP: chuck control input
SP: external pause
SAGT: safety door check signal
X0001 T01 M42I M41I ST DECZ T08/CHOT T07/INDX T06/SELE
M42I: spindle automatic gear shifting 2-gear in-position signal
M41I: spindle automatic gear shifting 1-gear in-position signal
ST: external cycle start
DECZ: Z deceleration signal
T08/CHOT: tool signal T08/tool post worktable overheat
T07/INDX: tool signal T07/Yantai tool post pregraduation input
T06/SELE: tool signal T06/Yantai tool post strobe signal
X0002 AEY/BDT TCP DEC5 DEC4 DECY T04 T03 T02
AEY/BDT: external skip
TCP: tool post clamp signal
DECY: Y deceleration signal
X0003 AEZ AEX SKIP NQPJ WQPJ LMIZ LMIY LMIX
AEZ: G37 skip signal
AEX: G36 skip signal
SKIP: G31 skip signal
NQPJ: inner chuck clamp/outer chuck clamp in-position signal
WQPJ: inner chuck release/outer chuck clamp in-position signal
LMIZ: Z overtravel input
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
LMIY: Y overtravel input

LMIX: X overtravel input
X0005 *** *** *** *** SALM COIN SAR VPO
SALM: spindle abnormality alarm input
COIN: spindle orientation completion signal
SAR: spindle speed arrival
VPO: spindle position/speed control state
X0006 *** *** 100 10 1 ZHAN YHAN XHAN
100: increment 100external
10: increment10external
1: increment1external
ZHAN: Z selectionexternal
YHAN: Y selectionexternal
427
Connection
XHAN: X selectionexternal
5.2.2 Y address (PLCmachine, defined by standard PLC ladders)
Y0000 SPZD SCLP M05 M04 M03 *** M32 COOL
SPZD: spindle brake
SCLP: spindle clamped
M05: spindle stop
M04: spindle rotation CCW
M03: spindle rotation CW
M32: lubricating output
COOL: cooling output
Y0001 TL- TL+ DOQPS DOQPJ S4/M44 S3/M43 S42/M42 S41/M41
TL-: TL-tool post rotation (CW)
TL+: TL+tool post rotation(CCW)
DOQPS: chuck release
DOQPJ: chuck clamp
S4/M44: spindle mechanical 4-gear
Y0002 VP2 DOTWS DOTWJ CLPR CLPG CLPY INDXS TZD
VP2: the 2nd spindle speed/position switch output
DOTWS: tailstock going backward
DOTWJ: tailstock going forward
CLPR: three-color lamp-red
CLPG: three-color lamp-green
CLPY: three-color lamp-yellow
INDXS: tool post worktable pregraduation coil
TZD: tool post worktable brake
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Y0003
UO5/SP
2
UO4/SP
1
UO3/SP
0
U2/M64/STA
O
U1/M6
3
U0/TAP
2
HPS
T
SVF
UO5/SP2: user macro output 5orientation position 2
U2/M64/STAO: user macro output 2/the 2nd spindle CCW/orientation start signal
U1/M63: user macro output 1/the 2nd spindle CW
U0/TAP2: user macro output 0/the 2nd gain selection signal of the 2nd spindle speed
loop(rigid
tapping)
HPST: hydraulic control output
SVF: spindle servo OFF (reduce the spindle servo excitation)
Y0005 *** *** *** *** SRV SFR TAP VP
SRV: spindle rotation(CW)
428
Connection
SFR: spindle rotation(CCW)
TAP: the 2nd gain selection signal of the spindle speed loop
VP: spindle positionspeed control switch output
429
Connection
5.2.3 Machine panel
X20.0
Y21.7
X19.4
Y19.7
X19.5
Y19.6
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X19.0
Y18.5
X19.1
Y18.4
X19.2
Y18.3
X18.6
Y18.7
X18.7
Y18.6
EDIT
X18.0
Y23.7
Y25
GEAR/TOOL NO.
SINGLE SKIP DRY
X18.2
Y23.5
MDI
X18.1
Y23.6
AUTO
X18.3
Y23.4
X18.5
Y23.2
X18.4
Y23.3
MPG
X19.3
Y18.2
X22.7
Y21.0
X22.0
Y19.0
X21.3
Y23.1
X22.4
Y20.3
X21.1 X21.2 X25.6 X22.6
Y20.1
X19.6
Y19.5
X19.7
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Y21.5
X20.4
Y22.7 Y22.3
X24.0
X20.2
Y19.3
X20.5
Y19.2
X26.2
Y26.2
X26.3
Y26.3
Y22.6 Y22.5 Y22.4
X21.0
Y21.4
X20.7
X20.3
Y19.4
X20.6
Y18.1
X20.1
Y21.6
X25.7
Y21.3
Y22.0
X22.1
Y20.6
X25.5
Y21.1
Y22.2 Y22.1
X21.4
Y23.0
X21.6
Y20.7
X25.7
Y21.3
X21.5
Y18.0
X22.3
Y20.4
X26.7
Y26.7
X23.0
Y20.0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X26.1
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET ALARM SETTING PARAMETER PRDIAGNOSS GRAPH PLC

DELETE CANCEL
INSERT
ALTER
CHANGE
DATA
INPUT
DATA
OUTPUT
EOB
MACHINE
ZERO
MACHINE
LOCK M.S.TLOCK OPTIONAL
STOP
PROGRAM
MANNUAL ZERO TRIAL CUT RAPID
COOLING S.CW S.OVERRIDE
S.CCW S.OVERRIDE
COOLING
COOLING
F.OVERRIDE
S.STOP ORIENTATION F.OVERRIDE
F.OVERRIDE
CYCLESTART
FEED HOLD
TAC-100XT machine panel
430
Connection
X20.4 X21.1
X20.5
Y19.2
X20.6
Y18.1
X26.4
Y26.4
X26.5
Y26.5
X21.2 X25.6
X25.7
Y21.3
X20.7
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X21.3
Y23.1
X22.0
Y19.0
X22.4
Y20.3
X21.5
Y18.0
X21.6
Y20.7
X25.5
Y21.1
X22.6
Y20.1
X22.7
Y21.0
X26.7
Y26.7
X19.5
Y19.6
Y22.7 Y22.1
X18.0
Y23.7
X20.2
Y19.3
X20.3
Y19.4
X18.6
Y18.7
X18.7
Y18.6
SINGLE SKIP
Y25
X26.6
Y26.6
X19.2
Y18.3
DRY
X20.1
Y21.6
X21.0
Y21.4
X19.1
Y18.4
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
X19.0
Y18.5
X25.7
Y21.3
X21.4
Y23.0
X22.1
Y20.6
X20.0
Y21.7
X19.4
Y19.7
Y22.4
X18.3
Y23.4
X18.1
Y23.6
EDIT AUTO
X18.2
Y23.5
Y22.6 Y22.5
X18.4
Y23.3
MPG
X18.5
Y23.2
MANUAL
Y22.3 Y22.2
X24.0
X26.2
X22.3
Y20.4
X23.0
Y20.0
X19.6
Y19.5
X19.7
Y21.5
X26.3
Y26.3
X19.3
Y18.2
Y22.0
DATA
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
INPUT
OUTPUT
DATA
PROGRAM
CHANGE OFFSET DIAGNOSIS

ALARM GRAPH
DELETE CANCEL
INSERT
ALTER EOB
GEAR TOOLNO.
MDI MACHINE
ZERO
PROGRAM
ZERO
MACHINE
LOCK M.S.T.LOCK OPTIONAL
STOP
CHUCK COOLING S.CW S.OVERRIDE CYCLE START

RAPID
HYDRAULIC T.CHANGE
F.OVERRIDE
S.CCW S.OVERRIDE F.OVERRIDE
TAILSTOCK LUBRICATING S.STOP ORIENTATION F.OVERRIDE
FEED START
PARAMETER
POSITION SETTING
TAC-100XT-V machine panel

431
Connection
5.2.4 F address(CNCPLC)
F0000 OP SA STL SPL *** *** *** RWD
OP: Auto run signal
SA: Servo ready signal
STL: Cycle start indicator signal
SPL: Feed hold indicator signal
F0001 MA *** TAP ENB DEN *** RST AL
MA: CNC ready signal
TAP: Tapping signal
ENB: Spindle enable signal
DEN: Designation end signal
RST: Reset signal
AL: Alarm signal
F0002 MDRN CUT *** SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
MDRN: Dry run detection signal

CUT: Cutting feed signal
SRNMV: Program start signal
THRD: Threading signal
CSS: Constant surface speed signal
RPDO: Rapid feed signal
INCH: Inch input signal
F0003 *** MEDT MMEM MMDI MJ MH MINC
MEDT: Memory edit selection detection signal
MMEM: Auto run selection detection signal
MMDI: MDI selection detection signal
MJ: JOG selection detection signal
MH: MPG selection detection signal
MINC: Increment feed detection signal
F0004 *** MPST MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1
MPST: Program beginning return detection signal
MREF: Manual reference return detection signal
MAFL: MST lock detection signal
MSBK: Single block detection signal
MABSM: JOG absolute detection signal
MMLK: All machine axes lock detection signal
MBDT1: Optional block skip detection signal
F0007 *** *** *** *** TF SF *** MF
TF: Tool function strobe signal
SF: Spindle speed strobe signal
MF: MST function strobe signal
432
Connection
F0009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30 *** *** *** ***
DM00: M decoding signal
F0010 MB07 MB06 MB05 MB04 MB03 MB02 MB01 MB00
Miscellaneous function codes MB00~MB31
F0022 SB07 SB06 SB05 SB04 SB03 SB02 SB01 SB00
Spindle speed code signal SB00~SB31
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
F0026 TB07 TB06 TB05 TB04 TB03 TB02 TB01 TB00

Tool function code signal TB00~TB31
F0036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F0037 *** *** *** *** R12O R11O R10O R09O
S12 bit code signal R01O~R12O
F0054 UO07 UO06 UO05 UO04 UO03 UO02 UO01 UO00
F0055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08
Macro output signal UO00~UO15
F0056 U107 U106 U105 U104 U103 U102 U101 U100
F0057 U115 U114 U113 U112 U111 U110 U109 U108
F0058 U123 U122 U121 U120 U119 U118 U117 U116
F0059 U131 U130 U129 U128 U127 U126 U125 U124
Macro output signal U100~131
F0064 *** *** *** *** *** *** TLNW TLCH
TLNW: New tool selection signal (for tool life management)
TLCH: Tool change signal(for tool life management)
F0065 *** *** *** *** *** *** RGSPM RGSPP
RGSPM: Spindle CCW rotation (in rigid tapping)
RGSPP: Spindle CW rotation (in rigid tapping)
F0076 *** *** *** *** RTAP *** *** ***
RTAP: rigid tapping method signal
F0091 *** *** *** *** MMMOD *** *** ***
MMMOD: Mode signal; it informs system of the manual trial cut mode;
433
Connection
F0094 *** *** *** ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
ZP5: Reference point return end signal ZP5
F0102 *** *** *** MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
MV5: Axis move signal MV5
F0106 *** *** *** MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
MVD5 Axis move direction signal MVD5
MVD4: Axis move direction signal MVD4
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

F0120 *** *** *** ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
ZRF5: Reference point creation signal ZRF5
F0129 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** KEAXSL
KEAXSL: PLC axis control status selection signal
F0130 EBSYA *** *** EGENA EDENA *** *** ***
EBSYA: PLC axis control group A command read completed signal
EGENA: PLC axis control group A axis movement signal
EDENA: PLC axis control group A auxiliary function implement signal
F0131 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFA EMFA
EABUFA: PLC axis control group A buffer full signal
EMFA: PLC axis control group A auxiliary function strobe signal
F0132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11A~EM28A
F0133 EBSYB *** *** EGENB EDENB *** *** ***
EBSYB: PLC axis control group B command read completed signal
EGENB: PLC axis control group B axis movement signal
EDENB: PLC axis control group B auxiliary function implement signal
F0134 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFB EMFB
EABUFB: PLC axis control group B buffer full signal
EMFB: PLC axis control group B auxiliary function strobe signal
434
Connection
F0135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11B~EM28B
F0136 EBSYC *** *** EGENC EDENC *** *** ***
EBSYC: PLC axis control group C command read completed signal
EGENC: PLC axis control group C axis movement signal
EDENC: PLC axis control group C auxiliary function implement signal
F0137 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFC EMFC
EABUFC: PLC axis control group C buffer full signal
EMFC: PLC axis control group C auxiliary function strobe signal
F0138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C
PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11C~EM28C
F0139 EBSYD *** *** EGEND EDEND *** *** ***
EBSYD: PLC axis control group D command read completed signal
EGEND: PLC axis control group D axis movement signal
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
EDEND: PLC axis control group D auxiliary implement signal

F0140 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFD EMFD
EABUFD: PLC axis control group D buffer full signal
EMFD: PLC axis control group D auxiliary function strobe signal
F0141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D
PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11D~EM28D
F0142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A
PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM31A~EM48A
F0145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B
PLC axis control group B auxiliary function code signals EM3BA~EM48B
F0148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C
PLC axis control group C auxiliary function code signals EM31C~EM48C
F0151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D
PLC axis control group D auxiliary function code EM31D~EM48D
F0182 *** *** *** EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
EACNT5: PLC axis control 5th axis control signal
EACNT4: PLC axis control 4th axis control signal
EACNT3: PLC axis control Y axis control signal
EACNT2: PLC axis control Z axis control signal
EACNT1: PLC axis control X axis control signal
F0198 *** *** *** PRO5 PRO4 PRO3 PRO2 PRO1
PRO4: Program zero return end signal PRO5
F0199 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** MSPHD
435
Connection
MSPHD: Spindle JOG detection signal
F0200 *** *** *** SIMSPL *** *** *** ***
SIMSPL: Analog spindle active
F0201 *** *** DECI *** *** DCS *** ***
DECI: DEC signal level selection in reference return
DCS: If OUT key may start program in MDI mode
F0205 *** *** *** *** *** ZNIK *** ***
ZNIK: Axis move key hold active in zero return
F0210 *** MST MSP *** MESP *** SINC SOVI
MST: Shield external cycle start signal
MSP: Shield external feed hold signal
MESP: Shield external emergency stop signal
F0212 *** *** *** COVL CINP CDWL *** ***
COVL: Bit check being executed
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
CINP: G04 code being executed

CDWL: RS232 interface being receiving
F0213 *** *** *** *** *** *** CTRD CTPU
CTRD: RS232 interface being transmitting
CTPU: Spindle jog/lubricating selection
F0214 *** *** *** VAL5 VAL4 VALY ZVAL XVAL
VAL5: 5th axis direction selection
VAL4: 4th axis direction selection
VALY: Y direction selection
VALZ: Z direction selection
VALX: X direction selection
5.2.5 G address (PLCCNC)
G0004 *** *** *** *** FIN *** *** ***
FIN: MST function end signal
G0005 *** AFL *** *** *** *** *** ***
AFL: MST lock signal
SFIN: Spindle S function end signal
G0006 *** SKIPP *** OVC *** ABSM *** SRN
OVC: Feedrate override cancel signal
SRN: Program restart signal
G0007 RLSOT EXLM *** *** *** ST STLK ***
ST: Cycle start signal
436
Connection
G0008 ERS RRW SP ESP *** *** *** IT
ERS: External reset signal
RRW: Reset and cursor return signal
SP: Feed hold signal
ESP: Emergency stop signal
G0010 JV07 JV06 JV05 JV04 JV03 JV02 JV01 JV00
G0011 JV15 JV14 JV13 JV12 JV11 JV10 JV09 JV08
JOG override signal JV00~JV15
G0012 FV07 FV06 FV05 FV04 FV03 FV02 FV01 FV00
Feedrate override signal FV00~FV07
G0014 *** *** *** *** *** *** RV2 RV1
RV2: Rapid feedrate override signal RV2
RV1: Rapid feedrate override signal RV1
G0018 *** *** *** *** HD HC HB HA
HD: MPG feed selection signal (01004th)
HC MPG feed selection signal (01015th)
HB: MPG feed selection signal (0011Y)
HA: MPG feed selection signal (0001X. 0010Z)
G0019 RT *** MP2 MP1 *** *** *** ***
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
RT: Manual rapid feed selection signal

MP2: MPG override signal MP2
MP1: MPG override signal MP1
G0027 CON *** *** SSTP2 SSTP1 *** SWS2 SWS1
CON: Cs contouring control switch signal
SSTP2: 2nd spindle stop signal (for multi-spindle function)
SSTP1: 1st spindle stop signal (for multi-spindle function)
SWS2: Multi-spindle selection signal 2
SWS1: Multi-spindle selection signal 1
G0028 *** *** *** *** *** GR2 GR1 ***
GR2: Gear selection signal
GR1: Gear selection signal
G0029 *** KSSTP *** SAR *** *** *** ***
KSSTP: spindle stop signal
SAR: spindle speed arrival
GR22: 2nd spindle gear selection signal 2 (for multi-spindle function)
GR21: 2nd spindle gear selection signal 1 (for multi-spindle function)
G0030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
SOV7: 2nd Spindle override signal SOV7
437
Connection
SOV3: 1st Spindle override signal SOV3
G0032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
R08I: Spindle motor speed code signal R08I
G0033 SIND *** *** *** R12I R11I R10I R09I
SGN: Spindle motor code polarity selection signal
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
SIND: Spindle motor speed code selection signal

G0043 ZRN *** DNC1 *** *** MD4 MD2 MD1
MD1: Current mode selection 1
DNC1: DNC selection signal
ZRN: Current mode selection 4
G0044 HDT *** *** *** *** *** MLK BDT
BDT: Block skip signal (PLCCNC)
MLK: Machine lock signal(PLCCNC)
HDT: Manual tool change signal
G0046 DRN *** *** *** KEY1 *** SBK ***
SBK: Single block signal (PLCCNC)
KEY1: Memory protection signal
DRN: Dry run signal
G0054 UI07 UI06 UI05 UI04 UI03 UI02 UI01 UI00
UI00: Macro input signal UI00
438
Connection
G0055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08
G0061 *** *** RGTSP2 RGTSP1 *** *** *** RGTAP
RGTAP: Rigid tapping signal
RGTSP1: Spindle selection in rigid tapping RGTSP1
RGTSP2: Spindle selection in rigid tapping RGTSP2
G0074 *** *** SRVB SFRB *** *** *** ***
SFRB: Spindle CCW signal in rigid tapping
SRVB: Spindle CW signal in rigid tapping
G0100 *** *** *** +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
+J1: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J1

G0102 *** *** *** -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1
-J1: Feed axis and direction selection signal -J1
-J5: Feed axis and direction selection signal J5
G0114 *** *** *** +L5 +L4 +L3 +L2 +L1
+L1: Axis overtravel signal +L1
G0116 *** *** *** -L5 -L4 -L3 -L2 -L1
-L1: Axis overtravel signal -L1
439
Connection
-L5: Axis overtravel signal L5
G0200 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SPD
SPD Spindle jog signal
G0201 NT07 NT06 NT05 NT04 NT03 NT02 NT01 NT00
NT00: Current tool No. NT00
TOMATECH AUTOMATION

440
Connection
5.2.6 Address A (message display requiery signal, defined by standard
PLC
ladders)
Address Alarm No. Content
A0000.0 1000 Tool change too long
A0000.1 1001 Tool post not in-position alarm as tool change ends
A0000.2 1002 Tool change unfinished alarm
A0000.3 1003 Tool post clamping signal not received
A0000.4 1004
Recheck clamping signal, and clamping signal inactive as tool
change ends
A0000.5 1005 Tool change execution is mistaken before power off
A0000.6 1006 Pre-indexing proximity switch not arrived
A0000.7 1007 Tool post overheat alarm
A0001.0 1008 M10 and M11 codes disabled for tailstock function inactive
A0001.1 1009 Run-out disabled in spindle running
A0001.3 1011 Spindle start unallowed as tailstock advancing not detected
A0001.4 1012 Cycle unallowed for cycle start disabled
A0001.5 1013 Spindle start unallowed for spindle enable off
A0001.6 1014 Confirm the tools of tool post (8, 10, 12 tools)
A0002.0 1014 Please reset BIT1, BIT0 of parameter 168 for tool post model
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
A0002.1 1016 Alarm of safe door not closed

A0002.3 1017 Alarm of chuck low pressure
A0002.4 1019 Chuck released unallowed in spindle running
A0002.5 1020 Clamping in-position signal inactive alarm in spindle running
A0002.6 1021
Spindle start unallowed if chuck clamping in-position signal
inactive
A0003.0 1022 Spindle start unallowed for chuck releasing
A0003.0 1024 M12/M13 code disabled as chuck inactive
A0003.1 1025 Has not checked the chuck clamped/released start signal
A0003.3 1027 The tool pot is not released
A0003.4 1028 Has not found the target tool
A0003.5 1029 Has not received tool pot stop and locking start signal
A0003.7 1031
Total tools is more than 4, and the external override cannot be
connected
A0004.1 1032 Illegal M code
A0004.2 1033 Spindle jog disabled in non-analog spindle mode
A0004.3 1035 M63, M64 designation error
A0004.4 1036 Spindle gear change time is too long
A0004.5 1037 Spindle speed/position control switch time is too long
A0004.6 1038 The 2nd spindle speed/position control switch time is too long
A0004.7 1039 Spindle position control does not permit the orientation
A0005.0 1040 Spindle orientation time is too long
A0005.1 1041 Alarm for the abnormal spindle servo or frequency converter for
abnormality
A0005.2 1042 Alarm for the abnormal 2nd spindle servo or frequency converter
A0005.3 1043 Forbid clamping the spindle when the spindle rotating or feeding
441
Connection
A0005.4 1044 Spindle is clamped not to rotate or feed
A0007.0 2000 Hydraulic motor is not started
A0007.1 2001 Safety door has been opened
A0007.3 2003 Alarm for the tool pot unclocked
5.2.7 K addressK parameter, standard PLC definition
RRW =1: the cursor returning to the head of the program in any working modes when the
system resets is valid;
=0: the cursor returning to the head of the program in edit mode when the system resets is
valid
RSJG =1: the spindle lubricating, cooling output keep when the system resets;
=0: the spindle lubricating, cooling output close when the system resets.
OUTR =1: pressing can start the program run in MDI mode;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
=0: pressing cannot start the program run in MDI mode.

OVRI =1: feedrate override is fixed to 100%
=0: feedrate override can be adjusted.
JSPD =1: the spindle JOG in any modes are valid;
=0: the spindle JOG in MANUAL, MPG, ZERO RETURN are valid.
LMIS =1: overtravel signal LOW/HIGH alarm of each axis
=0: overtravel signal LOW/HIGH alarm of each axis.
LMIT =1: overtravel of each axis is valid;
=0: overtravel of each axis is invalid.
K 1 1 CHOT *** CHET TCPS CTCP TSGN CHTB CHTA
CHTA: tool change mode selection bit 0
CHTB: tool change mode selection bit 1see table below
TSGN =0: tool signal HIGH (be connected to +24V) is valid
=1: tool signal HIGH (be not connected to +24V) is valid
CTCP =0: do not check the tool post lock signal
=1: check the tool post lock signal
TCPS =0: tool post lock signal LOW(be not connected to +24V) is valid
=1: tool post lock signal LOW(be connected to +24V) is valid
CHET=0: do check the tool signal when the tool change ends
=1: check the tool signal when the tool change ends
1 0 Yantai AK31 series(6, 8,10, 12 tools)
1 1 Liuxin hydraulic tool post8, 10, 12 tools
442
Connection
CHOT=0: do not check the tool post overheat
=1: check the tool post overheat
SLQP =1: chuck control function is valid;
=0: chuck control function is invalid.
SLSP =1: when the chuck function is valid, the system does not check whether the chuck
is
clamped;
=0: when the chuck function is valid, the system checks whether the chuck is clamped;
when the chuck is not clamped and the spindle cannot be stated, the system alarms.
NYQP =1: in outer mode, NQPJ is outer chuck release signal, WQPJ is outer clamp
signal;
=0: in inner mode, NQPJ is outer chuck clamp signal, WQPJ is outer release signal.
CCHU =1: the system checks the chuck in-position signal, No.002 Bit7 is inner chuck
clamp/outer release signal NQPJ, BIT6 is outer clamp/inner release signal WQPJ,
the spindle gear shifting in-position signal M411, M421 is invalid.
=0: the system does not check the chuck in-position signal.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
K 1 3 SPTW SLTW
SLTW =1: tailstock control function is valid;
=0: tailstock control function is invalid.
SPTW =1: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward does not interlock, the
tailstock can execute the tailstock forward/backward no matter what the spindle is in
any states;
=0: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward interlock. When the spindle
rotates, the tailstock does not go backward; when it does not go forward, the spindle
must not be started.
K 1 4 SPB4 PB4 SPB3 PB3
PB3 =0: pressure low check function is invalid;
=1: pressure low check function is valid.
SPB3 =0: when PRES is connected with +24Vthe system alarms for pressure low
=1: when PRES is not connected with +24Vthe system alarms for pressure low.
PB4 =0: safety door check function is invalid;
=1: safety door check function is valid.
SPB4 =0: when SAGT is not connected with +24V, the safety door is closed;
=1: when SAGT is connected with +24V, the safety door is closed.
K 1 5 RCS RSCS SHT AGIM AGIN AGER
AGER =1: Spindle automatic gearing active
=0: Spindle automatic gearing inactive
AGIN =1: Detect M41I, M42I signal when automatically gearing to gear 1, 2
=0: Not detect M41I, M42I signal when automatically gearing to gear 1, 2
AGIM =1: M41I, M42I signals active when connecting to 0V
=0: M41I, M42I signals active when connecting to +24V
SHT =1: the spindle gear power-down memorizes;
=0: the spindle gear power-down does not memorize.
443
Connection
RSCS =1: close the spindle contour control in emergent stop, reset;
=0: does not close the spindle contour control in emergent stop, reset
RCS =1: Cs function is valid
=0: Cs function is invalid.
K 1 6 SINC M32A ROVI SOVI
SINC 1: in Step(MPG) mode, 1000 is invalid, 1, 10, 100 are valid
0: in Step(MPG) mode, 1, 10, 100, 1000 are valid.
SOVI =1: external feedrate override switch is valid;
=0: external feedrate override switch is invalid.
ROVI =1: external feedrate override is reverse;
=0: external feedrate override is not reverse.
M32A =1: output the lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is
valid;
=0: do not output the lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
valid.
K 1 7 MSEN SCLP SALM2 SALM SSTP *** *** ***
SSTP =0: do not close the analog voltage when the spindle stops;
=1: close the analog voltage when the spindle stops.
SALM =0: the alarm occurs when the spindle HIGH;
=1: the alarm occurs when the spindle HIGH.
SALM2=0: the occurs when the 2nd spindle HIGH;
=1: the occurs when the 2nd spindle LOW.
SCLP =0: the spindle clamping commands executes the 1st spindle clamped, the
multi-spindle
function is valid;
=1: the spindle clamping commands executes the 2nd spindle clamped, the multi-spindle
function is valid;
MSEN =0: the multi-spindle control function is invalid;
=1: the multi-spindle control function is invalid.
K 1 8 *** *** *** *** MDOK MD4 MD2 MD1
MDOK =0: the operation mode when power-on again is the one that the system is turned
off;
=1: the operation mode when power-on is the one specified by MD4, MD2, MD1.
MD4 MD2 MD1 Operation mode when power on
0 0 0 MDI mode
0 0 1 Auto mode
0 1 0 Program zero return
0 1 1 Edit mode
1 0 0 MPG mode
1 0 1 Manual mode
1 1 0 Machine zero return
5.3 PLC Data

5.3.1 Timer address T(defined by standard PLC ladders)
Address Meaning
444
Connection
T0000 Timing the closing previous gear count
T0001 Timing from New gear outputting to FIN
T0002 M3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 11, 32, 33 execution timing
T0004 timing from tool CCW stop to CW start
T0005 timing for tool CW
T0006 S code execution timing
T0007 M01, 02, 30 execution timing
T0008 Having not received alarm time of TCP signal
T0009 Tool rotation(CW) timing
T0010 Timing from the spindle stop to brake output
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
T0011 Spindle brake output timing

T0012 Spindle jog timing
T0013 timing the lubricating jog output time
T0018 Chuck pulse output timing
T0021 Spindle stop, check operation enabling delay
T0039 M01,02,30 execution timing
T0046 Spindle speed/position switch timing
5.3.2 Counter address C(Defined by standard PLC Ladders)
Address Meaning
C0001 Rapid feedrate override - counting on MDI panel
C0002 Rapid feedrate override + counting on MDI panel
C0004 Feed - counting on MDI panel
C0005 Feed + counting on MDI panel
C0006 Spindle override counting on MDI panel
C0007 Spindle override + counting on MDI panel
C0016 Manual feed counting on MDI panel
C0017 Manual feed + counting on MDI panel
C0020 2 resetting counting of tool change unfinished alarm
5.3.3 Timer presetting address DT(Defined by standard PLC ladders)
Address Meaning
DT000 Time for original gear disabling during spindle automatic
gear changing (ms)
DT001 Delay time after the changed spindle gear is in position (ms)
DT002 Detection time for low pressure alarm (ms)
DT004 Permit time for tool changing (ms)
DT005 M command execution time (ms)
DT006 S command execution time (ms)
DT007 Delay time for tool post from CW to CCW output (ms)
DT008 Tool post lock signal detection time (ms)
DT009 Tool post CCW rotation lock time (ms)
DT010 Spindle braking delay output time (ms)
DT011 Spindle braking output time (ms)
445
Connection
Address Meaning
DT012 Spindle JOG time (ms)
DT013 Time for manual lubricating ON (0: time is not limited) (ms)
DT014 Chuck clamping command execution time (ms)
DT015 Chuck unclamping command execution time (ms)
DT016 Interval of automatic lubricating (ms) (can be modified
directly)
DT017 Time for automatic lubrication output (ms) (can be modified
directly)
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
DT018 Chuck pulse output width (ms) (can be modified directly)

DT020 Spindle clamping/unclamping time (ms)
DT021 Spindle stop, chuck enable delay time (ms)
DT023 Delay time before spindle motor torque decreases to 0 after
spindle starts clamping
5.3.4 Counter presetting address DC
Address Meaning
DC000 Spindle zero-speed output range (r/min)
446
Connection
CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING PITCH ERROR
COMPENSATION
6.1 Function Description

There are more or less precision errors in the pitch of machine axes lead screw, and it will
definitely affect the parts machining precision. ThisTAC-1002T CNC system has the
memorizing
pitch error offset function that it can accurately compensate the pitch error of the lead
screw.
6.2 Specification
1) The set offset amount is concerned with the offset origin, offset intervals etc.;
2) Pitch error offset value is get by searching the table about machine coordinates and
pitch
error compensation origin;
3) Points to be compensated: 1024 points for 5 axes, each axis confirms point range by
parameter setting;
4) Axis compensated: X, Y, Z ,4th,5th axis
5) Compensation range: -25502550least input increment;
6) Compensation interval: 100009999999least input increment;
7) Compensation amount of compensation point N(N=0,1,2,3,1023) is determined by
the
mechanical error between point N and point N-1;
8) The setting is the same as the CNC parameters input, see Operation.

6.3.1 Pitch compensation
Bit parameter
0 0 3 PCOMP
Bit5=1: Pitch error offset active;
Bit5=0: Pitch error offset inactive;
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
6.3.2 Pitch error compensation number

Set the maximum pitch error compensation number and the minimum pitch error
compensation
number of each axis through parameters No.096 and No.097 so that the compensation
range can be
determined. In an offset value list, the number that corresponds to machine zero point is
called pitch
error compensation origin (reference point). The pitch error compensation origin is set by
parameter
No. 098. It can be any value within the compensation range according to mechanical
requirement.
Data parameter
0 9 6 PECMINn
The maximum pitch error compensation number
0 9 7 PECMAXn
The minimum pitch error compensation number
0 9 8 PECORGn
The pitch error compensation number that corresponds to machine zero point
Chapter 6 Memorizing Pitch Error
447
Connection
6.3.3 Pitch error compensation interval
0 9 9 PECINTn
Meaning Interval between pitch error compensation point
Unit
Setting Unit IS-B IS-C
Range
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000999999 100009999999
Inch machine 400999999 40009999999
6.3.4 Offset value
Pitch error offset amount of each axis is set according to the following table, and offset
amount is
input in diameter value without relating to diameter programming or radius programming,
and the
input value unit is the least input increment.
Offset No. Offset value Z Offset value
000 0 0200 0
001 5 0201 -2
002 -3 0202 4
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
6.4 Notes of Offset Setting

The setting and alteration of pitch offset can only be done at the authority of password
level 2.
After the parameter of pitch offset is set, only the machine zero is returned could the
offset be
done.
6.5 Setting Examples of Offset Parameters

Assume that the pitch error compensation range is 0~255.
Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =0, Data parameter No.099 (offset
interval)=10.000
When the pitch error origin is set to 0:
The offset value for the 1st segment is set by the position No.001 in the offset table, the
offset
value for the 2nd segment is set by the position No.002 in the offset table, and the offset
value for the
Nth segment is set by the position No.000+N in the offset table.
The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of pitch error origin, it begins to
compensate
the position No.001 in the offset table from the machine zero. So the pitch error offset can
only be
done in the positive moving direction of the machine coordinate system.
448
Connection
The position No.000 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point (i.e. pitch error
origin
0), the offset point 1 corresponds to a point of positive 10.000 moving from this reference
point, and
So there is a offset point every 10.000 mm. l. At offset point N, set an offset value which is
the
compensation amount by moving from (N-1)(offset interval) to N(offset interval).
The following table content is resulted from the above:
Actually the machine moves from the reference point to the point of +30.000, the pitch
error offset
is: (+7)+(-6)+(+4)=+5
Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =60, No.099(offset interval) =10.000
For the positive moving, the 1st segment error offset is set by position No.061 in the offset
table,
the 2nd segment by position No.062. The Nth segment error offset is set by position
No.060+N in the
offset table.
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
For the negative moving, the 1st segment error offset is set by position No.060 in the offset
table,
the 2nd segment by position No.059. The Nth segment error offset is set by position
No.060-N in the
offset table.
The machine zero is taken as the reference point of the pitch error origin, when moving
from the
positive of machine coordinate system, it begins to compensate by the corresponding
position
No.061 in the offset table; when moving from the negative of the machine coordinate
system, it
begins to compensate by the position No.060. Therefore the pitch offset can be done
when moving in
the positive or the negative axis of machine coordinate system.
Setting
point
Machine
coordinate
system
Reference point
-60.000 -20.000 0 +10.000
58 59 60 61
(+0) (-7) (-7) (+6) (+4)
-10.000
The position No.060 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point, No.061value in
the
compensation table is a compensation amount by executing a positive movement
10.000mm from
origin. So there is an offset point every 10.000. No.061value in the compensation table is
a
Machine coordinate
system
Offset
parameter No.
Offset
value
Drive unit current code
pulses before compensating
Drive unit current command
pulses after compensating
Reference point 0 000 000 00000 00000
10.000 001 7 10000 10007
20.000 002 -6 20000 20001
30.000 003 4 30000 30005
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
004
Chapter 6 Memorizing Pitch Error
449
Connection
compensation amount by executing a negative movement 10.000mm from origin. So
there is an
offset point every -10.000. No.59 is a compensation amount at -10.000~-20.000mm.
Therefore the
point N is set by an offset of move from (N-61)(offset interval) to (N-60)(offset interval).
The following table content is resulted from the above:
Actually as the machine moves from point -30.000 to the point +10.000, the pitch error
offset is:
(-7)+(-7)+(+6)+(+4)=(-4)
Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =127, No.099 (offset interval) =10.000
The offset value for the 1st segment is set by the position No.255 in the offset table, the
offset
value for the 2nd segment is set by the position No.254 in the offset table, and the offset
value for the
Nth segment is set by the position No.256-N in the offset table.
The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of pitch error origin, the system
compensates the compensate amount set by No.255 in the offset table from the machine
zero to the
negative direction. So the pitch error compensation can be executed when the machine
coordinates
are less than 0.
The position No.255 is an offset value from reference point to -10.000mm, No.254 value in
the
table is the one from -10.000mm to -20.000mm, so there is an offset point every -10.000.
Therefore
the point N is set by an offset of move from (N-256)(offset interval) to (N-255)(offset
interval).
Above is the example of the following offset interval error.
Machine
coordinate
system
Offset parameter
No.
Offset value
Drive unit current
code pulses before
compensating
Drive unit current
code pulses after
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
compensating
-30.000 058 -7 -30000 -29992
-20.000 059 -7 -20000 -19999
-10.000 060 +6 -10000 -10006
Reference
point 0
00
10.000 061 +4 10000 10004
062
Machine
coordinate
system
Offset
parameter
number
Offset value Drive unit current
code pulses before
compensating
Drive unit current
code pulses after
compensating
Reference point 0 0 0
-10.000 127 2 10000 10002
450
Connection
Actually the machine moves from the point -40.000 to the reference point, the pitch error
offset is:
(+3)+(-7)+(0)+(+2)=(-2).
-20.000 126 0 20000 20002
-30.000 125 -7 30000 29995
-40.000 124 3 40000 39998
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
451
Appendix
Appendix TAC-1002T,TAC-1002T-V contour

dimension
45
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
L N
TAC-100XT contour dimension
CN62
CN13
OUTPUT
CN12
AXIS Z
CN21
AXIS Y
CN1
CN61 CN15
CN14
SPINDLE
AXIS 5
INPUT
CN11
AXIS 4
CN31
AXIS X
+12V
+5V
+5V
0V
+5V
ENCODER
-12V
0V
0V
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
+24V
CN51
EXTENSION
MPG
P
~
L N
220 V
1:4
TAC-100XT-V contour dimension
452
Appendix
Appendix TAC-1002T-B outline dimension

45

AP01
AP01: aluminum alloy 420mm71mm, can be fixed below the panel and the outline
dimension is as
follow:

Appendix
453
Appendix
AP02
AP02: aluminum alloy 100mm260mm , can be fixed at the side of panel and the outline
dimension is as follows:
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
AP03
70
30
50
40
60
10
20
80
90
CYCLE START FEED HOLD
OVERTRAVEL
RELEASE
POWER ON POWER OFF
454
Appendix
MCT01A
MCT02
Appendix
455
Appendix
Appendix Delivery standard parameter

State
parameter
Standard parameter 1
servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard parameter
3servo 0.1u-level
User parameter
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
(backup)
001 00000000 00000000 00011010
002 10000010 10000010 10000010
003 00010000 00010000 00010000
004 01000000 01000000 01000000
005 00010011 00010011 00010011
006 00000000 00000000 00000000
*007 10000000 10000000 10000000
008 00011111 00011111 00011111
009 00000011 00000011 00011111
010 00001111 00001111 00011111
011 00000000 00000000 00000000
012 10101011 10101011 10101011
013 00000000 00000000 00000000
014 00011111 00011111 00011111
017 00001000 00001000 00001000
018 00000000 00000000 00000000
020 00000000 00000000 00000000
172 00100000 00100000 00100000
174 00001000 00001000 00001000
*175 00000000 00000000 00000000
180 00000000 00000000 00000000
181 00000000 00000000 00000000
182 00000000 00000000 00000000
183 00000000 00000000 00000000
184 00010000 00010000 00010000
185 00000000 00000000 00000000
186 00000000 00000000 00000000
187 X 00000010 00000010 00000010
---- Z 00000010 00000010 00000010
188 X 01000101 01000101 01000101
---- Z 01000101 01000101 01000101
196 00000000 00000000 00000000
202 00000000 00000000 00000000
203 00000000 00000000 00001111
456
Appendix
State
parameter
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
015 X 1 1 1
---- Z 1 1 1
016 X 1 1 1
---- Z 1 1 1
019 5 5 5
021 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
022 X 4000 2500 4000
---- Z 8000 5000 8000
*023 X 100 240 100
---- Z 100 240 100
024 0 0 0
025 0 0 0
*026 100 200 100
*027 8000 8000 8000
*028 200 50 200
*029 100 160 100
*030 200 200 200
031 1260 1260 1260
032 X 200 200 200
---- Z 400 400 400
033 X 100 100 100
---- Z 200 200 200
034 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
035 0 0 0
036 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
037 9999 9999 9999
---- S2 9999 9999 9999
038 9999 9999 9999
---- S2 9999 9999 9999
039 9999 9999 9999
---- S2 9999 9999 9999
040 9999 9999 9999
---- S2 9999 9999 9999
*041 100 50 100
042 10 10 10
043 99 99 99
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
044 115200 115200 115200

045 X 99999999 99999999 99999999
---- Z 99999999 99999999 99999999
046 X -99999999 -99999999 -99999999
---- Z -99999999 -99999999 -99999999
047 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
Appendix
457
Appendix
State
parameter
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
048 0 0 0
049 0 0 0
050 0 0 0
051 1 1 1
052 0 0 0
053 0 0 0
054 0 0 0
055 1 1 1
056 0 0 0
057 1 1 1
058 0 0 0
059 0 0 0
060 0 0 0
061 0 0 0
062 0 0 0
063 0 0 0
064 0 0 0
065 0 0 0
066 0 0 0
067 100 100 100
---- S2 100 100 100
068 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
069 0 0 0
070 1024 1024 1024
---- S2 1024 1024 1024
071 32 32 32
072 50 50 50
073 4095 4095 4095
---- S2 4095 4095 4095
074 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
075 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
076 0 0 0
077 0 0 0
078 0 0 0
079 0 0 0
080 0 0 0
081 0 0 0
082 0 0 0
083 0 0 0
084 4 4 4
085 0 0 0
086 0 0 0
087 0 0 0
458
Appendix
State
parameter
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
088 0 0 0
089 0 0 0
090 0 0 0
091 0 0 0
092 0 0 0
093 0 0 0
094 0 0 0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
095 0 0 0
096 X 0 0 0
---- Z 200 200 200
097 X 199 199 199
---- Z 399 399 399
098 X 100 100 100
---- Z 300 300 300
099 X 10000 10000 10000
---- Z 10000 10000 10000
100 0 0 0
101 0 0 0
102 0 0 0
103 0 0 0
104 0 0 0
105 0 0 0
106 0 0 0
107 0 0 0
108 0 0 0
109 40 40 40
110 S1 1 1 1
---- S2 1 1 1
111 S1 1 1 1
---- S2 1 1 1
112 0 0 0
113 X 3800 2500 3800
---- Z 7600 5000 7600
114 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
115 0 0 0
116 0 0 0
117 0 0 0
118 0 0 0
119 3 3 3
120 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
121 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
122 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
Appendix
459
Appendix
State
parameter
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
123 X 0 0 0
---- Z 0 0 0
124 0 0 0
125 0 0 0
126 0 0 0
127 0 0 0
128 0 0 0
129 0 0 0
130 0 0 0
131 0 0 0
132 0 0 0
133 0 0 0
134 1 1 1
135 0 0 0
136 0 0 0
137 0 0 0
138 0 0 0
139 0 0 0
140 1000 1000 1000
141 100 100 100
142 10000 10000 10000
143 20000 20000 20000
144 7500 7500 7500
145 15000 15000 15000
146 0 0 0
147 0 0 0
148 0 0 0
149 0 0 0
150 0 0 0
151 0 0 0
152 0 0 0
153 0 0 0
154 10 10 100
155 0 0 0
156 0 0 0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
157 0 0 0
158 0 0 0
159 0 0 0
160 0 0 0
161 0 0 0
162 10 10 10
---- S2 10 10 10
163 100 100 100
---- S2 100 100 100
164 0 0 0
165 0 0 0
460
Appendix
State
parameter
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
166 10 10 10
---- S2 10 10 10
167 200 200 200
---- S2 200 200 200
168 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
169 0 0 0
---- S2 0 0 0
170 20 20 20
171 0 0 0
176 0 0 0
177 0 0 0
178 0 0 0
179 0 0 0
182 0 0 0
189 0 0 0
190 0 0 0
191 0 0 0
192 0 0 0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
193 0 0 0
194 0 0 0
195 0 0 0
196 0 0 0
197 0 0 0
198 0 0 0
199 0 0 0
200 0 0 0
201 0 0 0
204 0 0 0
205 0 0 0
206 0 0 0
207 0 0 0
208 0 0 0
209 0 0 0
210 0 0 0
211 0 0 0
212 0 0 0
213 0 0 0
214 0 0 0
215 0 0 0
216 X 360000 360000 3600000
---- Z 360000 360000 3600000
217 0 0 0
218 0 0 0
219 X 1 1 1
---- Z 2 2 2
Appendix
461
Appendix
State
parameter
Standard parameter
1servo 1u-level
Standard parameter
2stepper
Standard
parameter 3servo
0.1u-level
User parameter
(backup)
220 0 0 0
221 0 0 0
222 0 0 0
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
223 0 0 0
224 2 2 2
225 X 88 88 88
---- Z 90 90 90
226 X 1 1 1
---- Z 2 2 2
227 0 0 0
228 0 0 0
229 0 0 0
230 X 1 1 1
---- Z 3 3 3
231 0 0 0
232 0 0 0
233 0 0 0
234 0 0 0
235 0 0 0
236 4 4 4
237 0 0 0
238 0 0 0
239 0 0 0
240 10 10 10
241 1 1 1
242 0 0 0
243 0 0 0
244 0 0 0
245 0 0 0
246 0 0 0
247 0 0 0
248 0 0 0
249 0 0 0
250 0 0 0
251 0 0 0
252 0 0 0
253 0 0 0
254 0 0 0
Note: The parameters of its number with * influence the acceleration/deceleration
characteristics and the user can properly adjust them according to the system
allocation and load characteristics.
462
Appendix
Appendix Alarm list

1. CNC alarm
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
No. Content Remark

000 Emergent stop alarm and ESP open circuit
001 Called programs do not exist or cannot be opened
002 G command values are negative or with decimals
003 Characters are less than 2 or more than 11 for one word
004 Address error (address is A~Z)
005 Illegal command value
006 Block numbers are negative or with decimals
007 Illegal G commands
008 Execute G96 when the spindle analog voltage control is invalid
009
Command movement distance when G commands in group 00 and 01
are not input and there are invalid commands in group 01
010 There are the same addresses in one block
011 There are more than 40 words in one block
012
Command values exceed their valid range or command addresses which
cannot be omitted is omitted
013
Input S commands except for S00~S99 when the spindle analog voltage
control is invalid
014 G commands in group 00, 01 and 12 cannot be in the same one block
015
Execute M commands for spindle automatic gear shifting when the
spindle analog voltage control is invalid
016 Tool offset numbers exceed their valid range(0~32)
017 Tool number exceeds the range of No.084 parameter
018
The data specified by the interpolation command cannot form a correct
curve, or there is no necessary command, or the data exceeds No.154
range
019
The tool group number exceeds the range 1~32 in the tool life
management
020 Cannot execute T command in C tool nose radius compensation, cancel it
024 There is no G11 or G13.1 in the program
025 There is no tool in the current tool group in the tool life management
026 The current tool group has not been defined in the tool life management
027
The tool quantity exceeds 8 in the current tool group in tool life
management
028 The tool life management function is invalid and G10 L3 cannot be used
029 G11 cannot be in front of G10
030 X movement distance isnt zero in G33
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
031 There is non-monotony of corresponding coordinates in G71~G73

032 Absolute value of R is more than that of U/2 in G90, G92
033 Absolute value of R is more than that of W in G94
034 There are more than 100 blocks in G70~G73
035 Ns and Nf are reversed each other in G70~G73
Appendix
463
Appendix
No. Content Remark
036 There is no Ns or Nf or they exceed their allowed range in G70~G73
037 There is no Ns or Nf in G70~G73
038 Single infeed exceeds its allowed range in G71 or G72
039 Single tool retraction exceeds its allowed range in G71 or G72
040 Total cutting travel exceeds its allowed range in G73
041 Cycle times is less than 1 or more than 99999 in G73
042 Single tool retraction R(e) exceeds its allowed range in G74 or G75
043 The tool retraction is negative at the end of cutting in G74 or G75
044 X/Z single cutting value exceeds its allowed range in G74 or G75
045
Starting point of cutting taper thread is between thread starting point and
its end point in G76
046 Min. cutting value exceeds its allowed range in G76
047 Finishing allowance exceeds its allowed range in G76
048 Tooth height is less than finishing allowance or 0 in G76
049 Cycle times exceeds its allowed range in G76
050 Chamfer exceeds its allowed range in G76
051 Angle of tool nose exceeds its allowed range in G76
052 X/Z movement distance in G76 is zero
053 There is no specified tooth height P in G76
054 There is no the first cutting depth Q or Q is 0 or Q is not input
055 Call subprograms in G70~G73
056 Ns does not command G00 or G01 in G70~G73
057 X/ Z value is not specified in the first block or the movement is 0 in G71
058 X/ Z value is not specified in the first block or the movement is 0 in G72
059 Z value is 0 or not input in G74
060 Q value is 0 or not input in G74
061 X value is 0 or not input in G75
062 P value is 0 or not input in G75
063 Initial blocks are employed with the forbidden G commands in G70~G73
064 End blocks are employed with the forbidden G commands in G70~G73
065 Execute G70~G73, G07.1, G12.1 in MDI mode
066
The cycle starting point is in the closed area formed by the starting point
and end point of the finishing path
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
067 Flute quantity is more than 10

068
Starting point coordinates are abnormal when cycle ends and returns to
starting point
069 G76 tool nose angle is more than or equal to thread angle
081 Y cannot feed with X, Z
082
Have no the measured position arrival signal in parameter specifying area
in automatic tool offset(G36,G37)
083
Specifying an invalid axis or a command is incremental in automatic tool
offset (G36,G37). Modify the program
084
Have the measured position arrival signal in area set by the parameter in
automatic tool offset(G36,G37)
464
Appendix
No. Content Remark
085
The distance between the starting point and the target is less than the
setting (142,143) in automatic tool offset(G36,G37), have no set the rapid
motion area
086
The parameter (142,144) or (143,145) area setting are wrong in automatic
tool offset(G36,G37)
087 Firstly create or set the coordinate system before executing G36,G37
088
Firstly set the correct tool number and the compensation number before
executingG36,G37
089 The tool offset is in protection state, and cannot be written
090 When tool offset measure executes the direction input B operation, axis
movement directions are interlocked
095 Subprogram numbers are not input or are illegal when M98 calls them
096 Layers of nested subprograms are more than 4
097 Calling programs in M98 is the current one(main program)
098 Use M98 or M99 in MDI mode
099 Use M98 or M99 in C tool radius compensation
100
Cannot use macro statement and macro command in C tool radius
compensation
101 Operation values of H11, H12, H13, H25 are not binary in G65
102 Operation value of H24 is more than 1023 in G65
103 Denominator is 0 for division operation in G65
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
104 G65 commands illegal H command

105 Macro variable number of G65 is illegal(error)
106 Macro variable P is not commanded or P value is zero in G65
107
Variable Q is not commanded or Q value is zero when H commands
except for H80 or H99 are commanded
108 Do not command variable R or R is illegal
109 P command value isnt variable in G65
110 Number with H21 in G65 is negative
111 H99 user alarm number in G65 exceeds its range
112
Block number of macro command (G65)skip or M99 program return
exceeds their range
113 There is no block number for block skip or M99 program return
114 G65, G66 command format are mistaken
115 G65 H operand is mistaken
118 Number of argument I, J, K cannot exceed 10
120 The thread graduation heads are more than 65535
121 The spindle encode lines are not in 100--5000
130 Programmed axis name is invalid
131
G31/G32/G32.1/G33/G34/G46/G47/G84/G88/Y cannot be used to C tool
nose radius compensation
132 Additional axes have no chamfer function
133 Specified axis is a linearity of cylinder or rotary axis
134 Cannot specify the cylinder radius again
135
The linear or rotary axis setting used to the cylinder interpolation is
mistaken
Appendix
465
Appendix
No. Content Remark
136
Only currently use the tool nose direction T0 or T9 to create C tool
compensation
140 The macro format is specified in error
141 DO,END tabs are not 1,2,3 in macro statement
142 DO,END formats are specified in error
143
The brackets are not matched in macro statement or the format is
specified in error
144 The divisor in macro statement cannot be 0
145 The specified anti-tangent ATAN format is mistaken in macro statement
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
146 The anti logarithm of LN in macro statement is 0 or less than 0

147 The square root in macro statement cannot be negative
148 The tangent TAN result in macro statement is endless
149
The operands of anti sine or anti cosine in macro statement exceed the
range between -1 and 1
150
The macro variable number or the variable value is illegal(error) in macro
statement
151 The local variable is empty
152 The variable #0 is always empty and cannot be operated
153 The operand in macro statement is not binary
155 Format of program note is mistaken (mismatching)
232 Specify the axis movement command in M29 or G84/G88
233 Rigid tapping signal (G61.0) in rigid tapping mode is abnormal
234 Specify M29 repetitively or not input M29 before rigid tapping
235
The spindle must be oriented, M29 cannot be with G84/G88 in the same
block when rigid tapping
236
Set the axis used to the spindle control to the rotary axis before the rigid
tapping/rigid thread machining
238
Have not selected the spindle used to the rigid tapping for the multi-spindle
function device when rigid tapping
239 Cannot switch the spindle used to the tapping when rigid tapping
251
Mistake in programming causes an error of C tool nose radius
compensation
252
Mistake in programming causes an end point of arc machining is not on
the arc in the course of C tool nose radius compensation
253
Mistake in programming causes there are the same coordinates for two
neighboring points not to execute C tool nose radius compensation
254
Mistake in programming causes there are the same coordinates between
center point and starting point of arc not to execute C tool nose radius
compensation
255
Mistake in programming causes there are the same coordinates between
center point and end point of arc not to execute C tool nose radius
compensation
256
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Arc radius is less than that of tool nose to cause not to execute C tool
nose radius compensation
466
Appendix
No. Content Remark
257
Mistake in programming causes there is not intersection of two arcs of
current tool radius in the course of C tool nose radius compensation
258 Specify one arc command as executing C tool nose radius compensation
259 Specify one arc command as canceling C tool nose radius compensation
260 There is excessive cutting as checking C tool nose radius compensation
261
Mistake in programming causes there is not intersection between straight
line and arc of current tool radius in the course of C tool nose radius
compensation
262
Mistake in programming causes there is not intersection between arc and
straight line of current tool radius in the course of C tool nose radius
compensation
263
There are too non movement commands in C too radius compensation,
the buffer overflows
281 The linear chamfer length is too length
282 The arc chamfer radius is too big
283 The linear chamfer length is too big or the arc data is mistaken
284 The arc chamfer radius is too big or the arc data is mistaken
285 The linear chamfer length is too big or the arc data is mistaken
286 The arc chamfer radius is too big or the arc data is mistaken
287 The linear chamfer length is too big or the intersection is not on the arc
288 The arc chamfer radius is too big or the intersection is not on the arc
289 The chamfer cannot be executed in end position
290
Cannot start the polar coordinate and the cylinder interpolation in C tool
compensation state or G99
291
The linear axis or rotary axis of the polar coordinates does not correspond
to No.189 or the linear axis attribution setting is mistaken
292
Execute the length compensation of all axes before starting the polar
coordinates
293 X cannot be negative or 0 in G16/G15
294
Have used the command which cannot be used to the polar coordinates
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
and the cylinder interpolation

295
C tool compensation is not cancelled in the polar coordinates and the
cylinder interpolation
301 Parameter switch has been on
302 CNC initialization is failure
303 Cannot open part programs
304 Fail to save part programs
305 Total lines of part program exceed its range (69993)
306 Illegal dictates have been input
307 Memory capacity is not enough
308 Program numbers exceed the range
309 Editing macro program is forbidden under its current operation authority
310 Cannot open PLC programs (ladder)
311 Edit software version of PLC programs (ladder) is inconsistent
312 First-grade PLC program is too long
Appendix
467
Appendix
No. Content Remark
313 The edit keyboard or operator panel is failure
314 The memorizer is failure, check it or power on again
315 Electronic gear ratio setting is mistaken
316 Set the rotary axis function be to valid before using CS axis or rigid tapping
317
CS axis position is mistaken(must not switch the spindle working mode
when CS axis is working)
318
Cannot move CS axis when the spindle is not switched to the position
control mode
320 CPU voltage is abnormal. Please check the power supply and restart
321 NVRAM data check is mistaken
322 Saving NVRAM data time is too short when the latest power-down
324 There is only basic axis XYZ. Set No. 230 again
325
Cannot set simultaneously two or more CS axis to be valid when the
multi-spindle control function is invalid or the 2nd CS function is not started
326
Y axis cannot set to CS controllable axis when the multi-spindle control
function is valid and the 2nd CS function is valid
330
The axis name of additional axis is not in the setting range or, the axis
names of two or more than two additional are the same ones. Please set
No. 225 again
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
354 The system parameter is modified, and is turned on again

356 Modifying the ladder is successful, please turn on the CNC again
361
The least incremental system setting of additional axis(Y,4th,5th) cannot be
less than the least incremental system (IS-B,IS-C)of the current system,
please set it again
401 The program reference point is not specified
Press reset to
clear alarm, set
program zero in
G50
402
Max. spindle speed at some gear is not specified and check
No.037~No.040
403 Run speed is too rapid
404 Feedrate is cancelled owing to spindle stopping
405 Spindle speed is too low when machining thread
406 Feedrate exceeds the upper value (No.027) when thread machining
Press reset
to clear the
alarm, check the
spindle and
modify NO.106
407 Fluctuation of spindle speed is excessive when machining thread
408 Pitch is less than 0 when the variable pitch is machined
409
The reference point is not created, and 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return
cannot be executed
410 Zero return mode A, zero return failure
411 Exceeding X axis positive software travel limit
412 Exceeding Z axis positive software travel limit
413 Exceeding Y axis positive software travel limit
468
Appendix
No. Content Remark
414 Exceeding the 4th axis software travel limit
415 Exceeding the 5th axis software travel limit
416 Exceeding X negative software travel limit
Press reset to
clear the alarm,
negatively move
X
417 Exceeding Z negative software travel limit
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
Press reset to
clear the alarm,
positively move
X
418 Exceeding Y negative software travel limit
Press reset to
clear the alarm,
negatively move
Z
419 Exceeding 4th negative software travel limit
Press reset to
clear the alarm,
positively move
X
420 Exceeding 5th negative software travel limit
421 X drive unit is not ready
422 Z drive unit is not ready
423 Y positive overtravel
424 4th positive overtravel
425 5th positive overtravel
426 X negative overtravel
427 Z negative overtravel
428 Y negative overtravel
429 4th negative overtravel
430 5th negative overtravel
431 X drive unit have not been ready
432 Z drive unit have not been ready
433 Y drive unit have not been ready
434 4th drive unit have not been ready
435 5th drive unit have not been ready
437 PLC axis is working and cannot be switched
438 CNC axis is working and cannot be switched
439 PLC axis is working and cannot be operated
440 CNC emergent stop is failure(restart the CNC)
450
Data is error! Start the system again to return the machine zero, execute
the toolsetting again to check all parameters
451 Definition of output axis number is mistaken. Please modify No. 226
900 Loaded system allocation file is mistaken. Confirm whether cnc.cfg. exists
901 Loaded system allocation file is mistaken. Confirm whether param.cfg.
exists
902 Loaded parameter value file is mistaken
903 Loaded tool offset file is mistaken
Appendix
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
469
Appendix
No. Content Remark
904 Loaded pitch compensation file is mistaken
905 Loaded workpiece coordinate file is mistaken
906 Starting PLC program is mistaken. Confirm whether the ladder exists and
is correct
909 Limited-time stop time is over and the system cannot run normally. Please
contact with salesmen
999 There is an unknown alarm. Please contact with developers
2. PLC alarmstandard PLC ladder definition

A0000.0 1000 Tool change time is too long
A0000.1 1001 Alarm for the tool is not in-position when tool change
ends
A0000.2 1002 Alarm for the tool change is not completed
A0000.3 1003 Alarm for the system has not received the lock signal
A0000.4 1004 The system repetitively checks the lock signal and the
lock signal is invalid when tool change is done
A0000.5 1005 Tool change makes mistakes before the system is turned
off
A0000.6 1006 Pre-indexing proximity switch does not reach
A0000.7 1007 Alarm for tool post overheat
A0001.0 1008 Tailstock function is invalid, and M10 and M11 cannot be
executed
A0001.1 1009 The thread run-out cannot be executed when the spindle
rotating
A0001.3 1011 Have not checked the tailstock forward and cannot start
the spindle
A0001.4 1012 Tool change mode A and B can have up to 8 tools
A0001.5 1013 Tool use life ends
A0001.6 1014 Confirm tool number of tool post (8, 10, 12)
A0001.7 1015 Confirm tool number of tool post (6, 8, 10, 12)
A0002.0 1016 Alarm for protection door not closed
A0002.1 1017 Alarm for pressure low
A0002.3 1019 Cant release chuck when spindle rotating
A0002.4 1020 Alarm for disabled clamping in-position signal when
spindle rotating
A0002.5 1021 Cant start spindle when disabled clamping in-position
signal
A0002.6 1022 Cant start spindle when chuck is released
A0003.0 1024 Cant execute M12 or M13 with disabled chuck function
A0003.1 1025 Have not checked chuck clamping/releasing in-position
TOMATECH AUTOMATION
signal
A0003.3 1027 Tool pot is not released or lock signal is not cancelled
A0003.4 1028 Has not found the target tool number
A0003.5 1029 Has not received tool pot stop and locking start signal
A0003.7 1031 Total tools is more than 4, and the external override
cannot be connected (address multiplexing)
A0004.0 1032 Illegal M code
A0004.1 1033 The current spindle is not analog, and Jog function
cannot be executed
A0004.2 1034 M03,M04 specification are mistaken
A0004.3 1035 M63,M64 specification are mistaken
A0004.4 1036 Spindle gear shift time is too long
A0004.5 1037 Spindle speed/position control switch time is too long
470
Appendix
A0004.6 1038 The 2nd spindle speed/position control switch time is too
long
A0004.7 1039 Spindle position control does not permit orientation
A0005.0 1040 Spindle orientation time is too long
A0005.1 1041 Alarm for the abnormal spindle servo or frequency
converter for abnormality
A0005.2 1042 Alarm for the abnormal 2nd spindle servo or frequency
converter
A0005.3 1043 Forbid clamping the spindle when the spindle rotating or
feeding
A0005.4 1044 Spindle is clamped not to rotate or feed
A0007.0 2000 Hydraulic motor is not started
A0007.1 2001 Safety door has been opened
A0007.3 2003 Alarm for the tool pot unclocked
A0007.5 2005 Regulation is invalid when feedrate override is fixed to
100%
A0007.6 2006 Override on the panel is disabled when external override
is enabled
A0007.7 2007 Program does not run when external pause switch is
OFF
A0008.0 2008 Axis does not move when manual override is 0
ed to their items correspondingly.__

TAC100XTenglish V1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TAC100XTenglish V1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TAC100XTenglish V1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TOMATECH AUTOMATION

This user manual describes all items concerning the operation of

the system in detail as much as possible. However, it is impractical

to give particular descriptions of all unnecessary and/or unavailable

operations of the system due to the manual content limit, product

specific operations and other causes. Therefore, the operations not

specified herein shall be considered impossible or unallowable.

This user manual is the property of TOMATECH AUTOMATION

individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express

written permission of TOMATECH and the latter reserves the right

to ascertain their legal liability.

This user manual shall be kept by final user.

Refer to user manual from machine manufacturer about functions and

Installation and Connection

Users safety responsibility

Return from subprogram M99..................................................................................... 23

3.11.3 Special cases.................................................................................................. 72

3.26.2 Transfer and cycle............................................................................................ 147

2.2 System Power-off ....................................................................................................205

6.1.3 Searching a character............................................................................................226

8.1.5 Adjustment of the feedrate, rapid rate ...................................................................258

11.3.3 Operation path selection ....................................................................................287

2.1.4 Axis enable signal nEN........................................................................................ 311

2.8.22 Tri-color Lamp........................................................................................... 365

4.8 Tool Post Debugging.................................................................................421

Appendix Outline Dimension of Accessional Panel

1.1.1 Product introduction

Max. speed 60m/minup to 24m/min in 0.1m

2-channel 0V10V analog voltage output, two-spindle control

software serial upgrade

code Function code function

1.1.3 Environment and conditions

1.2 CNC System and CNC Machine

Programming is a course of workpiece contours, machining technologies, technology

Analyse workpiece drawings and confirm

Run part programs and machine workpiece

1.3 Programming Fundamentals

G32 W-27 F3; (BC; thread interpolation)

1.4 Structure of an NC Program

Address Command value range Function meaning Unit

Character for block skip

1.5 Program Run

The program stops running after pressing or emergent stop button;

The program stops running when the system or PLC alarms;

CHAPTER 2 MSTF COMMAND

2.1 M (Miscellaneous Function)

M98, M99, M9000M9999 is executed by NC separately and NC does not output M

End of program M02

Return from subprogram M99

Called subprogram number 0000 9999 . The leading zero of

Macro program call M9000M9999

Command function: call macro programs corresponding to command values (O9000

2.2 Spindle Function

end point in the program block.

O0001 ; (Program name)

2.2.5 Multiple spindle control function

Multiple spindle control method B

Target tool number01-32the leading zero cannot be omitted

2.2.6 Cs contour control funciton

2.3 Tool Function